•IKKIifY 

LIBRARY 

UNIVERSITY  Of 
CALIFORNIA  ^ 


Rev.  MOSES   DICKSON, 
Founder  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve. 


MANUAL 


OF   THE 


IntePnational  Or'dei'  of  Twelve 


OF 


Kniflits  and  MMm  i  Talior 


CONTAINING 


GENERAL  LAWS,  REGULATIONS,  CER- 
EMONIES, DRILL, 


AND  A 


TABORIAN  LEXICON, 


Br 


Rev.  MOSES  DICKSON. 


ST.  LOUIS,  MO,: 

A.  R.  FLEMING  &  CO.,  PRINTERS,  522  N.  Third  Street. 
1891. 


LOAN  STACK 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1891,  by 

MOSES  DICKSON, 
In  the  olllce  of  tlie  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Wasliington. 


INTRODUCTION 


Orders,  societies  and  governments  were  insti- 
tuted for  the  purpose  of  making  a  united  effort  in 
a  given  direction.  Wiiat  one  man  cannot  accom- 
plish, many  men  united  can.  Hence  great  enter- 
prises for  the  well-being  of  mankind  are  carried 
foward  by  companies.  Governments  are  formed 
by  uniting  a  number  of  people  under  one  form  or 
code  of  laws.  Societies  are  or£:anizations  of  a 
number  of  persons  to  accomplish  a  certain  object, 
or  to  obtain  a  desired  end.  Man  was  made  a  social 
being;  he  must  have  society,  or  the  company  of  a 
fellow-being,  or  he  will  drift  into  barbarism  and 
brutality.  Man  is  an  intelligent  being.  Civiliza- 
tion, art,  science,  and  architecture,  and  govern- 
ment, must  come  only  from  an  united  effort. 
Therefore,  the  members  of  the  International  Order 
of  Twelve  have  formed  one  band,  united  by  the 
strongest  ties  of  friendship,  and  bound  together  by 
solemn  obligations,  and  established  on  a  firm  basis, 
for  the  purpose  of  making  a  united  and  effective 
effort  in  aiding  each  member  in  sickness  or  dis- 
tress, to  protect  and  defend  each  other,  to  aid  and 
help  the  widows  and  orphans  of  members  that  died 
in  good  standing,  to  inculcate  true  morality,  that 
the  members  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
may  be  an  example  to  the  masses  of  mankind. 

»59 


It  18  the  highest  and  bounden  duty  of  every 
member  of  the  Knights'  and  Daughters  of  Tabor 
to  individually  and  collectively  help  to  spread  and 
build  up  the  Christian  religion.  The  Order  of 
Twelve  is  non-sectarian — all  members  of  the  Order 
are  free  to  make  their  choice  of  any  Evangelical 
Church.  The  members  of  this  Order  are  reminded 
that  education  and  a  cultivated  mind  will  open  the 
way  to  a  useful  and  respected  life.  We  are  ad- 
monished to  use  every  honorable  method  to  ad- 
vance the  cause  of  education.  The  members  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve  are  advised  to 
acquire  real  estate — this  makes  a  man  or  woman 
a  substantial  and  reliable  citizen.  Avoid  intem- 
perance ;  cultivate  true  manhood ;  eschew  immoral 
and  degraded  people.  Let  your  bearing  and  de- 
portment be  such  that  will  show  you  to  be  a  lady 
or  a  gentleman.  Live  an  exemplary  life,  and  you 
will  die  respected.  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor,  it  is  in  your  power  to  make  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve  a  real  and  lasting  benefit 
to  mankind. 


THE  FOUNDER  AND  FATHER. 


**Rev.  Moses  Dickson  was  born  in  the  City  of  Cin- 
cinnati, Ohio,  April  5th,  1824.  His  parents,  Robert 
and  Hannah  Dickson,  were  natives  of  Virginia. 
They  moved  to  Ohio  just  three  months  before  the 
subject  of  this  sketch  was  born.  Mr.  Dickson's 
father  died  a.  d.  1832;  his  mother  departed  this 
life  A.  D.  1838.  She  was  truly  a  Christian  mother, 
and  became  a  member  of  the  first  A.  M.  E.  Church 
that  was  organized  in  Cincinnati.  Her  children 
were  all  christened  by  Elder  Wm.  Paul  Quinn,  a 
number  of  years  before  he  was  made  a  bishop. 

*'Mr.  Dickson  had  five  sisters  and  three  brothers — 
all  have  passed  away — and  he  has  not  a  relative 
living  at  this  date,  A.  d.  1891.  He  learned  the 
barber's  profession  with  the  well-known  William 
Darnes.  While  learning  the  tonsorial  art,  he 
attended  school,  and  mastered  all  the  branches  of 
study  that  were  taught  in  that  early  day.  At  the 
age  of  sixteen  he  felt  a  desire  to  see  the  South. 
He  embarked  on  a  steamboat,  and  traveled  for 
three  years,  on  various  boats,  upon  the  different 
southern  rivers  and  bayous. 

**In  these  travels  he  saw  slavery  in  all  its  horrors; 
he  witnessed  such  scenes  of  monstrous  cruelty  as 
caused  his  African  blood  to  boil  with  suppressed 
indignation  at  the  sight  of  the  outrageous  suffering 

7 


8 


of  his  people.  What  he  saw  in  these  three  years 
made  a  lasting  impression  on  his  heart,  and  he  be- 
came a  life-foe  to  the  slave-owner,  the  slave-driver 
and  the  slave-trader.  In  his  travels  he  made  the 
acquaintance  of  a  few  true  and  trusty  young  men, 
who  were  ready  to  enter  into  any  plan  that  would 
assure  freedom  to  the  African  race.  These  men 
knew  that  the  magnitude  of  the  work  would  re- 
quire time,  courage  and  patience  to  make  a  success 
of  any  plan  they  might  adopt.  They  resolved  to 
take  two  years  to  study  out  a  plan,  and  meet  in  the 
City  of  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  the  second  Tuesday  in  the 
month  of  August,  1846,  to  prepare  for  business. 

**Mr.  Dickson  embarked  on  board  of  the  steamer 
<Oronoco,'  at  New  Orleans,  in  the  month  of  May, 
1844,'  and  made  the  trip  to  St.  Louis,  remaining  in 
that  city  during  the  summer.  For  two  years  he 
traveled  through  Iowa,  Illinois  and  Wisconsin. 
August,  1846,  he  was  in  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  pre- 
paring to  meet  his  young  friends.  He  had  in  the 
meantime  prepared  a  plan  to  be  submitted  to  them. 
On  the  second  Tuesday  in  August,  as  per  agree- 
ment, twelve  men  assembled  in  the  second  story  of 
an  old  brick  house,  on  the  southeast  corner  of 
Green  and  Seventh  streets.  (The  name  of  Green 
St.  has  since  been  changed  to  Lucas  Ave. )  They 
were  just  the  kind  of  men  to  carry  to  success  the 
spcret  and  great  work  of  obtaining  liberty  for  the 
bondsmen.  Mr.  Dickson  read  his  plan  for  operat- 
ing, and,  after  a  very  careful  discussion  of  all  its 
pails,  it  was  adopted.  Organizations  were  secretly 
to  be  made  in  the  Southern  States.  None  but  re- 
liable,  fearless   men    were   to   be   enrolled.     The 


organizers  were  to  carefully  pick  the  men  that  were 
courageous,  patient,  temperate,  and  possessed  of 
sound  common  sense.  This  was  what  was  required 
in  every  man  that  was  enrolled.  The  oath  that 
bound  them  together  was  so  binding  that  it  could 
not  be  broken.  One  feature  of  it  was :  'I  can  die, 
but  I  cannot  reveal  the  name  of  any  member  until 
the  slaves  are  free.'  This  oath  never  was  broken.  • 
All  the  matter  pertaining  to  the  business  was 
finished,  and  each  man  understood  his  part.  Mr. 
Dickson  was  elected  Chief ;  he  was  to  remain  North 
and  watch  events,  and  keep  the  members  posted. 
Ten  years  was  the  time  fixed  on  to  open  battle  for 
freedom. 

*'It  will  not  be  amiss  now  to  give  the  names  of  the 
men  who,  like  the  Twelve  Apostles,  commenced 
the  great  w^ork  for  Liberty:  John  Patton  and 
Henry  Wright,  in  South  Carolina ;  James  Bedford 
and  Silus  W.  Green,  in  Mississippi ;  Irvin  Hodges, 
in  Alabama;  Peter  Coleman  and  Willis  Owens,  in 
Virginia;  James  Orr,  in  Louisiana;  Miles  Graves, 
in  North  Carolina ;  Henry  Simpson,  in  Georgia; 
Lewis  Williams,  in  Tennessee,  and  Moses  Dickson, 
their  Chief.  These  men,  with  their  aides,  formed 
organizations  in  all  the  Slave  States,  except  Mis- 
souri and  Texas.  Silently,  like  the  falling  of  Autumn 
leaves,  the  organizations  multiplied,  until,  in 
1856,  the  army  of  true  and  trusty  men  numbered 
forty-seven  thousand,  two  hundred  and  forty 
Knights  of  Liberty. 

*'Mr.  Dickson  will  give,  in  another  place,  details 
of  this  wonderful  organization,  its  secrecy,  its  mode 
of  operation,  its  drill,    the   many   Incidents   in  its 


10 


history,  and  why  the  battle  was  not  opened  in 
1856. 

**One  incident  I  must  name:  The  first  organiza- 
tion that  was  created,  under  the  distinct  name  of 
the  Order  of  Twelve,  was  organized  in  the  City  of 
Galena,  Ills.,  by  Mr.  Dickson,  at  the  residence  of 
Alfred  H.  Richardson,  in  August,  1855.  The  se- 
cret work  of  the  Knights  of  Liberty  was  not  im- 
parted to  this  Society. 

**Mr.  Dickson  was  married  to  Mrs.  Mary  Elisabeth 
Peters,  in  Galena,  Ills.,  on  the  5th  day  of  October, 
1848.  She  has  been  his  companion  in  jovs  and 
sorrows  for  forty-two  years  (up  to  1891,  when  she 
departed  this  life).  She.  was  an  exemplary  Chris- 
tian, a  true  and  loving  wife,  a  sound  and  able  coun- 
selor. She  was  loved  by  all  that  were  acquainted 
with  her  throughout  the  South  and  West.  She 
was  known  by  the  dear  name  of  Mother  Dickson. 

**Mr,  Dickson  has  one  child,  Mrs.  Mamie  Augusta 
Hay  den,  the  widow  of  Harry  Halyard  Hay- 
den.  They  have  one  child,  Zennie  Arvesta. 
This  child  was  adopted  by  the  Order  of  Twelve  at 
their  National  Grand  Session,  held  in  Louisville, 
Ky.,  in  1885.  Her  title  is  Princess  of  the  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor.  Mr.  Dickson  fixed  his 
headquarters  in  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  in  1859,  that  he 
might  be  near  the  Knights  of  Liberty  to  guide  their 
affairs.  After  the  war  was  over,  the  work  begun 
by  the  twelve — seemingly  his  work  for  his  people 
— was  finished,  but  he  could  not  rest ;  schools  for 
Colored  children  must  be  opened.  He,  with  a  num- 
ber of  other  stalwart  men,  worked  Avith  energy  in 
the  lobby  at  Jefferson  City,  Mo.     At  length,  under 


11 


the  administration  of  Governor  McClurg,  the  pres- 
ent school  laws  for  Missouri  were  adopted.  Mr. 
Dickson's  next  move  was  to  procure  Colored  teach- 
ers for  Colored  Schools.  It  was  a  hard  fight,  but 
the  move  was  a  success.  Now,  throughout  the 
State  of  Missouri,  Colored  schools  have  Colored 
teachers. 

"Mr.  Dickson  took  an  active  part  in  the  founding 
of  'Lincoln  Institute,'  at  Jefferson  City,  Mo.     He 
was  Trustee  and  Vice-President  of  the   Board  for 
several  years,  and  remained  in  the  Board  until  the 
success   of   the   Institute   was  a   fixed  fact.     Mr. 
Dickson  is  a  member  of  the  Republican  Party,  and 
he  remains  true  to  it.     He  was  a  Delegate  to  every 
State  Convention  of  Missouri,  from  1864  to  1878, 
and  stumped  the  State  several  times  in  the  interests 
of  the  party ;  he  was  Elector-at-Large  on  the  Grant 
ticket  in  1872,  and  did  good  work.     Mr.  Dickson 
was  President  of  the  Refugee  Relief  Board,  in  St. 
Louis,  Mo.,   in    1878.     This   Board   received   and 
cared  for  about  sixteen  thousand  men,  women  and 
children,  who  were  fleeing  from  Southern  oppres- 
sion.    The  whole  North  and  East  was  stirred  up, 
and  thousands  of    dollars    were    received   by  the 
Board  from  the  East  and  North  to  aid  the  fugitives. 
This  money,  with  hundreds  of  large  boxes  of  cloth- 
ing and  provisions  that  were  received,  enabled  the 
President  and  the  Board  to  send  the  refugees  to 
their   destinations   comfortably   clothed   and   with 
ample  provisions  to  last  them  for  several  months. 
Kansas,  Nebraska,  Colorado,  and   other   Northern 
States   received  these   fugitives   from   oppression. 
Mr.  Dickson  has  not  lost  sight   of  them  in   the 


12 


several  States  wherein  they  have  settled.  He  finds 
them  good  citizens  and  doing  well.  Kansas  re- 
ceived over  ten  thousand  of  them. 

*'Mr,  Dickson  was  converted  and  joined  the  A.  M. 
E.  Church  in  1866,  and  was  licensed  to  preach  in 
1867.  He  has  held  large  and  small  charges  for  a 
number  of  years,  and  has  had  invariably  good  suc- 
cess in  the  management  of  churches.  He  is  known 
as  a  church-builder,  a  debt-payer  and  a  revivalist. 
Thirteen  hundred  and  ninety  persons  have  been 
converted  in  the  different  charges  during  his  pas- 
torship. Mother  Dickson  has  been  a  great  help  to 
him  in  his  pastoral  work. 

"The  International  Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  is  an  evidence  of  Mr. 
Dickson's  skill  as  an  organizer.  The  Society  that 
was  organized  by  him  in  Galena,  in  1855,  dis- 
banded in  1859.  The  Knights  of  Liberty  had  be- 
come extinct  after  the  War  of  the  Rebellion.  At 
the  close  of  that  war,  not  a  man,  so  far  as  known, 
of  that  great  number,  returned  from  the  battle-field, 
except  Mr.  Dickson ;  he,  as  an  independent  fighter, 
was  in  thirteen  hard-fought  battles,  and  returned 
home  in  1864,  not  having  received  a  scratch  from 
the  enemy's  bullets. 

'*In  1865,  all  that  was  found  of  the  Galena  So- 
ciety were  seven ;  their  names  are  in  the  Manual. 
In  1868  Mr.  Dickson  decided  to  create  a  Beneficial 
Order  to  perpetuate  the  memory  of  the  twelve  that 
organized  the  Knights  of  Liberty.  After  three 
years  of  preparation,  in  1871,  he  was  ready  to  com- 
mence the  work.  He  organized  a  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  in  Independence,  Mo.;  a  Tabernacle  in 


13 


Kansas  City,  Mo. ;  a  Temple  and  Tabernacle  in  Lex- 
ington, Mo.  With  these  five  organizations  a  Con- 
vention was  called  to  meet  in  Independence,  Mo., 
the  second  Tuesday  in  August,  1872.  This  Con- 
vention organized  the  National  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  of  the  Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights  and 
Daughters  of  Tabor.  The  Child  of  Destiny  was 
born  and  named.  Mr.  Dickson,  with  his  usual 
energy  and  perseverance,  pushed  the  work  of  or- 
ganizing, aided  by  a  number  of  Knights  and 
Daughters. 

"The  Order  grew  rapidly,  spreading  from  State  to 
State,  gathering  strength  in  its  onward  march.  Mr. 
Dickson  did  not  spare  time  nor  money ;  he  used  all 
the  means  that  were  at  his  command  to  build  a  last- 
ing Beneficial  Order.  Within  eighteen  years  this 
Order  has  taken  its  place  and  rank  with  the  great- 
est Colored  organizations  of  the  world.  It  has  had 
strong  opposition  at  every  step  put  forward ;  but, 
^forward'  was  the  motto.  The  father  and  founder 
has  lived  to  see  his  work  firmly  fixed  on  a  solid  basis, 
going  onward,  gaining  strength  daily,  and  a  benefit 
to  thousands.  This  Order  meets  the  necessities  and 
wants  of  the  Colored  people.  It  encourages  Chris- 
tianity, education,  morality  and  temperance;  it 
teaches  the  art  of  governing,  self-reliance  and  true 
manhood  and  womanhood.  It  recommends  to  its 
members  the  getting  of  homes  and  the  acquiring  of 
wealth.  It  teaches  the  greatness,  goodness  and 
mercy  of  God,  and  man's  responsibility  to  the  Su- 
preme Being.  Tabor. 

Dec.  1st,  1890." 


u 


Extract  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.'s  Message  to  the 
Triennial  Grand  Session,  held  in  St.  Louis,  Mo., 
August,  A.  D.  1890: 

A  Change  of  Time. 
**We  have  been  much  perplexed  and  bothered  in 
explaining  the  two  dates  of  the  original  organiza- 
tion. Our  public  speakers  are  hampered  when  they 
come  to  this  part  of  our  history.  The  organization 
of  the  Order  of  Twelve  that  was  made  in  Galena, 
Ills. ,  in  1855,  was  made  to  perpetuate  the  names  of  the 
Twelve  Knights  of  Tabor,  who  were  so  successful 
in  enrolling  the  47,000  Knights  of  Liberty,  for  the 
purpose  of  aiding  in  breaking  the  bonds  of  our 
slavery.  This  secret  organization  of  the  Knights  of 
Liberty  was  one  of  the  strongest  and  most  secret  of 
any  organization  ever  formed  by  men.  The  question 
of  giving  the  history  of  this  organization  to  the 
world  is  one  that  has  had  my  most  earnest  thoughts 
for  several  years.  There  are  so  many  families  of 
the  old  men  of  renown,  both  in  this  country  and 
England,  that  are  now  living  and  hold  high  posi- 
tions, that  they  might  be  injured  by  revealing  the 
secrets  of  the  Knights  of  Liberty  and  giving  the 
names  of  their  fathers.  I  had  almost  decided  to 
let  this  part  of  our  history  rest  in  the  grave,  more 
especially  since  God  found  other  means  to  give  us 
our  manhood  and  freedom ;  but  the  names  of  the 
twelve  men  who  were  instruments  in  God's  hands 
in  preparing  and  organizing  47,000  men  of  un- 
doubted courage  to  do  battle  for  our  freedom  shall 
be  perpetuated.  God  fixed  the  time,  and  every  man 
was  at  his  post.  In  their  death  struggles  they  gave 
to  us  the  boon  of  liberty.   Precious  be  their  memory. 


15 


<*The  organization  that  was  made  in  Galena,  Ills., 
was  no  part  of  the  Knights  of  Liberty.  They  were 
simply  organized  to  perpetuate  the  name,  **Order  of 
Twelve,  of  Knights  of  Tabor."  I  made  the  organi- 
zation in  the  residence  of  Alfred  H.  Richardson. 
The  names  of  the  Knights  that  were  known  to  be 
alive  in  1872  were  given  in  the  old  Manual,  and  are : 
A.  H.  Richardson,  R.  H.  Cain,  Wm.  P.  Emery, 
James  T.  Smith,  J.  Garrett  Johnson  and  G. 
Christopher.  This  organization  closed  its  doors  at 
the  beginning  of  the  great  Rebellion  and  never 
opened  again.  I  have  given  this  statement,  that  we 
may  be  enabled  to  change  the  date  of  our  Order's 
birth.  This  Order,  in  its  present  form,  was  changed 
from  the  original  warlike  order.  Order  of  Twelve, 
into  a  Beneficial  Secret  Order,  and  the  real  date  of 
the  birth  of  our  Order  is  the  12th  of  August,  A.  d. 
1872.  On  that  day  the  Representatives  of  three 
Tabernacles  and  two  Temples  assembled  in  the  City 
of  Independence,  State  of  Missouri,  and  organized 
the  Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor,  and  elected  Grand  Officers.  The  birthday  of 
this  great  Order  of  ours  is  the  12th  day  of  August, 
1872.  The  first  Grand  Session  was  held  in  the  same 
city  the  second  Tuesday  in  August,  a.  d.  1873. 

**I  refer  to  these  matters  as  a  part  of  the  history 
of  the  Order,  and  that  all  official  papers  may  give 
thecorrectdate,  the  12th  of  August,  1890,  A.  O.  T., 
age  of  Taborians — 18  years.  I  recommend  that  the 
12th  of  August  be  made  the  day  to  celebrate  the 
birthday  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve.  I 
recommend  that  the  Triennial  Grand  Session  be 
changed  from  the  second  Tuesday  in  August.     The 


16 


fourth  Tuesday  in  the  month  of  August  was  fixed 
by  this  Triennial  Grand  Session  as  the  day  to 
assemble.  The  12th  day  of  August  was  made  the 
day  for  our  annual  celebration,  in  commemoration 
of  the  birthday  of  the  Order. 

Knights  of  Liberty. 
"This  oro^anization  was  known  among:  its  mem- 
bers  by  the  name  of  Knights  of  Tabor — a  name 
that  gave  the  members  courage.  That  God  was 
with  Barak  and  Deborah,  in  Israel's  great  battle 
with  the  immense  army  of  Sisera;  they,  with  only 
ten  thousand  men,  assembled  on  Tabor,  to  fight 
Jabin's  army,  and,  if  possible,  win  the  victory  and 
break  the  bondage  of  the  Israelites.  God  was  with 
Israel,  and  gave  the  victory  to  the  bondsmen, 
though  they  were  opposed  by  twenty  times  their 
number.  Our  cause  was  just,  and  we  believed  in 
the  justice  of  the  God  of  Israel  and  the  rights  of  man. 
Under  the  old  name  of  Tabor,  we  resolved  to  make 
full  preparation  to  strike  the  blow  for  liberty.  We 
felt  sure  that  the  Lord  God  was  on  the  side  of 
right  and  justice,  our  faith  and  trust  was  in  him, 
and  that  he  would  help  us  in  our  needy  time. 

Secrecy. 
**From  the  very  origin  of  the  organization  of  the 
Knights  of  Liberty,  the  necessity  of  secrecy  was 
impressed  on  each  member.  Let  not  your  right 
hand  know  what  your  left  hand  does ;  trust  no  one, 
and  test  every  man  before  he  is  admitted  to  mem- 
bership. A  part  of  the  oath  was:  *  We  can  die, 
but  we  can't  reveal  the  name  of  a  member,  or  make 
known  the  organizfttioa  and  its  objects.*     It  was 


17 


absolutely  a  secret  organized  body.  We  know  of 
the  failure  of  Nat.  Turner  and  others,  the  Abolition- 
ist in  the  North  and  East.  The  under-ground 
railroad  was  in  good  running  order,  and  the  Knights 
of  Liberty  sent  many  passengers  over  the  road  to 
freedom. 

**We  feel  that  we  have  said  enough  on  this  subject. 
If  the  War  of  the  Rebellion  had  not  occurred  just 
at  the  time  it  did,  the  Knights  of  Liberty  would 
have  made  public  history.  Let  the  past  sleep ; 
enough  has  been  said. 

Faithfully  Yours, 

Moses  Dickson. 


Mrs.  MABT  ELIZABETH  DICKSON. 


Born  August  18th,  1818.    Died  February  1st,  1891,   aged  72 
years,  5  months  and  13  days. 


18 


19 


Extract  from  an  eulogy  delivered  by  Rev.  Sir  R. 
L.  Beal,  at  the  memorial  services  of  Mother  Dick- 
son, held  at  Independence,  Mo.,  February  23d, 
1891: 

*'Mrs.  Mary  Elizabeth  Dickson  was  born  in  the 
town  of  Ste.  Genevieve,  County  of  Ste.  Genevieve, 
State  of  Missouri,  August  18th,  1818.  Her  par- 
ents were  members  of  the  Roman  Catholic  Church. 
She  was  the  youngest  of  ten  children.  When  she 
was  twelve  years  old  her  parents  sent  her  to  St. 
Louis  to  reside  with  her  sister  Louisa  and  attend 
school.  She  received  her  education  at  the  old 
Sacred  Heart  Convent.  Her  father,  John  Sebastian 
Butcher,  was  a  German,  born  near  the  boundary  line 
between  France  and  Germany.  He  was  a  stone-cutter 
and  builder,  and  one  among  the  first  settlers  of  Ste. 
Genevieve.  Her  mother's  name  was  Mary  Butcher. 
The  family  was  highly  respected  by  all  who  knew 
them,  and  were  owners  of  considerable  property  in 
the  town  of  Ste.  Genevieve.  Miss  Mary  E.  Butcher 
was  married  at  the  age  of  17  years  to  Mr.  Caleb 
Peters,  and  in  1838  they  moved  to  Galena,  Ills.  Mr. 
Peters  opened  a  provision  store,  and  continued 
in  that  business  until  his  death,  in  1846.  Mrs. 
Peters  was  converted  and  joined  the  A.  M.  E. 
Church,  in  1845.  She  remained  a  widow  until  she 
married  Moses  Dickfeon.  The  ceremony  was  per- 
formed by  the  then  famous  A.  M.  E.  Elder,  George 
W.  Johnson,  Oct.  5th,  1848,  in  the  City  of  Galena, 
Ills.  For  over  forty -two  years  Rev.  and  Mrs.  Dick- 
son have  traveled  together,  living  in  peace  and 
harmony,  bearing  each  other's  troubles  and  trials. 
Their  home-life  was  pleasant,  loving  and  trusting. 


20 

Mother  Dickson  is  the  honorable  title  that  she  was 
known  by.  She  has  been  a  consistent  and  earnest 
Christian,  and  a  member  of  the  A.  M.  E.  Church  for 
more  than  45  years.  She  was  a  faithful  and  zealous 
worker  in  the  church  for  many  years,  until  she  be- 
came too  old  for  active  work ;  she  was  full  of  fire, 
and  one  of  God's  greatest  women.  The  Interna- 
tional Order  of  Twelve,  of  which  the  Kev.  Moses 
Dickson  is  the  Founder  and  Father,  recognizing 
the  influence  and  part  that  Daughter  Dickson  had 
in  building  up  the  Order,  did,  at  the  Grand  Session, 
August,  1882,  by  a  unanimous  vote,  elect  and  install 
her  into  the  honorable  office  and  title  of  Mother  of 
all  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  for  life.  She 
is  held  in  great  esteem  and  honored  by  all  the 
members  of  the  great  Order.  Kev.  Moses  Dickson 
is  the  founder  of  the  Court  of  Heroines.  At  the 
organization  of  St.  Mary's  Court,  A.  D.  1865,  in 
St.  Louis,  Mo.,  Sister  Dickson  was  made  a  charter 
member.  St.  Mary's  Court  is  the  first  and  oldest 
regularly  organized  Court  in  the  United  States.  Sis- 
ter Dickson  has  presided  as  Most  Ancient  Matron 
and  Most  Ancient  Grand  Matron.  Mother  Dickson 
was  a  member  of  R.  H.  Gleaves  Tabernacle  of 
Brothers  and  Sisters  of  Love  and  Charity  in  this 
city.  When  the  Grand  Lodge  of  Good  Samaritans 
and  Daughters  of  Samaria,  for  Kansas  and  Mis- 
souri, was  organized  at  St.  Joseph,  Mo.,  Mother 
Dickson  was  made  an  honorary  member.  She  has 
been  in  ill  health  for  four  years.  Sunday,  January 
18th,  she  was  confined  to  her  bed;  she  gradually 
grew  weaker  from  day  to  day ;  day  and  night  her 
doctor,  family  and  friends  did  everything  to  retain 


21 

her  on  earth ;  but  the  Lord  said  to  his  faithful  fol- 
lower— come  homel  Sunday  night,  at  10:35  p.  m., 
her  spirit  obeyed  the  summons ;  she  bid  farewell 
to  the  church  on  earth ;  in  the  church  triumphant 
she  has  taken  her  place  among  the  redeemed  from 
earth.  She  leaves  a  husband,  a  daughter  and  a 
grand-child,  and  a  large  number  of  relations  in 
various  parts  of  the  United  States,  to  mourn  her 
departure.  Her  age  was  72  years,  5  months  and 
13  days  when  she  entered  into  rest. 

**We  are  brought  together  by  order  of  the  Chief 
Grand  Mentor,  to  pay  tribute  to  a  noble  woman, 
whose  influence  has  done  more  to  cement  the  bonds 
by  which  we  are  bound  together  in  common  broth- 
erhood, than  to  any  other  individual  effort  put 
forth  for  the  promotion  of  our  mystic  Order.  To- 
day hundreds — yea,  thousands — rise  up  to  call  her 
blessed.  All  over  this  land,  wherever  our  Order  has 
gained  a  foothold,  the  name  of  Mother  Dickson  is 
a  household  word,  for  she  was  the  hidden  force  be- 
hind the  executive  chair  which  urged  her  husband 
to  the  first  place  in  the  scale  of  human  endeavor, 
that  we  must  look  elsewhere  for  proof.  After 
careful  investigation,  we  reach  the  conclusion  that 
the  Creator  has  planted  in  the  breast  of  every  hu- 
man certain  innate  principles.  Some  of  which  are 
will  to  do  and  power  to  act  in  human  affairs,  which, 
if  cultivated,  make  us  useful  in  whatever  sphere  we 
are  placed.  With  hearts  willing,  minds  to  plan 
and  hands  to  execute,  our  possibilities  are  unlim- 
ited. Our  venerable  mother  was  possessed  of  these 
qualifications,  and  cultivated  them,  and  looked  for- 
ward to  the  time  when  opportunity  would  favor  her 


22 


to  put  into  practice  schemes  that  would  lead  to 
deeds  of  lofty  heroism. 

"But  wherein  lay  the  secret  of  her  success,  that 
wraps  itself,  as  if  by  magic  spell,  around  our 
hearts  ? 

**Let  us  enter  the  laboratory  of  human  charac- 
ter, and  analyze  the  elements  which  make  up  the 
good  and  the  great.  It  is  claimed  by  some  high  in 
authority  that  lineal  descent,  through  the  law  of 
heredity,  transmits  greatness  from  the  parental 
stock  to  the  children ;  but  history  has  so  often  re- 
futed this,  by  the  splendid  achievements  she  has 
recorded  of  some  lowly  born,  who,  in  the  humble 
walks  of  life  surmounted  every  difficulty,  took  the 
front  ranks  in  the  annals  of  Fame,  thereby  prov- 
ing their  right  to  which,  she  conceived,  would  pro- 
mote the  best  interests  of  the  race.  The  geomet- 
rical truism,  which  says:  *If  equals  be  added  to 
equals,  the  remainder  will  be  equals,'  is  a  fitting 
analogy  of  the  conjugal  ties  between  Father  and 
Mother  Dickson;  each  was  suited  and  equal  to  the 
other.  If  certain  qualities  appeared  more  promi- 
nent in  him,  such  as  the  marshaling  and  organiz- 
ing the  crude  material  of  which  the  Taborian 
Order  is  composed,  she  was  the  refiner  of  these 
forces ;  his  nature  was  the  more  rugged,  hers  was 
the  more  gentle.  He,  the  impetuous  commander, 
at  times  became  discouraged  at  the  gigantic  un- 
dertaking of  building  up  a  society  that  should  have 
a  national  reputation.  She  was  the  patient,  steady 
plodder,  who  encouraged  and  kept  up  his  spirit. 

**When  truth  shall  give  a  hearing  to  our  cause, 
and  the  work  done  by  our  great  men  shall  be  prop- 


23 


erly  accredited,  the  Africo-Americans  will  be  al- 
lowed to  build  upon  some  public  thoroughfare  a 
monument  to  Father  Dickson,  the  master-organizer 
of  the  race.  As  its  shaft  will  rise  heavenward,  our 
youth,  with  uncovered  head,  will  point  with  pride 
to  the  illustrious  name  engraved  thereon.  Love, 
fairest  daughter  of  the  virtues,  will  continue  to  write 
on  the  hearts  of  the  coming  children,  who  are  to 
perpetuate  this  Order,  the  name  of  Mary  E.  Dick- 
son. She  was  a  mother  to  us  in  the  fullest  sense 
of  the  word.  She  knew  no  creed,  no  denomination, 
simply  for  its  name. 

*'While  a  member  of  the  Methodistic  family,  she 
practiced  that  broad  religion  which  comes  from  a 
pure  heart.  Her  doors  were  always  opened  to  the 
distressed.  She  fed  the  hungry,  clothed  the  naked, 
comforted  the  lowly  in  spirit.  There  are  some 
here  to-night  that  received  counsel  from  her,  when 
you  needed  the  advice  of  a  friend.  Some  in  this 
city,  and  many  in  other  places  where  she  has  been, 
when  she  would  give  up  her  bed  to  see  you  comfor- 
table. 

<'Her  sainted  face  presents  itself  before  me  to- 
night; that  sweet  voice,  which  has  soothed  so  many 
sad  hearts,  whispers  from  across  the  mystic  river. 
But  why  do  we  mourn  for  her  as  one  lost.  She  is 
not  dead,  no ;  for  those  sainted  souls  can  never  die. 
Her  influence  lives  on.  She  will  never  be  seen  by 
us  with  the  natural  eye,  but  we  can  hold  communion 
with  her  in  spirit.  Her  seraph  wing  will  stretch 
over  us,  and  her  works  will  live,  although  she  is  re- 
moved from  us.  We  shall  all  see  her  again  when 
the  despised  Galileean  shall  step  from  the  throne 


24 


of  His  sovereign  mercy  to  that  of  His  sovereign 
justice ;  when  the  revivified,  at  the  shrill  blast  of  the 
trumpets,  shall  wake  to  life,  and  throw  off  their 
winding  sheets  at  the  world's  glad  re-union. 

**We  close  with  this  climax,  borrowed  from  Dr. 
Munsay's  last  sermon  on  the  resurrection  of  the 
human  body.  (Mother  Dickson  will  be  with  all  the 
sanctified.)  When  the  battlefields  of  the  world: 
Troy  and  Thermopylae,  Palavera  and  Marengo, 
Austerlitz  and  Waterloo,  Marathon  and  Missolouofh, 
the  battlefields  of  Europe,  Asia,  Africa  and  Amer- 
ica, will  produce  their  armies,  and  crowd  the  world 
with  their  revivified  legions,  Indian  maidens  will 
leap  from  the  dust  of  our  streets,  and  our  houses 
overturning,  will  lead  their  chiefs  to  Judgment. 
Abraham  will  shake  off  the  dust  of  Machpelah,  and 
arise  with  Sarah  by  his  side.  David  will  come  with 
harp  in  hand.  The  Reformer  of  Geneva  and  the 
Apostles  of  Christianity  will  come  side  by  side. 

'*Our  village  church-yards  and  family  burial- 
grounds  will  be  deserted.  All  will  come :  patriarchs, 
prophets,  Jews  and  Gentiles,  and  Heathens,  bond 
and  free,  rich  and  poor,  fathers  and  mothers,  chil- 
dren, sisters,  brothers,  husbands,  wives.  All  from 
Adam  down  will  come  forth.  And  all  the  good  from 
around  the  world,  all  together,  will  hail  this  re- 
demption's grand  consummation  with  one  proud 
anthem,  whose  choral  thunders  rolling  along  all  the 
paths  of  space  will  shake  the  universe  with  its 
bursting  chorus :  *0,  death,  where  is  thy  sting? 
O,  grave,  where  is  thy  victory?' " 


25 


Power  Defined. 
When  a  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or  Tent 
fails  to  meet  for  business  every  month  in  the  year, 
they  forfeit  their  charter,  and  the  C.  G.  M.  must 
declare  them  closed,  unless  a  dispensation  has  been 
obtained,  permitting  them  to  omit  one  session. 

Closed  Up. 
When  a  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or  Tent  is 
closed  up  or  becomes  defunct,  all  the  money  and 
property  belonging  to  the  Temple,  Tabernacle, 
Palatium  or  Tent  that  has  been  closed  up  or  has  be- 
come defunct  must  be  taken  by  the  C.  G.  M.,  and 
record  of  it  made  in  the  C.  G.  S.'s  office,  and  put 
in  care  of  the  C.  G.  T.  If  the  said  closed  or  de- 
funct organization  is  not  re-opened  within  one 
year,  all  property  that  belonged  to  said  closed  or 
defunct  organization  must  be  sold,  and  the  pro- 
ceeds turned  over  to  the  Grand  Treasurer. 

Withdrawals. 
When  a  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or  Tent 
withdraws  from  the  International  Order  of  Twelve, 
and  from  the  authority  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  the  charter,  rituals,  and  property  of 
all  kinds  must  be  surrendered  to  the  C.  G.  M.,  or 
his  Deputy.  Members  who  withdraw  are  not  per- 
mitted to  use  the  ritualistic  works,  or  the  name, 
"Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor,"  in  any  other 
organization. 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles. 
If   a  Grand  Temple  and   Tabernacle   withdraws 
from  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 


26 


nacle;  that  is,  from  the  general  government  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve,  without  the  consent 
of  all  other  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  it  is 
hereby  ordained  that  the  withdrawing  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  forfeit  every  right 
and  privilege  of  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor;  that  is,  the  right  to  use  the  name,  the  ritu- 
als and  laws  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve. 
Their  copy-rights  shall  be  annulled  by  the  act  of 
withdrawing.  The  International  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  shall  have  authority  to  enforce  this 
law.  4 


CONSTITUTION 


OF  THE 


International  Order  of  Twelie 


OP 


Knights  and  Daofhtm  of  Takr, 


AND 


OENERAL  LAWS 


OF  THE 


Mernatioial  Graaft  Temple  M  Takmacle. 


By  order  of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  every  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium 
and  Tent  must  have  and  own  a  Manual,  and  keep 
the  same  for  the  use  of  their  members. 

New  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents 
are  hereby  ordered  to  obtain  a  Manual  within  sixty 
days  after  their  organization.  Learn  and  know  the 
laws,  and  obey  them.  All  parts  of  the  Manual  are 
general  laws,  except  the  biographies,  history  and 
lexicon. 


CONSTITUTION 


ARTICLE  I. 


Section  1. — This  organization  shall  be  known  as 
the  ^'International  Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor.** 

Sec.  2. — This  organization  is  vested  with  full 
power  and  authority  to  organize  and  charter 
Temples  or  Plateaus  of  the  Knights  of  Tabor,  Tab- 
ernacles or  Saba  Meroe  of  the  Daughters  of  Tabor, 
Palatiums  of  the  Royal  House  of  Media,  and  Tents 
of  the  Maids  and  Pages  of  Honor,  in  any  part  of 
the  civilized  world. 

Sec.  3. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  is  hereby  authorized  to  charter  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  in  any  State,  Territory  or 


29 


country,  when  they  have  a  lawful  number  of  Tem- 
ples, Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents  within  their 
boundaries. 

Sec.  4. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  have  the  authority  to  enact  gen- 
eral laws  for  the  government  of  the  Order. 

Sec.  5. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  assemble  in  Grand  Session  trien- 
nially,  the  fourth  Tuesday  in  the  month  of  August, 
at  10  o'clock  A.  M  ,  and  assemble  from  day  to  day, 
until  its  business  is  finished. 

Sec.  6. — Special  sessions  can  be  called  by  the  In- 
ternational Chief  Grand  Mentor,  whenever  he  may 
find  it  is  necessary ;  or  it  shall  be  his  duty  to  call  a 
special  session,  when  officially  requested  by  a  two- 
third  vote  of  the  Chief  Grand  Mentors. 

ARTICLE   II. 

Section  1. — Membership   of    the   International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be  as  follows : 
Present  and  Past  International  Chief  Grand  Mentors. 
Present  and  Past  International  Chief  Grand  Precep- 
tresses. 
Present  an  d  Past  Inter n  ation al  Grand  Queen  Mothers. 
Present  and  Past  Chief  Grand  Mentors. 
Present  and  Past  Chief  Grand  Preceptresses. 
Present  and  Past  Grand  Queen  Mothers. 
Present  and  Past  Chief  Mentors. 
Present  and  Past  Chief  Preceptresses. 
Present  and  Past  Queen  Mothers. 
Present  and  Past  Presiding  Princes. 
Present  and  Past  Vice-Princesses. 
Present  and  Past  International  Grand  Deputies. 
Present  and  Past  International  Deputy  Grand  Men- 
tors. 


30 

Sec.  2. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
have  twelve  votes  in  the  International  Grand 
Session,  these  votes  to  be  cast  by  the  Chief  Grand 
Mentor  or  the  Chief  Grand  Preceptress.  If  both  of 
these  officers  are  present  in  the  Grand  Session,  they 
shall  divide  the  vote,  each  casting  six  votes.  A 
Past  Grand  Mentor,  three  votes ;  a  Past  Grand  Pre- 
ceptress, three  votes;  a  Grand  and  Past  Grand 
Queen  Mother,  three  votes ;  International  Grand 
Officers,  one  vote  each;  Chief  Mentors,  one  vote; 
Past  Chief  Mentors,  one  vote;  Chief  Preceptress, 
one  vote;  Past  Chief  Preceptress,  one  vote;  Pre- 
siding Prince,  one  vote ;  Past  Presiding  Prince  one 
vote ;  Vice-Princess,  one  vote ;  Past  Vice-Princess, 
one  vote;  Queen  Mother,  one  vote;  Past  Queen 
Mother,  one  vote;  International  Grand  Deputies, 
one  vote ;  Past  International  Grand  Deputies,  one 
vote;  Present  or  Past  International  D.  G.  M.,  one 
vote. 

Sec.  3. — A  member  of  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  cannot  be  represented  in 
the  Triennial  Grand  Session  by  proxy.  A  proxy 
vote  for  any  purpose  will  not  be  permitted  in  the 
International  Grand  Sessions. 

Sec.  4 — The  Chief  Grand  Mentors  and  the  Chief 
Grand  Preceptresses  are  the  Representatives  of 
their  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  in  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Sessions. 

ARTICLE  III. 

POWERS    AND    AUTHORITY. 

Section  1. — The  International  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  shall  have  the  authority  to  organize 


31 


and  charter  Temples  of  the  Knights  of  Tabor, 
Tabernacles  of  the  Daughters  of  Tabor,  Palatiums 
of  the  Royal  House  of  Media,  and  Tents  of  Maids 
and  Pages,  in  any  part  of  the  civilized  world. 

Sec.  2. — When  an  organization  is  formed  inside 
of  the  boundaries  of  any  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle by  an  International  Grand  Deputy,  or  I.  D. 
G.  M.,  the  Deputy  must  report  to  the  Chief  Grand 
Mentor  for  a  charter  or  warrant. 

Sec.  3. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  receive,  hear  and  decide  all  appeals 
that  come  from  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles, 
and  shall  adjust  all  grievances  and  complaints 
arising  between  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles. 

Sec.  4. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  have  the  authority  to  provide  :for 
its  own  support. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

OFFICIAL  TITLES. 

Section  1. — The  titles  of  the  officers  of  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be  as 
follows : 

1. — International  Chief  Grand  Mentor. — I.  C.  G.  M. 

2. — International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress. — I.  C.  G.  P. 

3. — International  Vice-Grand  Mentor. — I.  V.-G.  M. 

4. — International  Vice-Grand  Preceptress. — I.  V.-G.  P. 

5. — International  Chief  Grand  Scribe. — I.  C.  G.  S. 

6. — International  Chief  Grand  Reeorder. — I.  C.  G.  R. 

7. — International  Chief  Grand  Treasurer. — I.  C.  G.  T. 

8. — International  Grand  Queen  Mother. — I.  G.  Q.  M. 

9. — International  Chief  Grand  Orator. — I.  C.  G.  O. 
10. — International  Chief  Grand  Priestess. — I.  C.  G.  Ps. 
11. — International  Grand  Drill-Master. — I.  G.  D.-M. 
12. — International  Grand  Inner  Sentinel. — I.  G.  I.  St. 


The  above  officers  are  elected  and  installed  at  each 
Triennial  Grand  Session. 

Sec.  2. — The  following  officers  are  appointed  by 
the  International  .Chief  Grand  Mentor,  and  installed 
with  the  other  officers : 

1. — International  Grand  Color  Bearer. — I.  G.  C.  B. 
2. — International  Chief  Grand  Sentinel. — I.  C.  G.  St. 
3. — International  Chief  Grand  Guard. — I.  C.  G.  G. 
4. — International  Chief  Grand  Guard. — I.  C.  G.  G. 
5. — International  Chief  Grand  Guard. — I.  C.  G.  G. 
6.— International  Chief  Grand  Guard.— I.  C.  G.  G. 
7.— International  Chief  Grand  Guard.— I.  C.  G.  G. 


1. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
2. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
3. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
4. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
5. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
6. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 
7. — International  Chief  Grand  Judge. — I.  C.  G.  J. 

Three  Knights  are  appointed  by  the  International 
Chief  Grand  Mentor,  and  four  Daughters  are  ap- 
pointed by  the  International  Chief  Grand  Precep- 
tress. 

The  International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress  ap- 
points the  following  Daughters : 
1.— International  Chief  Grand  Tribune.— I.  C.  G.  Te. 
2.— International  Chief  Grand  Tribune.— I.  C.  G.  Te. 
3. — International  Chief  Grand  Tribune. — I.  C.  G.  Te. 
4. — International  Chief  Grand  Tribune. — I.  C.  G.  Te. 
5. — International  Chief  Grand  Tribune. — I.  C.  G.  Te. 
6. — International  Chief  Grand  Tribune. — I.  C.  G.  Te. 
7. — International  Chief  Grand  Tribune. — I.  C.  G,  Te. 


33 


ARTICLE  V. 

Section  1. — The  officers  of  the  International 
Grand  Temple  an<l  Tabernacle  are  elected  during 
the  Triennial  Session,  and  installed  before  the  Ses- 
sion closes. 

Sec.  2. — The  ballots  shall  be  written  or  printed. 
A  majority  of  all  the  votes  shall  be  necessary  to 
elect.  Nominations  shall  be  made  in  open  Session. 
In  case  there  is  no  election  on  the  ballot,  the  candi- 
date receiving  the  lowest  number  of  votes  is  to  be 
dropped,  until  some  one  else  is  elected. 

Sec.  3.— The  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  appoint  five  Tel- 
lers, whose  duty  it  is  to  count  the  ballots  and  an- 
nounce the  result. 

Sec.  4. — A  Knight  cannot  be  elected  and  in- 
stalled as  International  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  who 
has  not  served  one  year  as  Chief  Grand  Mentor  of 
a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  5. — A  Daughter  cannot  be  elected  and  in- 
stalled as  International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress, 
until  she  has  served  one  year  as  Chief  Grand  Pre- 
ceptress of  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

ARTICLE  VI. 

PERPETUATION. 

Section  1. — In  the  event  of  the  death,  resigna- 
tion or  the  disqualification  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  and 
I.  V.-G.  M.,  the  I.  C.  G.  S.  is  authorized  to  issue 
a  summons  to  the  Chief  Grand  Mentors,  requesting 
them  to  meet  within  ten  days  from  date  of  sum- 
mons, and  elect  and  install  an  I.  C.  G.  M.,  to  serve 
the  balance  of  the  term. 

(2— Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


34 


ARTICLE  yn. 

DUTIES    OF   INTERNATIONAL   GRAND   OFFICERS. 

Section  1. — The  International  Chief  Grand 
Mentor  shall  preside  at  all  Sessions  of  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  call 
Special  Sessions  when  he  deems  it  necessary,  or 
when  requested  by  two-thirds  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Mentors.  He  shall  decide  all  points  and  questions 
of  order  in  the  Triennial  Grand  Session — appoint 
officers  pro-tem,  in  the  absence  or  disqualification  of 
the  officer  elected  or  appointed.  He  can  open  and 
close  the  Triennial  Session  without  a  motion.  He 
shall  make  to  the  Triennial  Session  a  report  of  the 
business  that  has  been  transacted  during  the  inter- 
val since  the  last  Session.  He  shall  appoint  all 
committees  not  otherwise  ordered  by  the  Triennial 
Session.  He  can  order  the  I.  C.  G.  S.  and  I.  C. 
G.  T.  to  report  to  him  the  condition  of  the  treas- 
ury at  any  time.  His  signature  to  a  warrant  on 
the  Treasurer  makes  it  legal.  No  money  can  be 
paid  out  of  the  treasury  without  his  signature. 
He  shall  organize  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
under  the  International  Charter,  in  any  State,  Ter- 
ritory or  country,  when  he  is  satisfied  that  they 
have  the  constitutional  number  of  organizations 
within  their  boundary.  He  must  supply  the  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  that  he  organizes  with 
all  the  requisites  to  commence  business  as  a  Grand 
body.  He  can  organize  Temples,  Tabernacles, 
Palatiums  and  Tents  in  person  or  by  Deputy,  in 
any  part  of  the  civilized  world,  and  assign  such  or- 
ganizations to  the  nearest  Grand  Temple  and  Tab- 
ernacle, or  organize  them  into  International  Dis- 


35 


tricts.  He  must  issue  the  quarterly  Pass  in  the 
months  of  March,  June,  September  and  December, 
and  furnish  a  sufficient  supply  to  the  C.  G.  Ms., 
for  all  Temples  and  Tabernacles.  He  must  decide 
on  all  matters  that  are  requested  of  him  by  the  C. 
G.  Ms.  or  C.  G.  Ps. 

INTERNATIONAL   CHIEF    GRAND    PRECEPTRESS. 

Sec.  2.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  I.  C.  G.  P. 
to  assist  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  during  the  business  of 
the  Triennial  Session,  when  he  is  absent  from  the 
Chair  at  any  time  during  the  Session.  She  must 
give  such  instructions  and  assistance  to  Chief  Grand 
Preceptresses  as  they  may  request  of  her.  She  is 
authorized  to  organize  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents  in  any  part  of  the  civilized  world,  and,  if  in 
a  State  where  there  is  a  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle, report  her  organizations  to  the  C.  G.  M.  for 
a  charter.  She  must  make  a  full  report  to  the 
Triennial  Session  of  her  work  and  official  business 
during  the  interval  since  the  last  Triennial  Session. 

INTERNATIONAL  VICE-GRAND  MENTOR. 

Sec.  3.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  I.  V.-G.  M. 
to  assist  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  in  keeping  order  during 
the  Triennial  Session.  In  the  event  of  the  death 
or  mental  inability  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.,  the  I.  V.- 
G.  M.  shall  attend  to  and  perform  all  the  duties  of 
the  I.  C.  G.  M.  until  another  is  elected  at  the 
Triennial  Session  and  installed. 

INTERNATIONAL  VICE-GRAND  PRECEPTRESS. 

Sec.  4.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  I.  V.-G.  P.  to 
assist  the  I.  V.-G.  M.  in  his  duties  during  the 
Triennial  Session.     Should  the  I.  C.  G.  P.  be  re- 


se 


moved  by  death,  or  resign  her  office,  the  I.  V.-G. 
P.  must  fill  her  station  and  attend  to  its  duties 
until  the  regular  election. 

INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND  SCRIBE. 

Sec.  5. — The  I  C.  G.  S.  shall  have  charge  of 
all  the  records,  and  keep  a  journal  of  the  proceed- 
ings of  the  Triennial  Session.  He  must  keep  and 
preserve  all  official  papers.  He  shall  keep  a  register 
of  all  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  and  a  copy 
of  their  seals.  He  shall  attest  all  official  papers 
that  are  issued  from  his  office  with  the  seal  of  his 
office.  He  shall  collect  the  International  Grand 
dues  and  other  moneys  due  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  pay  them  to  the  I.  C. 
G.  T.  He  shall  draw  all  warrants  for  money  on 
the  Grand  Treasurer,  and  have  them  signed  by  the 
I.  C.  G.  M.,  and  sign  his  name  and  impress  his 
seal  thereon.  He  must  make  a  full  report  of  all 
business  that  has  been  transacted  in  his  office  to 
each  Triennial  Session.  At  the  expiration  of  his 
term  of  office  he  must  dt'liver  to  his  successor  all 
books,  papers  and  property  that  are  in  his  possession 
belonging  to  the  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle. 

INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND  RKCORDER. 

Sec.  6.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  I.  C.  G.  R. 
to  assist  the  I.  C.  G.  S.  in  the  business  of  the 
Triennial  Session,  and  aid  him  in  getting  the  pro- 
ceedings ready  for  the  printer,  and  perform  such 
other  duties  pertaining  to  her  office  as  may  be 
assigned  to  her. 


37 


INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND  TREASURER. 

Sec.  7.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  I.  C.  G.  T. 
to  receive  all  moneys  and  valuables  belonging  to 
the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle, 
and  keep  a  correct  account  of  what  he  receives.  He 
must  pay  all  warrants  drawn  on  the  Treasurer  that 
are  signed  by  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  and  I.  C.  G.  S. 
He  shall  make  a  full  report  to  the  Triennial  Session 
of  the  amount  of  money  received  and  disbursed. 
His  books  shall  always  be  ready  for  the  inspection 
of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.,  or  any  committee  appointed  by 
him.  At  the  expiration  of  his  term  of  office  he 
must  deliver  to  his  successor  all  books,  papers, 
moneys  and  valuables,  belonging  to  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

INTERNATIONAL    GRAND    QUEEN    MOTHER. 

Sec.  8.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  I.  G.  Q.  M.  to 
communicate  with  the  Grand  Queen  Mothers  of  the 
Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  and  receive  from 
them  the  annual  reports  of  the  Tents  and  their  con- 
dition, the  number  of  Tents,  and  the  number  of 
children  in  the  Tents.  She  must  make  a  triennial 
report  of  all  Tents  to  the  Triennial  Session. 

international  chief  grand  orator. 

Sec.  9.— The  I.  C.  G.  O.  shall  conduct  the  de- 
votional exercises  of  the  Triennial  Session,  and 
perform  the  functions  of  Chaplain  on  public  oc- 
casions, and  preach  the  triennial  sermon,  and  con- 
duct the  funeral  services  of  all  International  Grand 
Officers. 


38 


INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND  PRIESTESS. 

Sec.  10.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  I.  C.  G.  Ps.  to 
assist  the  I.  C.  G.  O.  in  the  exercises  of  the  Trien- 
nial Session ;  and  when  he  is  absent  from  the  Session, 
she  shall  attend  to  the  opening  and  closing  of  the 
Session  in  the  usual  form. 

INTERNATIONAL  GRAND  DRILL-MASTER. 

Sec.  11.— The  I.  G.  D.-M.  shall  assist  the  I.  G. 
I.  St.  in  her  duties  at  the  inner  door  of  the  hall. 
He  shall  perform  the  functions  of  Chief  Marshal 
at  all  public  processions  of  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  has  authority  to  ap- 
point Aides.  He  must  give  instructions  to  the  Grand 
Drill-Masters,  when  they  so  request.  He  must 
arrange  the  hall  for  the  Triennial  Session,  assisted 
by  the  I.  C.  G.  Gs. 

INTERNATIONAL  GRAND  INNER  SENTINEL. 

Sec.  12.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  I.  G.  I.  St.  to 
guard  the  inside  door  during  the  Triennial  Session, 
and  to  admit  none,  unless  they  give  the  proper  Pass 
and  are- properly  clothed.  She  must  report  all  ap- 
plicants for  admission  to  the  I.  V.-G.  M.,and  admit 
or  reject  them  on  his  order. 

INTERNATIONAL  GRAND  COLOR  BEARER. 

Sec.  13.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  I.  G.  C.  B.  to 
take  care  of  the  International  Banner,  and  carry  it 
in  public  processions. 

INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND  SENTINEL. 

Sec.  14.— The  I.  C.  G.  St.  shall  have  charge  of 
the  outer  door  of  the  hall  during  the  International 
Grand  Session.     He  must  notify  the  I.  G.  I.  St. 


39 

when  a  Knight  or  Daughter  desires  admittance.  It 
is  his  business  to  see  that  they  are  properly  clothed 
before  he  permits  them  to  enter. 

INTERNATIONAL    CHIEF  GRAND  JUDGES. 

Sec.  15. — The  Board  of  Interqational  Chief 
Grand  Judges  shall  consist  of  seven  members — three 
Knights  and  four  Daughters.  This  Board  shall  in- 
vestigate all  appeals,  grievances  and  complaints 
that  are  referred  to  it  by  the  International  Session ; 
they  must  report  their  decisions  to  the  Interna- 
tional Session.  This  Board  shall  have  authority  to 
impeach  an  International  Chief  Grand  Mentor  in 
accordance  with  Article  XVII  of  the  International 
Constitution. 

INTERNATIONAL   CHIEF    GRAND   TRIBUNES. 

Sec.  16.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  I.  C.  G.Tes. 
to  assist  the  I.  C.  G.  Gs.  in  their  several  duties. 
This  Board  shall  consist  of  seven  Daughters. 

INTERNATIONAL  CHIEF  GRAND   GUARDS. 

Sec.  17. — This  Board  shall  consist  of  five 
Knights,  whose  duty  it  is  to  attend  on  the  members 
under  the  orders  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.,  and  they  shall 
assist  the  I.  G.  D.-M.  in  preparing  the  hall  for  the 
International  Sessions. 

ARTICLE  VIII. 

INTERNATIONAL   DEPUTIES. 

Section  1. —  Commissions  are  issued  by  the  I.  C. 
G.  M.  to  none  but  those  distinguished  members  of 
the  Order  who  have  by  their  zeal  and  earnest  work 
aided   in    building  up   and  enlarging   the  Order. 


40 

Their  commissions  are  evidence  of  their  high  stand- 
ing in  the  International  Order  of  Twelve.  This 
constitutional  provision  is  not  to  be  departed  from, 
except  when  a  Deputy  is  needed  for  organizing. 

Sec.  2. — An  International  Deputy  Grand  Mentor 
shall  have  authority  to  organize  and  setup  Temples, 
Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents  in  any  part  of 
the  United  States  of  North  America,  and  in  any 
part  of  the  civilized  world. 

Sec.  3. — An  International  Grand  Deputy  shall 
have  the  authority  to  organize  and  set  up  Taber- 
nacles, Palatiums  and  Tents  in  any  part  of  the 
United  States  of  North  America,  and  in  any  part 
of  the  civilized  world. 

Sec.  4. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  can  appoint  Special 
International  Deputy  Grand  Mentors,  and  assign 
them  to  special  duty,  with  specific  instructions. 

Sec.  5. — When  an  International  Deputy  organ- 
izes within  the  boundaries  of  a  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  the  organization  must  be  reported  to 
the  Chief  Grand  Mentor  of  the  State  in  which  the 
organization  has  made  application  for  a  charter  or 
warrant. 

Sec.  6. — When  an  International  Deputy  organ- 
izes at  any  place  that  is  not  within  the  boundaries 
of  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  the  organiza- 
tion must  be  reported  to  the  International  Chief 
Grand  Mentor  for  charter  or  warrant. 

Sec.  7. — An  International  commission  creates 
and  makes  the  bearer  a  life  member  in  the  Interna- 
tional Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  with  all  of 
its  rights  and  privileges.  If  the  bearer  is  a  Knight, 
he  must  be  and  remain  a  member  in  good  standing 


41 

in  a  Temple ;  if  a  Daughter,  she  must  be  and  re- 
main a  member  in  good  standing  in  a  Tabernacle. 

ARTICLE  IX. 

REVENUE. 

Section  1. — The  revenue  of  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be  derived 
from  the  following  sources: 

1. — All  members  of  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
shall  each  pay  two  cents  annually. 

2. — Tents  of  Maids  and  Pages  of  Honor  shall 
pay  one  dollar  each  annually,  and  Palatiums  two 
dollars  each  annually.  The  fee  shall  be  fixed  by  the 
Triennial  Session. 

3.— The  C.  G.  S.  of  Grand  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles are  required  to  collect  these  International 
Grand  dues,  and  forward  them  annually  to  the  I. 
C.  G.  S.,  and  take  his  receipt  therefor. 

The  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
must  furnish  to  each  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle, 
on  their  organization,  the  following  requisites  :  Four 
dozen  Saba  Meroe  Rituals,  four  dozen  Daughters* 
Third  Degree  Rituals,  two  dozen  Knights'  Rituals, 
six  dozen  Daughters'  Constitutions,  four  dozen 
Knights'  Constitutions,  four  dozen  Daughters'  Trav- 
eling Certificates,  three  dozen  Knights  Traveling 
Certificates,  four  dozen  Daughters'  Transfers,  three 
dozen  Knights'  Transfers,  sixteen  dozen  Blank 
Daughters'  Petitions,  twelve  dozen  Knights'  Peti- 
tions, twenty  dozen  Daughters'  Monthly  Cards, 
twelve  dozen  Knights'  Monthly  Cards,  twenty  dozen 
Tent  Constitutions,  twenty  dozen  Children's  Monthly 
Cards,  twenty  Blank  Tabernacle  Warrants,  sixteen 


42 


Blank  Temple  Charters,  twelve  Blank  Tent  Char- 
ters, one  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Seal  Press, 
one  C.  G.  S.  Seal  Press,  ten  Palatium  Charters,  four 
dozen  Palatium  Rituals,  and  four  dozen  Past  Ar- 
canum Rituals. 

The  amount  required  for  organizing  a  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be  as  follows:  For 
the  Charter,  fifty  dollars;  to  the  I.  C.  G.  M., 
for  organizing  and  expenses,  fifty  dollars;  for 
Requisites,  one  hundred  and  fifty  dollars ;  total,  two 
hundred  and  fifty  dollars.  To  cover  these  expenses 
the  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  assess  each  Temple,  Taber- 
nacle, Palatium  and  Tent  pro-rala. 

ARTICLE  X. 

PAY-ROLL    OF   INTERNATIONAL   OFFICERS. 

Section  1. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  receive  five 
cents  per  mile  for  traveling  expenses  to  and  from  the 
Triennial  Session,  and  three  dollars  per  day  during 
the  Triennial  Session. 

The  I.  C.  G.  P.  shall  receive  the  same  amount. 

The  I.  C.  G.  S.  shall  receive  the  same  amount. 

The  I.  C.  G.  R.  shall  receive  the  same  amount. 

The  I.  C.  G.  T.  shall  receive  the  same  amount. 

That  is,  these  four  officers  shall  receive  the  same 
amount  that  is  paid  to  the  I.  C.  G.  M. 

Sec.  2. —  The  salary  of  the  above  officers  must 
be  fixed,  from  time  to  time,  by  the  Triennial  Ses- 
sion. 

Sec.  3.— The  I.  C.  G.  O.,  I.  C.  G.  Ps.,  I.  G.  Q. 
M.,I.  G.  D.-M.,  I.  C.  G.  St.  and  I.  G.  I.  St.  shall 
receive  three  dollars  per  day  during  the  Triennial 
Session. 


43 


ARTICLE  XI. 

INTERNATIONAL  BOARD  OF  GRAND  CURATORS. 

Section  1. — This  Board  shall  consist  of  five  mem- 
bers, namely:  Thel.  C.G.  M.,I.C.  G.  P.,I.  C.  G. 
S.,  I.  C.  G.  R.  and  I.  C.  G.  T. 

Sec.  2. — This  Board  shall  be  the  Trustees  of  the 
International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  All 
deeds,  donations,  gifts  or  devises,  for  the  benefit  of 
the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle, 
shall  be  made  to  them. 

Sec.  3. — They  shall  invest  in  stocks,  loans  or  se^ 
curities,  the  funds,  as  the  Grand  Session  may  direct. 
They  shall  call  in,  sell  and  realize  on  loans,  stocky 
and  investments,  collect  interest,  rents  and  divi- 
dends accruing  or  arising  from  any  investments 
belonging  to  the  International  Grand  Temple  andf 
Tabernacle,  and  pay  all  that  is  collected  to  the  I. 
C.  G.  S.,  and  he  shall  turn  it  over  to  the  I.  C.  G.  T 

Sec.  4. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  furnish  the  Board  with  such  books 
and  requisites  as  are  needed  to  conduct  their  bus- 
iness. 

Sec.  5. — The  Board  shall  make  a  Triennial  re- 
port to  the  Triennial  Session  of  all  the  business ; 
when  their  successors  in  office  are  installed  and  quali- 
fied, they  shall  deliver  to  them  all  books,  securities, 
deposits,  stocks,  deeds,  papers  and  moneys  belong- 
ing to  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle. 

ARTICLE  XII. 

BONDS. 

Section  1.— The  I.  C.  G.  S.  and  the  I.  C.  G.  T. 
must  give  bond,  with  such  security  as  shall  be  ap- 


u 


proved  by  the  I.  C.  G.  O.,  I.  C.  G.  Ps.  and  I.  V.- 

G.  M.,  for  the  faithful  application  of  all  moneys 
and  valuables  belonging  to  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  in  accordance  with  the 
Constitution  and  the  orders  of  the  Triennial  Session. 

AETICLE  XIII. 

Section  1. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  must  appoint  the 
following  committees  immediately  after  the  Trien- 
ninal  Session  is  opened,  and  shall  consist  of  seven 
members  each — three  Knights  and  four  Daughters : 

1. — On  Credentials. 

2. — On  Returns  of  Grand  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles. 

3.— On  I.  C.  G.  M.'s  Message  and  I.  C.  G.  P.'s 
Report. 

4. — On  Finance  and  Accounts. 

5. — On  Ways  and  Means. 

6. — On  Obituaries. 

7. — On  Collecting  the  Membership  Fee. 

8. — On  the  Condition  of  the  Colored  People  of 
the  World. 

9.— On  I.  C.  G.  S.'sandl.  C.  G.  T.'s  Reports. 

10. — On  Board  of  Grand  Curators'  Report. 

11. — On  the  Condition  of  the  Order. 

12. — On  Edowment  Benefits. 

ARTICLE  XIV. 

DUTIES  OF  COMMITTEES. 

Section  1. — The  Committee  on  Credentials  must 
make  a  full  report  of  all  the  Members  of  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  divided  as 
follows ; 


45 

1. — The  Kepresentatives  of  Grand  Temples  and 
Tabernacles. 

2. — The  Chief  Mentors  and  Past  Chief  Mentors. 

3. — The  Chief  Preceptresses  and  Past  Chief  Pre- 
ceptresses. 

4. — The  Presiding  Princes  and  Vice-Princesses. 

5. — The  Queen  Mothers  and  Past  Queen  Mothers. 

6. — The  International  Deputies. 

This  report  must  include  those  that  are  present 
and  absent.  When  members  are  absent,  absent 
shall  be  marked  opposite  their  names. 

Sec.  2. — The  Committee  on  Returns  of  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  are  to  examine  the  re- 
turns of  the  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  and 
report  the  number  of  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Pala- 
tiums  and  Tents,  and  the  number  of  members  be- 
longing to  each  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and 
the  dues  that  are  due  to  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  3.— The  Committee  on  I.  C.  G.  M.'s  Mes- 
sage and  the  I.  C.  G.  P.'s  Report  must  examine 
the  message,  and  make  such  disposition  of  it  as  in 
their  judgment  it  requires,  and  they  must  also 
recommend  what  shall  be  done  with  the  I.  C.  G. 
P.'s  report. 

Sec.  4. — The  Committee  on  Finance  and  Ac- 
counts must  report  the  amount  of  money  in  the 
treasury  after  all  dues  have  been  collected  in  Trien- 
nial Session.  Members  who  have  accounts  against 
the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
must  put  their  accounts  into  the  hands  of  this  com- 
mittee. This  committee  shall  read  their  report 
just  before  the  election  of  the  Grand  Officers.  The 


46 

report  must  itemize  and  give  the  amount  of  money 
received  from  each  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
and  other  sources,  and  the  total  amount  that  is  in 
the  International  Grand  treasury,  and  the  amount  of 
the  accounts  against  the  treasury,  and  the  balance 
remaining  in  the  treasury  after  all  bills  are  paid. 

Sec.  5. — The  Committee  on  Ways  and  Means 
shall  examine  all  business  that  is  referred  to  them 
by  the  Triennial  Session,  and  recommend  what  it 
considers  the  best  action  the  Session  shall  take. 

Sec.  6. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Committee 
on  Obituaries  to  report  the  names  of  the  members 
of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
who  have  died  since  the  last  Triennial  Session,  and 
prepare  a  programme  for  the  Session,  and  recom- 
mend that  an  hour  be  set  apart  during  the  Session 
for  the  obituary  exercises. 

Sec.  7. — The  Committee  on  Collecting  the  Mem- 
bership Fee  must  collect  the  fee  that  is  ordered  by 
the  Triennial  Session,  and  report  the  names  of  the 
members  that  have  paid. 

Sec.  8. — The  Committee  on  the  Condition  of  the 
Colored  People  of  the  World  shall  be  a  standing 
committee,  and  shall  hold  their  office  for  three 
years.  It  is  the  duty  of  this  committee  to  prepare 
a  detailed  report  of  what  the  Colored  People  are 
doing.  Their  report  should  be  complete,  and  cover 
all  the  avenues  of  life. 

Sec.  9. — It  is  the  duty  of  the  Committee  on  the 
I.  C.  G.  S/s  and  I.  C.  G.  T.'s  Reports  to  examine 
and  compare  these  reports  carefully,  and  submit 
their  decision  to  the  Session. 


47 


Sec.  10. — The  duty  of  the  Committee  on  the 
Board  of  Grand  Curators  must  examine  the  bus- 
iness of  this  Board,  and  report  upon  its  correctness. 

Sec.  11. — The  Committee  on  the  Condition  of 
the  Order  must  prepare  a  carefully  written  report 
of  the  condition  of  the  Order,  and  make  any 
recommendation  that  will  in  their  judgment  be  of 
benefit  in  administering  the  affairs  of  the  Order. 

Sec.  12. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Committee 
on  Endowment  Benefits  to  carefully  examine  the 
workings  of  the  Taborian  endowment,  and  widows' 
and  orphans'  benefits  in  the  Grand  Temples  and 
Tabernacles,  and  report  to  the  Session,  and  recom- 
mend such  measures  as  they  may  think  necessary. 

The  reports  of  the  I.  G.  Q.  M.,  I.  D.  G.  M.s 
and  I.  G.  D.s  must  be  referred  to  a  Special  Com- 
mittee. 

ARTICLE  XV. 

BUSINESS    RULES. 

1. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle shall  assemble  in  Triennial  Session  on  the 
constitutional  day  and  hour,  and  open  with  the  usual 
ceremonies  in  the  Saba  Meroe  Des^ree. 

2. — The  International  Grand  Chief  appoints  the 
committees. 

3. — The  Committee  on  Credentials  makes  a 
partial  report. 

4. — The  International  Grand  Chief  reads  his 
message,  and  the  International  Grand  Preceptress 
makes  her  report ;  the  I.  G.  Q.  M.,  I.  D.  G.  M.s 
and  I.  G.  D.s  make  their  reports. 

5. — Reports  of  ReguUir  Committees. 

6. — Reports  of  Special  Commiltees. 


48 


7. — Eeports  of  the  Board  of  Grand  Curators. 

8.— Reports  of  the  I.  C.  G.  S.  and  I.  C.  G.  T. 
are  not  made  until  all  returns  are  made  from  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  and  other  sources  from 
which  money  is  received. 

9. — Motions,  resolutions  and  new  business. 

10. — A  special  meeting  of  the  C.  G.  M.s,  to  ex- 
emplify the  Knights'  ritualistic  work. 

11. — ^A  special  meeting  of  C.  G.  P.s,  to  exemplify 
the  Daughters'  and  Priestesses'  ritualistic  work. 

12. — A  special  meeting  of  the  G.  Q.  M.s,  on  the 
best  manner  of  conducting  the  Tent  work  and  bus- 
iness. 

13. — A  special  meeting  of  the  P.  P.s  and  V.-P.s 
on  the  Palatiuni  ritualistic  work. 

14. — Nomination  and  election  of  International 
Grand  Officers. 

15. — Installation  of  Grand  Officers. 

16. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  declares  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  at  rest  until  the 
next  Triennial  Grand  Session,  unless  a  Special  Ses- 
sion is  called. 


FORM  OF  TRIENNIAL  SESSION. 


\ 

\ 

^6 

ALTAR. 

-■ 

I.  G.  Te. 

I.  G.  Gs. 

^ 

PP 

Q 

• 

O 

5;^ 

CiC 


I.  C.  G.  St. 


Committee  Room. 


49 


50 
AETICLE  XYI. 

POWERS   AND  PREROGATIVES   OF  THE   I.  C.  G.  M. 

Section  1. — He  can  organize  and  set  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  to  work,  and  constitute 
them  by  International  Charter. 

Sec.  2.  His  decisions  are  final  on  all  questions 
that  are  submitted  to  him  from  the  C.  G.  M.s  of 
Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles. 

Sec.  3. — His  decisions  on  International  and  Gen- 
eral Laws  and  Kules  remain  in  force  until  reversed 
bj  his  successor. 

Sec.  4. — He  can  visit  any  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  when  in  Session,  and  have  his  traveling 
expenses  paid  by  the  Grand  Session  that  he  visits. 

Sec.  5. — He  can  arrest  the  charter  and  suspend  a 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  when  it  is  clear  that 
they  are  in  rebellion  against  the  International  and 
General  Laws  of  the  Order  of  Twelve. 

Sec.  6. — He  can  preside  at  all  meetings  of  the 
International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  7.  —  He  can  assemble  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  in  Special  Session  at 
any  time,  if  he  decides  that  it  is  necessary  for  the 
interests  of  the  Order. 

Sec.  8. — He  can  call  all  the  C.  G.  M.s  and  C. 
G.  P.s  into  a  council  whenever  grave  and  import- 
ant business  concerning  the  Order  demands  an  united 
consultation  and  action. 

Sec.  9. — When  complaint  or  charges  are  made 
against  a  C.  G.  M.  for  violation  of  the  criminal 
laws  of  the  State,  county  or  city,  or  for  immorality 
or  imbecility,  by  a  majority  of  the  elected  Grand 


51 


Officers,  the  I.  C.  G.  M.,  when  he  receives  the 
charges  and  specifications,  properly  signed,  shall 
suspend  the  said  C.  G.  M.  from  his  official  duties, 
and  notify  the  Y.-G.  M.  to  take  charge  of  the  C. 
G.  M.'s  official  business.  The  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall 
order  a  committee  of  three  C.  G.  M.s  to  meet  and 
investigate  the  case.  If  this  committee  reports  him 
guilty,  as  charged,  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  suspend 
him  from  the  Order,  and  notify  him  to  meet  the 
Triennial  Session  for  trial.  If  the  committee  de- 
cides that  he  is  innocent  in  their  report,  the  I.  C. 
G.  M.  shall  restore  him  to  his  office  and  official 
duties.  The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  that 
has  a  case  of  this  kind,  must  pay  the  traveling  ex- 
penses and  per  diem  of  the  committee.  The  I.  C. 
G.  M.  must  fix  the  place,  and  notify  the  accused 
and  the  committee  where  to  assemble.  The  com- 
mittee shall  have  the  authority  to  summons  wit- 
nesses for  and  against  the  accused. 

Sec.  10.— The  I.  C.  G.  M.  can  confer  the  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle  degrees  on  all  persons  of  dis- 
tinction, and  assign  them  to  any  Temple  or  Taber- 
nacle for  membership.  Such  persons  are  to  be  en- 
rolled without  ballot,  but  they  must  obey  the  laws 
and  rules  governing  the  Temple  or  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  11. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  can  give  a  dispensa- 
tion to  open  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and 
allow  them  to  proceed  with  their  business.  When 
their  charter  is  lost  or  misplaced,  the  dispensation 
will  hold  good  until  it  is  found  or  another  one  is 
granted. 

Sec.  12. — He  can  appoint  as  many  International 
Deputies  as  he  desires. 


52 

Sec.  13. — He  cannot  be  disciplined  for  his  official 
acts  after  he  has  passed  out  of  office. 

AETICLE  XVII. 

IMPEACHMENT. 

Section  1. — ^An  International  Chief  Grand  Mentor 
can  be  impeached  for  the  following  offenses :  First, 
for  violating  the  criminal  laws,  if  he  is  arrested 
and  found  guilty,  and  sentenced  to  prison ;  second, 
for  immoral  conduct ;  and  third,  for  imbecility. 

Sec.  2. — ^When  an  I.  C.  G.  M.  is  found  guilty  in 
a  criminal  court  and  sentenced  to  prison,  the 
Chairman  of  the  Board  of  International  Grand 
Judges  must  assemble  the  Board,  and  investigate 
the  case,  and  if  they  find  that  the  evidence  is 
clear  and  that  he  was  justly  sentenced,  they  are 
authorized  to  declare  his  seat  vacant,  and  notify 
the  I.  V.-G.  M.  to  take  charge  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M.'s 
office  and  attend  to  all  its  duties. 

Sec.  3.— If  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  is  accused  of  im- 
moral conduct,  and  it  is  notoriously  the  common 
talk  of  his  neighbors,  a  charge  can  be  made  by 
three  or  more  members  of  the  Order,  who  must  be 
eye-witnesses  of  his  immorality.  The  charge  and 
specifications,  with  the  names  of  the  witnesses 
signed  to  it,  must  be  given  to  the  International 
Board  of  Judges.  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the 
Chairman  to  call  his  Board  together,  and  examine 
the  witnesses  in  the  presence  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M., 
or,  if  he  refuses  to  attend,  the  Judges  shall  proceed 
with  the  examination.  If  they  decide  that  it  is  a 
case  requiring  a  trial,  the  Judges  must  notify  the 
L  C»  G»  S.  to  summons  five  C.  G»  M.s  or  Past  C 


53  ^ 

G.  M.s  to  try  the  case.  The  I.  C.  G.  S.  shall  fix 
the  day  and  date  and  the  place  of  meeting,  also  to 
notify  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  to  be  present.  If  the  I.  C. 
G.  M.  is  found  guilty,  he  must  be  suspended  and 
ordered  to  meet  the  Triennial  Session  for  trial. 
The  I.  V.-G.  M.  takes  charge  of  the  office. 

Sec.  4. — If  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  becomes  weak- 
minded  or  insane,  so  that  he  cannot  attend  to  the 
duties  of  his  office,  the  I.  C.  G.  S.  must  notify  the 
I.  G.  C.  J.s,  and  they  must  meet  and  investigate. 
If  they  find  that  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  is  incapable  of  at- 
tending to  the  duties  of  the  office,  they  shall  declare 
the  office  vacant  and  put  the  I.  V.-G.  M.  in  charge. 

AETICLE  XVIII. 

AMENDMENTS. 

Section  1. — The  International  Constitution  can 
be  amended  by  submitting  the  amendment  or 
amendments  to  the  International  Grand  Session. 
If  said  amendment  or  amendments  are  recommen- 
ded by  a  three-fourths  vote,  they  must  be  printed 
in  the  Proceedings,  and  submitted  to  every  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  at  their  First  Annual 
Session  after  the  said  amendment  or  amendments 
have  been  recommended  by  the  Triennial  Session. 

Sec.  2. — The  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
shall  read  the  amendment  or  amendments  in  open 
Session,  and  order  them  printed  in  the  Annual 
Grand  Session  Proceedings,  with  instructions  that 
each  Temple  and  Tabernacle  call  a  special  meeting 
to  act  on  the  amendment  or  amendments. 

Sec.  3. — When  a  Temple  is  opened  to  act  on  the 
amendments,  the  amendment  or  amendments  should 
first  be  carefully  read,  and  then  put  to  a  vote.  The 


54 


C.  S.  shall  thereupon  record  the  names  of  the  mem- 
bers who  voted  for  or  against  the  amendment  or 
amendments,  and  shall  forward  the  result  to  the 
C.  G.  S. 

Sec.  4. — Tabernacles  shall  proceed  in  the  same 
manner  as  Temples  in  regard  to  the  reading  of  and 
voting  for  the  amendment  or  amendments,  only 
that  the  C.  R.  shall  record  each  member  who  voted 
yes  or  no,  and  shall  forward  the  result  to  the  C.  G.  S. 

Sec.  5. — The  C.  G.  S.  shall  report  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  Session  the  vote  of  each 
Temple  and  Tabernacle.  If  three-fourths  of  the 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  approve  of  the  amend- 
ment or  amendments,  and  the  Grand  Session 
recommends  the  adoption  by  a  two-thirds  vote,  the 
C.  G.  S.  shall  forward  the  entire  vote  cast  to  the 
I.  C.  G.  S.  If  there  is  not  the  required  number  of 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  voting  for  the  adoption 
of  the  same,  the  C.  G.  S.  shall  inform  the  I.  C. 
G.  S.  that  the  amendment  or  amendments  are  re- 
jected by  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  for 
the  State  of . 

Sec.  6.— The  I.  C.  G.  S.  shall  report  the  vote 
from  all  the  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  to  the 
Triennial  Session.  If  seven-eighths  of  the  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  approve  the  amendment 
or  amendments,  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  announce 
that  the  amendment  or  amendments  have  been 
regularly  adopted,  and  are  a  part  of  the  Interna- 
tional Constitution.  If  they  have  not  been  ap- 
proved by  the  required  number,  the  I.  C.  G.  M. 
shall  declare  that  the  amendment  or  amendments 
have  been  rejected. 


KNIGHTSiTABOR'; 


IRNATIONAL 

Irderof 

irWELVE 


^.-iMiiiiii 


INTERNATIONAL  GRAND  OPPICERS'  JEWEL 
OP  OFFICE.    (Insert  Initials  of  Each  Officer.) 


65 


CONTINUATION 


OP 


GENERAL  LAWS 


66 


GENERAL  LAWS- CONTINUATION, 


ARTICLE  I. 

Section  1. — The  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  shall  have  the  authority  to  enforce  the 
General  Laws  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve, 
of  Knights  and  Daughter  Priestesses  of  Tabor. 
The  General  Laws  cover  and  comprise  the  Consti- 
tution and  all  Installing  Ceremonies,  all  Funeral 
Ceremonies,  Corner-stone  Laying,  Dedicating  Cere- 
monies, Taborian  Drill,  Color  of  Regalia,  Form  of 
Jewels  and  Badges,  Duties  of  Grand  Officers,  and 
General  Taborian  Rules  and  Instructions.  The  In- 
ternational Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be 
an  advisory  and  appellate  body,  whose  decisions 
shall  be  final.  During  the  interim  between  the 
Triennial  Grand  Sessions,  the  International  Chief 
Grand  Mentor  shall  hear  all  appeals,  and  adjust  all 
differences  occurring  between  Grand  Temples  and 
Tabernacles.  He  shall  also  have  authority  to  en- 
force all  of  the  General  Laws. 

(See  Code,  constituting  part  of  the  General  Laws, 
with  the  Law  of  Impeachment  and  Trials  of  I.  C.  G. 
M.s  and  I.  C.  G.  P.s,  and  Chief  Grand  Mentors 
and  Chief  Grand  Preceptresses.) 

57 


58 
ARTICLE  II. 

GRAND  TEMPLES  AND  TABERNACLES. 

Section  1. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  of 
the  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor  can  be  organ- 
ized within  the  boundaries  of  any  State  or  Terri- 
tory of  the  United  States,  also  in  any  State,  Prov- 
ince or  country  in  the  civilized  world. 

Sec.  2. — Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  cannot 
be  organized  with  less  than  forty  organizations, 
composed  of  chartered  and  warranted  Temples, 
Tabernacles,  Tents  and  Palatiums. 

Sec.  3. — The  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents  are  required  to  pay  the  expenses  for  or- 
ganizing a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  within  the 
boundaries  of  their  State  or  Province. 

Sec.  4. — When  a  State,  Territory  or  Province 
has  forty  organizations,  composed  of  Temples,  Tab- 
ernacles, Palatiums  and  Tents,  within  its  bound- 
aries, a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  must  be  or- 
ganized. Two  or  more  States  adjoining  each  other 
may,  for  the  convenience  of  their  organizations, 
unite  in  forming  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  5. — It  is  the  duty  of  an  International 
Deputy,  living  within  the  boundaries  of  a  State, 
Territory  or  Province  that  has  not  organized,  to  in- 
form the  I.  C.  G.  M.  when  there  is  a  lawful  num- 
ber of  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents 
within  those  boundaries  willing  to  organize  a  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle.  The  International  Grand 
Chief  Mentor,  when  he  receives  this  information, 
shall  notify  the  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents  to  prepare  to  organize.     He  is  required 


59 


to  give  them  at  least  three  months  to  prepare  for 
organizing  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  6. — The  International  Chief  Grand  Mentor 
may  give  a  dispensation  to  organize  a  Grand  Tem- 
ple or  Tabernacle  with  less  than  forty  organizations, 
if  he  is  satisfied  that  it  will  be  for  the  best  inter- 
ests of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve. 

ARTICLE  III. 

POWER  AND   AUTHORITY. 

Section  1. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
shall  have  power  and  authority  over  all  Temples, 
Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents  within  the  bound- 
aries of  the  State,  Territory  or  Province  in  which  it 
is  organized. 

Sec.  2. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
have  authority  to  organize  Temples,  Tabernacles, 
Palatiums  and  Tents  in  any  State,  Territory, 
Province  or  country  in  the  civilized  world,  where 
there  is  no  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  have 
jurisdiction  over  all  of  its  organizations  until  a  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  is  organized. 

Sec.  3. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
have  authority  to  enact  laws  and  rules  for  its 
government  (but  not  to  conflict  with  the  Inter- 
national General  Laws) ,  grant  charters  and  warrants, 
suspend  or  revoke  charters  and  warrants  for  cause, 
receive  and  hear  appeals,  redress  grievances  and 
complaints  arising  in  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Pala- 
tiums or  Tents,  and  to  provide  for  its  support  and 
government. 

Sec.  4. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
have  an  Annual  Grand  Session.     A  Special  Grand 


60 


Session  can  be  called  by  the  Chief  Grand  Mentor 
at  any  time,  if  he  finds  it  is  necessary  or  when  he  is 
requested  to  call  a  special  Grand  Session  by  two- 
thirds  of  the  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents. 

Sec.  5. — Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  shall 
have  exclusive  jurisdiction  within  the  boundaries  of 
the  State,  Territory  or  Province  in  which  they  are 
organized,  provided  they  do  not  conflict  with  the 
International  General  Laws. 

Sec.  6. — When  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
organizes  in  any  State,  Territory  or  Province  where 
there  is  no  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  their 
organization  does  not  give  them  exclusive  juris- 
diction over  the  State,  Territory  or  Province  ;  their 
jurisdiction  extends  only  to  their  organization, 
other  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  have  the 
same  right  to  organize  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Pa- 
latiums and  Tents  in  the  same  State,  Territory  or 
Province,  and  have  jurisdiction  over  their  own 
organizations. 

AETICLE  IV. 

APPEALS. 

Section  1. — Members  who  have  been  suspended 
or  expelled,  and  think  that  they  have  not  received 
justice,  have  the  right  to  appeal  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  Session. 

Sec.  2. — The  method  of  making  out  an  appeal 
is  as  follows :  First,  give  the  day  and  date  of  the 
trial,  and  the  name  and  number  of  the  Temple  or 
the  Tabernacle ;  second,  give  the  character  of  the 
offense  upon  which  the  charge   and  specifications 


61 


are  based;  third,  state  the  reason  why  you  appeal; 
fourth,  tell  in  what  manner  you  were  unjustly 
sentenced;  and,  fifth,  give  the  names  of  witnesses. 
If  it  is  a  Temple,  a  copy  of  the  appeal  must  be 
filed  with  the  Chief  Scribe ;  if  a  Tabernacle,  with 
the  Chief  Recorder.  The  appellant  must  retain  a 
copy.  The  appeal  must  be  filed  with  the  C.  G.  S. 
within  ten  days  after  the  trial. 

Sec.  3. — The  C.  S.  or  C.  E.  who  receives  an  ap- 
peal must  retain  a  copy,  and  forward  the  original 
appeal  to  the  C.  G.  S. 

Sec.  4. — When  the  Grand  Session  assembles,  the 
C.  G.  S.  must  read  the  appeal  in  open  Session,  and 
the  C.  G.  M.  shall  refer  the  same  to  the  Board  of 
Grand  Judges. 

Sec.  5. — The  Grand  Judges  shall  examine  the 
complaint  in  the  appeal  and  the  witnesses,  and  de- 
liver their  decision  to  the  Grand  Session.  If 
adopted  by  a  majority  vote,  their  decision  is  sus- 
tained. 

Sec.  6. — If  the  appellant  is  not  satisfied,  an 
appeal  can  be  taken  to  the  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
by  giving  notice  to  the  C.  G.  S.  within  ten  days 
after  the  Grand  Session  closes.  The  C.  G.  S.  must 
forward  a  copy  of  the  appeal,  with  the  other  papers 
pertaining  to  the  same,  to  the  I.  C.  G.  S. 

Sec.  7. — When  the  Triennial  Grand  Session  as- 
sembles, the  I.  C.  G.  S.  shall  read  the  appeal,  and 
the  other  papers  that  accompany  it,  in  open  Session. 
The  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  refer  the  appeal  and  papers 
to  the  International  Board  of  Grand  Judges,  who 
shall  investigate  and  examine  witnesses,  and  render 
their  decision  to  the  Session,     If  adopted,  it  settles 


62 

the  matter.  If  a  majority  refuse  to  adopt  the  de- 
cision, the  Triennial  Session  shall  dispose  of  the 
appeal  by  a  majority  vote. 

AKTICLE  V. 

ANNUAL   SERMONS. 

Section  1. — The  International  Order  of  Twelve, 
by  the  teachings  of  its  Constitutions  and  Degrees, 
shows  the  belief  of  its  members  in  the  Lord  God, 
the  Supreme  Ruler  of  Heaven  and  Earth.  It  is  but 
right  and  just  that  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor  should  set  apart  one  Sunday  in  each  year  to 
unite  their  voices  in  prayer  and  thanks  that  He  has 
preserved  our  Order. 

Sec.  2. — The  third  Sunday  in  the  month  of  June 
of  each  year  is  hereby  fixed  as  the  day  for  the 
Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor  to  assemble  and 
have  an  Annual  Sermon  preached.  The  members 
of  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents  are 
required  to  meet  together  that  day,  and  make  a 
united  service  to  God. 

Sec.  3. — The  members  can  turn  out  in  full  re- 
galia, or  in  undress  regalia,  as  may  be  decided  by 
their  various  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents. 

Sec.  4. — In  large  cities,  where  the  members  are 
too  numerous  to  all  meet  in  one  church,  they  can 
divide  and  hold  the  services  in  two  churches  of 
different  denominations  at  the  same  hour. 

ARTICLE  VI. 

Sec.  1. — Every  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
nau^t  formulate  a  plan  for  building  halls^  and  iuajst 


63 


that  the  Temples  and  Tabernacles  working  under 
its  jurisdiction  build  or  buy  a  suitable  hall  to  hold 
their  meetings  in. 

Sec.  2. — Every  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
must  know  that  all  Temples  and  Tabernacles  take 
care  of  their  sick,  distressed  or  disabled  members, 
and  that  the  weekly  benefits  are  paid  regularly. 

Sec.  3. — Every  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
must  impress  on  the  members  that,  when  they  start 
on  a  journey,  they  must  take  traveling  certificates 
and  monthly  cards  from  Temples  or  Tabernacles, 
to  show  that  they  are  in  good  standing,  and  warn 
all  Temples  and  Tabernacles  that  they  must  not  re- 
ceive strangers  without  their  certificates,  cards  and 
Quarterly  Pass. 

Halls. 

The  halls  used  by  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor  must  be  dedicated  within  three  months  after 
they  are  occupied.  Secret  meetings  in  private 
houses  are  positively  prohibited. 

International   Deputies. 

1.  The  business  of  the  International  Deputies  is 
to  organize  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents  in  any  part  of  the  civilized  world. 

2.  When  they  make  an  organization,  they  shall 
report  that  organization,  if  it  is  within  the  borders 
of  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  to  the  Chief 
Grand  Mentor  for  a  charter. 

3.  When  they  make  an  organization  in  any  State, 
Territory  or  Province,  where  there  is  no  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  organized,  the  Deputy  shall 


64 


report  to    the   International   Grand   Chief    for  a 
charter. 

4.  An  International  Deputy  Grand  Mentor  must 
be  a  member  in  good  standing  in  a  Temple  of  the 
Knights  of  Tabor,  and  is  amenable  to  the  laws  the 
same  as  any  other  member.  When  his  membership 
ceases,  his  commission  is  revoked. 

5.  An  International  Grand  Deputy  must  be  a 
member  in  good  standing  in  a  Tabernacle  of  Saba 
Meroe  Priestesses,  and  is  amenable  to  the  laws  the 
same  as  any  other  member.  When  her  membership 
ceases,  her  commission  is  revoked. 

6. — International  Deputies,  or  Past  International 
Deputy  Knights  or  Daughters,  shall  be  members 
of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
as  long  as  they  remain  in  good  standing  in  a  Tem- 
ple or  Tabernacle.   , 

International  Districts. 

The  International  Grand  Chief  may,  for  the  con- 
venience of  the  members,  organize  and  arrange 
International  Districts.  These  Districts  shall  not 
conflict  with  the  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles, 
or  prevent  them  from  making  organizations  in  such 
Districts.  The  Districts  shall  be  represented  in  the 
Triennial  Grand  Session  by  their  District  Grand 
Mentor  and  District  Grand  Preceptress.  These  Dis- 
tricts shall  bo  required  to  conform  to  the  Laws  and 
Rules  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve. 

Suspensions  and   Expulsions. 

When  a  member  is  suspended  or  expelled  from  a 
Temple  or  Tabernacle  by  due  process  of  law,  the 


65 


member  s'lall  remain  suspended  or  expelled,  as  the 
case  may  be,  until  restored  to  membership  by  the 
same  Temple  or  Tabernacle,  or  by  the  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle;  provided,  however,  that  if  the 
Temple  or  Tabernacle  becomes  defunct  before  the 
suspended  or  expelled  member  is  restored,  the 
member  can  apply  by  petition  to  the  Grand  Session, 
which  is  authorized  to  restore  the  member  (if  after 
an  investigation  they  are  found  worthy),  and  give  a 
transfer. 

Members  of  the  International  Grand  Temple 
AND  Tabernacle. 

The  membership  of  the  International  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle  shall  be  as  follows: 
1. — Chief  Mentors  and  Past  Chief  Mentors. 
2. — Chief  Preceptresses  and  Past  Chief  Preceptresses. 
3. — Presiding  Princes  and  Past  Presiding  Princes. 
4. — Vice-Princes3es  and  Past  Vice-Princesses. 
5. — Queen  Mothers  and  Past  Queen  Mothers. 
6. — International  Deputy  Grand  Mentors. 
7. — Past  International  Deputy  Grand  Mentors. 
8. — International  Grand  Deputies. 
9. — Past  International  Grand  Deputies. 

To  continue  their  membership  in  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  they  must  be  and 
remain  members  in  good  standing  in  their  Temples 
or  Tabernacles. 

Members  of  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles. 

The  members  of  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
shall  be  as  follows : 

1. — Chief  Mentors  and  Past  Chief  Mentors. 
2. — Chief  Preceptresses  and  Past  Chief  Preceptresses. 
(3— Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


66 


3. — ^Presiding  Princes  and  Past  Presiding  Princes. 

4. — Vice-Princesses  and  Past  Vice-Princesses. 

5. — Queen  Mothers  and  Past  Queen  Mothers. 

6. — Deputy   Grand   Mentors   and   Past   Deputy  Grand 

Mentors. 
7. — Deputy  Grand  Preceptresses  and  Past  Deputy  Grand 

Preceptresses. 
To  continue  their  membership  in  the  Grand  Tem- 
ples and  Taberhacles,   they  must  be  and  remain 
members  in  good  standing  in  their  Temples  or  Tab- 
ernacles. 

Honorary  Members. 

The  only  department  in  the  International  Order 
of  Twelve  that  has  the  authority  to  make  honorary 
members  is  the  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  and  they 
are  permitted  under  the  following  instructions  to 
honor  a  member  of  their  Temple  or  Tabernacle: 
First,  the  member  to  receive  this  honor  must  be  an 
old  member,  for  years  in  good  standing,  and  one 
who  has  been  active  in  building  up  the  Order.  If  a 
Temple  desires  to  invest  one  of  their  members  with 
this  honor,  it  will  require  a  unanimous  vote  of  all 
the  members  who  are  present  at  a  regular  meeting. 
If  a  Tabernacle  desires  to  honor  a  Daughter  who  is 
a  member  of  their  Tabernacle,  it  can  be  done  by  a 
unanimous  vote  of  all  the  members  present  at  a 
regular  meeting.  An  honorary  member  is  entitled 
to  all  the  benefits  and  privileges  of  a  contributing 
member. 

The  Unity  of  the  International  Order  of 
Twelve. 

The  Ritualistic  work  of  the  Order  is  unchange- 
able and  uniform,  the  same  everywhere;   new  de- 


67 


grees  cannot  be  added  or  new  signs  and  tokens  be 
given,  except  it  is  so  ordered  by  amending  the 
General  Laws.  To  add  to  the  Eitualistic  work,  or 
to  make  a  new  degree  or  degrees  for  any  of  the 
departments,  will  require  the  unanimous  vote  of 
every  Temple  and  Tabernacle  in  the  affimative,  and 
the  unanimous  vote  of  every  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  when  in  Grand  Session.  The  Triennial 
Grand  Session  may,  when  satisfactory  evidence  is 
given  that  it  is  the  unanimous  desire  of  every  mem- 
ber of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve  to  add  new 
degrees,  signs,  words  and  tokens  to  the  Ritualistic 
work,  the  Triennial  Grand  Session  is  authorized  to 
prepare  such  degrees,  by  appointing  a  committee 
to  draft  the  degrees,  signs,  words  or  tokens,  and 
submit  their  work  to  the  next  Triennial  Grand 
Session ;  then,  if  approved  by  the  unanimous  vote 
of  the  Triennial  Grand  Session,  said  degree  or  de- 
grees, signs,  words  and  tokens  shall  be  lawful. 

Full  Uniform. 

Within  three  months  after  the  Uniform  Rank  of 
Tabor  or  the  Fourth  Degree  in  the  Temple  is  con- 
ferred, the  member  must  have  his  full  uniform,  as 
follows :  Helmet,  sword  and  belt,  gloves  and  gaunt- 
lets, cap,  cup  and  badges.  A  Knight  failing  to 
comply  with  this  law,  shall  be  and  stand  suspended 
until  he  has  his  full  uniform.  If  a  C.  M.  fails 
to  enforce  this  law,  the  C.  G.  M.  is  authorized  to 
remove  him  from  office  and  appoint  another  C.  M. 
This  law  is  to  be  enforced  when  the  Temple  is  one 
year  old.  The  members  of  every  Temple  that  is 
one  year  old  must  have  their  full  uniform. 


68 

777— THE  ORGANIZATION— 333. 

The  International  Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  was  organized  in  the  City 
of  Independence,  State  of  Missouri,  August  the 
12th,  A.  D.  1872.  This  is  the  birthday  of  the 
Order,  and  is  hereby  set  apart  as  the  proper  day  to 
celebrate.  It  is  the  Taborian  day — a  day  to  be 
remembered. 


INSTALLATION 


OF 


lNTE[[NAT10NjlL  GRAp  0FFICEI|S. 


FULL  CEREMONIES. 


INSTALLING  CEREMONY 

OF 

1NTEI[NATI01(AL  GRAt(D  OFFIGEI[S. 

:o: 

The  installing  ceremony  is  performed  by  a  Past 
International  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  or  a  Present  or 
Past  Chief  Grand  Mentor. 

When  the  time  arrives  to  install,  the  I.  G.  Drill- 
Master  (or  Marshal,  who  is  appointed  for  that  oc- 
casion) receives  the  Jewels,  or  badges  of  office  from 
each  officer,  and  places  them  on  the  altar.  The 
Marshal  forms  the  officers  elected  and  appointed  in 
a  semi-circle  around  the  altar,  the  International 
Chief  and  International  Preceptress  elect  in  the  cen- 
ter of  the  circle,  and  the  other  officers  on  each  side 
of  them,  according  to  the  roll  of  office.  The  band 
plays  until  the  installing  ceremony  is  ready  to  com- 
mence.) 

The  Marshal  salutes  the  installing  Grand  Officer, 
and  says :  Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  high  honor  of  pre- 
senting to  you  these  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor,  who  have  been  regularly  elected  to  fill  the 
several  offices  in  the  International  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
/or  the  ensuing  term.     I  also  present  to  you  the  ap- 

70 


71 

pointed  officers  ;  they  nil  have  signified  their  readiness 
to  enter  upon  their  official  duties. 

The  Installing  Grand  to  Marshal: — Sir  Marshal, 
please  form  the  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters  in  a  cir- 
cle around  these  elected  and  appointed  officers.  (A 
doable  circle  is  formed,  the  Daughters  forming  the 
inner  and  the  Knights  the  outer  circle.) 

Sir  Grand  to  the  officers  elect: — Sir  Knights  and 
Daughters  of  Tabor,  you  have  been  honored  by 
receiving  the  suffrage  of  the  members  of  the  In- 
ternational Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle ;  you  have 
been  elected  to  the  hiofhest  offices  that  are  in  the 
gift  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve.  We  are 
here  to  invest  and  entrust  to  your  care  the  responsi- 
bility of  conducting  the  business  and  work  of  the 
Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor.  The  honor, 
stability  and  perpetuity  of  the  Order  are  to  be  placed 
in  your  charge.  I  admonish  you  to  vigilantly  guard 
every  avenue,  and  be  ready  to  meet  and  repel  any 
danger  that  would  deter  or  obstruct  our  Order  in 
fulfilling  its  mission  for  the  benefit  of  mankind.  It 
becomes  my  duty  to  administer  to  you  an  obligation 
that  all  International  Grand  Officers  have  taken  be- 
fore they  were  installed.  If  you  are  willing  and 
ready,  place  your  right  hands  on  your  hearts  and  re- 
peat your  full  names,  and  say  after  me: 

Obligation  . 

I, ,   do  solemnly  promise   that  I 

will  defend  and  support  the  International  Constitu- 
tion and  General  Laws  of  the  International  Order 
of  Twelve.  I  will  faithfully  attend  to  the  duties  of 
the  office  that  I  am  about  to  be  installed  in. — In 
8olo  Deo  jSalusf 


72 

The  Grand : — Sir  Knights,  uncover;  let  us  Knights 
and  Daughters  unite  in  prayer  with  the  Grand 
Orator. 

Prayer. 

Almighty  and  Everlasting  God,  in  the  name  of 
Jesus,  Thine  Only  Begotten  Son,  our  Savior,  we 
come  unto  Thee.  We  confess  our  many  sins  and 
omissions  of  duty  unto  Thee,  Thou  who  art  full  of 
mercy  and  love  to  mankind,  and  have  given  to  us 
the  inestimable  privilege  of  coming  unto  Thee  at  all 
times  to  plead  for  pardon  and  forgiveness.  Hear 
us  at  this  hour  and  let  the  light  of  Thy  Godly  Pres- 
ence illumine  our  hearts,  and  in  the  name  of  Jesus 
fit  us  and  prepare  us  that  we  may  worship  Thee  in 
the  beauty  of  holiness.  We  come  to  Thee,  our 
Heavenly  Father  to  ask  Thy  blessings  for  the  mem- 
bers of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve,  wherever 
they  are  dispersed  around  the  world.  In  an  especial 
manner  bless  these  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor 
that  are  about  to  be  invested  with  the  governing 
power  of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tab- 
ernacle. Oh  Lord,  endow  them  with  wisdom,  that 
they  may  be  enabled  to  carry  forward  the  business 
of  the  Order  to  Thy  honor  and  glory,  and  for  the 
best  interests  of  its  members  and  for  the  benefit  of 
humanity.  Direct  us  in  all  our  ways,  and  prosper 
the  work  of  the  Order  in  the  hands  of  these  Grand 
Officers.  May  Thy  Godly  and  Fatherly  care  and  pro- 
tection accompany  us  all  through  life.  This  we 
humbly  beg,  in  the  name  of  Thy  Exalted  Son,  Jesus 
Christ,  our  Lord,  Redeemer  and  Savior. — In  Solo 
Deo  Salusf 


73 

Response  by  the  members:  Amen!  Honor  and 
Glory  to  God !  One  rap,  and  all  are  seated — Music. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights,  cover. 

The  Marshal  then  places  the  elected  Grand  Chief 
in  proper  position,  and  says : 

Sir  Grand,  I  present  to  you  Sir , 

who  has  been  elected  International  Chief  Grand 
Mentor,  and  is  now  ready  for  installation. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knight,  you  have  been  chosen 
by  the  members  of  this  Triennial  Session  to  the 
most  exalted  position  in  the  gift  of  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  You  have  my  con- 
gratulations upon  your  elevation  to  that  eminent 
station;  you  will  find  your  official  duties  in  the 
Constitution  and  General  Laws  of  the  International 
Order  of  Twelve.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel 
of  your  office.  Be  faithful  to  the  Taborian  Knight- 
hood. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge  to  the  left  breast  of 
the  Most  Faithful  Grand  Chief,  and  conducts  him  to 
the  Grand  Seat  in  the  South. 

Instructions  to  the  International  Chief  Grand 
Preceptress. 

Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  present  to  you  Daughter 

,  who  has  been  elected  International 

Chief  Grand  Preceptress,  and  is  now  ready  to  be 
installed. 

Sir  Grand : — Most  Faithful  Daughter,  you  have 
been  elected  by  the  members  of  this  Triennial  Ses- 
sion to  the  most  exalted  position  that  is  given  to  a 
Daughter  of  the  Tabernacle.  Your  duties  in  the 
International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  you 
will  find  in  the  Constitution  and  General  Laws  of 


74 


the  International  Order  of  Twelve.  I  now  invest 
you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be  faithful  to 
every  duty  that  is  required  of  you  in  your  eminent 
station. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge  to  her  left  breast, 
and  seats  her  at  the  left  side  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M. 

Sir  Grand  gives  three  raps,  and  all  stand.  He 
then  says : — By  virtue  of  the  power  and  authority 
as  Installing  Officer,  I  now  and  here  declare  that 
Sir is  regularly  installed  Interna- 
tional Chief  Grand  Mentor  of  the  International 
Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights  and  Daughters  of 
Tabor. 

All  repeat  after  the  Grand:  We  Declare/  and 
give  one  clap.     (This  is  repeated  three  times. ) 

Sir  Grand: — By  virtue  of  the  power  and  author- 
ity as   Installing  Officer,  I  now  and  here   declare 

that  Daughter is  regularly  installed 

International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress  of  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights  and  Daugh- 
ters of  Tabor. 

All  repeat  after  the  Grand:  We  Declare/  and 
give  one  clap.     (This  is  repeated  three  times. ) 

All  say  after  the  Grand :  We  welcome  our  In- 
ternational  Grand  Chief/  and  clap  three  times 
three. 

All  repeat  after  the  Grand:  We  welcome  our 
International  Grand  Preceptress/  and  clap  three 
times  three. 

The  Grand  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are  seated.  If 
the  International  Grand  Chief  and  International 
Grand  Preceptress  desire  to  make  any  remarks, 
this  is  the  proper  time. 


75 


International  Vice-Grand  Mentor,  and  Inter- 
national Vice-Grand  Preceptress. 

Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of  present- 
ing to  you  Sir ,  who  has  been  elected 

International   Vice-Grand   Mentor,    and   Daughter 

,  who  has  been  elected  International 

Vice-Grand  Preceptress.  They  are  now  ready  to 
be  installed. 

Sir  Grand:— Eight  Faithful  Sir  and  Right 
Faithful  Daughter,  you  have  been  elected  by  the 
members  of  this  Triennial  Session  to  fill  the  impor- 
tant duties  of  International  Vice-Grand  Mentor  and 
International  Vice-Grand  Preceptress.  These  posi- 
tions are  next  in  rank  to  the  Presiding  Grand 
Officers'.  You  will  find  your  duties  fully  laid  down 
in  the  International  Constitution.  I  congratulate 
you  on  the  high  position  to  which  you  have  been 
called  in  the  order.  You  are  hereby  invested  with 
the  Jewel  of  office. 

The  Marshal  attaches  the  badges  of  office  to  their 
left  breasts,  and  seats  them  properly  in  the  Nbrth. 

International  Chief  Grand  Scribe  and  Inter- 
national Chief  Grand  Recorder. 

The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  take  pleasure  in  in- 
troducing to  you  Sir ,  who  has  been 

elected  I.  C.  G.  S.,  and  Daughter , 

who  has  been  elected  I.  C.  G.  R.  They  are  now 
ready  to  be  installed. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knight  and  Daughter,  you  have 
been  elected  by  the  members  of  this  Triennial  Ses- 
sion, and  it  shows  the  confidence  they  place  in  your 
ability  to  perform  the  duties  of  these  very  impor- 


76 


tant  offices.  You  will  find  your  instructions  in  the 
International  Constitution.  Eead  it  carefully.  I 
now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  office. 

The  Marshal  attaches  the  badges,  and  seats  them. 

International  Chief  Grand  Treasurer. 

The  Marshal: — Sir   Grand,    I   take  pleasure   in 

introducing  to  you  Sir ,  who  has 

been  elected  I.  C.  G.  T.  He  is  now  ready  for  in- 
stallation. 

Sir  Grand : — Sir  Knight,  you  have  been  elected 
by  the  members  of  this  Triennial  Session  to  an  of- 
fice of  trust  and  responsibility ;  it  is  an  honor  con- 
ferred on  you,  and  an  evidence  that  the  members 
have  confidence  in  your  integrity.  You  will  find 
your  duties  in  the  International  Constitution.  Read 
it  carefully.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge,  and  seats  him. 

International  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

The  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure  of 

introducing  to  you  Daughter ,  who 

has  been  elected  I.  G.  Q.  M.  She  is  now  ready  to 
be  installed. 

Sir  Grand : — ^Daughter,  you  have  been  elected  by 
the  members  of  this  Triennial  Session  to  the  very 
distinguished  position  of  International  Grand  Queen 
Mother.  The  office  is  one  of  great  usefulness,  and 
you  will  find  pleasure  in  attending  to  its  several  du- 
ties. The  International  Constitution  will  give  you 
the  full  instructions  regarding  your  position. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge  of  office,  and  seats 
her  in  the  East. 


77 


International  Chief  Grand  Orator  and  Inter- 
national Chief  Grand  Priestess. 

The  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  am  pleased  to  intro- 
duce to  you  Sir ,  who  has   been 

elected  I.  C.  G.  0.,  and  Daughter , 

who  has  been  elected  I.  C.  G.  Ps.  They  are  now 
ready  for  installation. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knight  and  Daughter,  you  have 
been  elected  by  the  members  of  this  Triennial  Ses- 
sion to  the  honorable  offices  of  I.  C.  G.  O.  and  I. 
C.  G.  Ps.,  these  are  high  and  sacred  positions  to 
which  you  have  been  called ;  may  you  be  thoroughly 
furnished  and  abundantly  provided  for  the  good 
work.  Your  duties  are  found  in  the  International 
Constitution.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
your  office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badges  of  office,  and  seats 
them  in  the  West. 

International  Grand  Inner  Sentinel. 

The  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure  of 

presenting  to  you  Daughter ,  who 

has  been  elected  I.  G.  I.  St.,  and  is  now  ready  to 
be  installed. 

Sir  Grand : — Daughter ,  you  have 

been  elected  to  the  very  important  position  of  I. 
G.  I.  St.  I  admonish  you  to  be  zealous  in  your 
duties.  You  will  find  your  instructions  in  the  In- 
ternational Constitution.  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  your  office.     Please  be  seated. 

International  Grand   Drill-Master. 
The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  i^  gives  me  pleasure 
to   present  to  you  Sir  ,  who  has 


78 


been  elected  I.  G.  D.-M.,  and  is  now  ready  for  in- 
stallation. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knight,  your  election  to  the  re- 
sponsible office  of  I.  G.  D.-M.  is  proof  of  the  con- 
fidence that  is  reposed  in  your  ability  to  discharge 
the  duties  of  the  office.  You  will  find  your  instruc- 
tions in  the  International  Constitution.  I  now  in- 
vest you  with  the  Implements  of  your  office  and 
the  Jewel.     Please  be  seated. 

International  Grand  Color  Bearer. 

The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to   you  Sir ,  who  has 

been  appointed  I.  G.  C.  B.,  and  now  ready  to  be 
installed. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knight,  you  have  been  ap- 
pointed International  Grand  Color-Bearer.  The 
office  is  one  of  honor,  and  requires  courage.  Your 
duties  are  fully  laid  down  in  the  International  Con- 
stitution. I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge,  and  seats  him. 

International  Chief  Grand  Sentinel. 

The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure  of 

presenting  to  you  Sir ,  who  has  been 

appointed  International  Chief  Grand  Sentinel.  He 
is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Sir  Grand : — Sir  Knight,  you  have  been  honored 
with  the  appointment  of  International  Chief  Grand 
Sentinel.  It  is  an  office  of  great  responsibility.  I 
admonish  you  to  be  vigilant  in  your  several  duties. 
You  will  find  your  instructions  in  the  International 


79 

Constitution.     Be  faithful.     I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  office  and  Sword  of  defense. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badge,  and  seats  him. 

International  Chief  Grand  Guards. 

The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 
presenting  to  you  Sir  Knights  (gives  each  of  their 
names).     They  are  now  ready  for  installation. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights,  you  have  been  ap- 
pointed to  the  honorable  position  of  International 
Chief  Grand  Guards.  Be  punctual  to  the  trust  that 
is  given  to  you,  that  you  may  merit  the  approval  of 
the  members  of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle.  You  will  find  your  instructions  in  the 
International  Constitution.  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badges,  and  seats  them. 

International  Chief  Grand  Judges. 

The  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 
introducing  to  you  Sir  Knights  (gives  their  names), 
and  Daughters  (gives  their  names),  who  have  been 
appointed  International  Chief  Grand  Judges,  and 
are  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Sir  Grand : — Sir  Knights  and  Daughters,  you  have 
been  appointed  to  the  exalted  office  of  International 
Chief  Grand  Judges.  This  distinguished  position 
is  one  that  requires  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 
Laws  governing  the  Order.  You  will  find  your  in- 
structions in  the  International  Constitution  and 
General  Laws.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewels 
of  office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badges,  and  seats  tkem. 


80 

International  Chief  Grand  Tribunes. 

The  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 
presenting  to  you  Daughters  (gives  their  names). 
They  have  been  appointed  International  Chief 
Grand  Tribunes,  and  are  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Sir  Grand : — I  am  pleased  to  hear  that  you  are 
appointed  to  the  honorable  offices  of  International 
Chief  Grand  Tribunes.  This  high  position  is  one  of 
dignity  and  usefulness.  May  you  fill  its  duties  with 
honor.  You  will  find  your  instructions  in  the  In- 
ternational Constitution.  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewels  of  office. 

The  Marshal  affixes  the  badges,  and  seats  them. 

Singing,  or  music  by  the  band. 

After  the  music  has  finished,  the  Sir  Grand  gives 
three  raps ;  all  Knights  and  Daughters  stand,  except 
those  that  have  just  been  installed. 

Closing  Ceremony. 

The  Sir  Grand  gives  three  claps,  and  says :  By 
virtue  of  the  authority  in  me  vested  as  Installing 
Grand  Officer,  I  now  and  here  declare  that  the  Offi- 
cers of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle have  been  regularly  installed  and  inducted  into 
their  several  official  positions  for  the  ensuing  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  term. 

All  the  members  repeat  after  the  Sir  Grand:  We 
Declare/    We  Declare//    We  Declare/// 

All  give  claps,  three  times  four. 

The  Sir  Grand  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are  seated. 

Singing  or  music  by  the  band. 


81 

Oration. 

The  I.  C.  G.  M.  gives  three  raps,  and  all  stand. 
He  says :  By  virtue  of  the  authority  in  me  vested, 
I  now  declare  the  International  Triennial  Grand  Ses- 
sion from  work  to  rest,  until  the  next  Triennial  Ses- 
sion, unless  special  business  makes  it  necessary  to 
call  an  Extra  Session.  If  so,  all  the  members  will 
be  officially  notified. 

*'Home,  Sweet  Home,'*  is  sung  or  played  by  the 
band. 

The  I.  C.  G.  M.  then  gives  one  rap. 


Knights^Tabor 


llllJI'ERMTlONAL 
III  BORDER  OF 

IIIIB 


BADGE  OP  KNIGHTS  OF  TABOR. 


83 


FORM  QF  GRAND  TEMPLES  AND  TABERNACLES. 


I.  G.  Officers, 


oooooooo 


p.  G.  Officers. 


C.  G.  J.s 


p 

OR 

• 

® 

e 

• 

T. 

and 

T. 

• 

5? 

o 

• 

• 

G.  D.-M. 


G.  C.  B, 


!^ 


C5 


C.  G.  St. 


bd 


GRAND  TEMPLE  AND  TABERNACLE  OFFICER'S 
JEWEL. 

Twenty-seven  Grand  Officers— Each  Jewel  with  Initials 
ol  Office. 


84 


85 


AETICLE  VII. 

GRAND    TEMPLE    AND    TABERNACLE   OFFICERS. 

Section.  1. — The  official  titles  of  the  officers  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  be  as  fol- 
lows : 

1.— Chief  Grand  Mentor.— C.  G.  M. 
2.— Chief  Grand  Preceptress.— C.  G.  P. 
3.— Vice-Grand  Mentor.— V.-G.  M. 
4. — Vice-Grand  Preceptress. — V.-G.  P. 
5.— Chief  Grand  Scribe,— C.  G.  S. 
6.— Chief  Grand  Recorder.— C.  G.  R.  I 

7.— Chief  Grand  Treasurer.— C.  G.  T. 
8.— Grand  Queen  Mother.— G.  Q.  M. 
9.— Chief  Grand  Orator.— C.  G.  O. 
10.— Chief  Grand  Priestess.— C.  G.  Ps. 
11.— Grand  Drill-Master.— G.  D.-M. 
12.— Grand  Inner  Sentinel.— G.  I.  St. 
The  above  officers  are  elected  and   installed   at 
each  Grand  Session.      ^ 

Sec.  2. — The  following  officers  are  appointed  by 
the  C.  G.  M.,  and  installed  with  the  other  officers: 
1.— Grand  Color  Bearer.— G.  C.  B. 
2.— Chief  Grand  Sentinel.— C.  G.  St. 
3.— Chief  Grand  Guard.— C.  G.  G. 
4.— Chief  Grand  Guard.— C.  G.  G.  j 

5.— Chief  Grand  Guard.— C.  G.  G. 


1.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 
2.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 
3.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 


Sec.  3. — The  C.  G.  P.  appoints  the  following 
Beers — all  D: 
other  officers : 


officers — all  Daughters — who  are  installed  with  the 


S6 

1.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 
2.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 
3.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 
4.— Chief  Grand  Judge.— C.  G.  J. 


1.— Chief  Grand  Tribune.— C.  G.  Te. 
2.— Chief  Grand  Tribune.— C.  G.  Te. 
3.— Chief  Grand  Tribune.— C.  G.  Te. 

Sec.  4. — A  Sir  Knight  must  serve  as  Chief  Men- 
tor of  a  Temple  one  year,  before  he  can  be  elected 
and  installed  as  Chief  Grand  Mentor.  A  Daughter 
must  serve  as  Chief  Preceptress  of  a  Tabernacle 
one  year,  before  she  can  be  elected  and  installed  as 
Chief  Grand  Preceptress.  A  Daughter  must  serve 
one  year  as  Queen  Mother  of  a  Tent,  before  she 
can  be  elected  and  installed  as  Grand  Queen 
Mother. 

Sec.  5. — The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
must  make  a  constitutional  provision  defining  the 
number  of  votes  to  be  cast  in  each  department,  and 
who  shall  have  the  right  to  vote. 

Sec.  6. — A  Sir  Knight  cannot  be  elected  and 
installed  as  C.  G.  M.,  unless  he  is  a  member  in 
good  standing  in  a  Temple.  A  Daughter  cannot  be 
elected  as  C.  G.  P.,  unless  she  is  a  member  in  good 
standing  in  a  Tabernacfe. 

Sec.  7. — All  the  officers  in  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  must  be  and  remain  members  in 
good  standing  during  their  terms  of  office,  in  a 
Temple  or  Tabernacle.  If  they  lose  their  member- 
ship in  either  of  these  departments,  they  forfeit 
their  offices. 


ARTICLE  VIII. 

DUTIES  OF  GRAND  OFFICERS. 

Section  1. — TheChief  Grand  Mentor  shall  preside 
at  all  Sessions  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle. He  shall  have  authority  to  call  Special  Ses- 
sions when  he  decides  it  is  needed,  or  when  re- 
quested to  call  a  Session  by  a  two-thirds  of  the 
Temples  and  Tabernacles.  He  must  enforce  the 
laws,  decide  all  questions  of  law  or  points  of  order, 
and  appoint  officers  pro-tem.  in  case  of  the  ab- 
sence or  disqualification  of  the  officer  elected  or 
regularly  appointed.  He  can  give  permission,  by 
dispensation,  to  Temples,  Tabernacles  and  Pala- 
tiums,  to  reduce  the  constitutional  fee  for  receiving 
members  for  thirty,  sixty  or  ninety  days.  He  can 
give  dispensations  for  public  turn-outs  and  enter- 
tainments, and  for  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents  to  continue  work  when  their  charters  or 
warrants  are  lost.  He  can  grant  a  charter  or  war- 
rant upon  proof  that  they  are  destroyed  or  lost. 
He  can  organize  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents  in  person,  or  by  commissioned  Deputies. 
He  can  constitute  new  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Pala- 
tiums and  Tents  by  charter  or  warrants.  He  can 
install  the  officers,  dedicate  halls  and  lay  corner- 
stones, either  in  person  or  by  deputy.  He  can 
visit  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents  at 
any  time  when  he  deems  it  necessary.  He  must 
appoint  all  committees  not  otherwise  ordered.  He 
must  open  and  close  the  Grand  Session  without  a 
motion.  He  must  issue  the  Quarterly  Pass  to  all 
Temples   and    Tabernacles.      He   must    make    an 


ss 


annual  report  to  the  Grand  Session  of  the  condition 
of  all  the  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents.  He  must  sign  all  warrants  and  other  papers 
that  require  his  signature  to  make  them  legal. 

Sec.  2. — He  must  furnish  new  Temples,  Taber- 
nacles, Palatiums  and  Tents  with  charters  or  war- 
rants, and  books  and  blanks.  He  must  report 
monthly,  to  the  C.  G.  S.,  the  names  and  numbers 
of  all  new  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents,  with  the  names  and  addresses  of  the  C.  M., 
C.  P.,  P.  P.  and  Q.  M.,  and  with  the  monthly  re- 
port he  must  pay  to  the  C.  G.  S.  all  moneys  that 
he  has  received  for  charters,  warrants,  books  and 
blanks. 

Sec.  3. — He  can  suspend  a  Temple,  Tabernacle, 
Palatium  and  Tent,  if  he  decides  it  is  necessary  for 
the  good  of  the  order.  He  can  revoke  the  suspen- 
sion at  any  time,  or  order  them  to  meet  the  Grand 
Session  for  trial. 

Sec.  4. — He  can  suspend  a  Chief  Mentor,  Chief 
Preceptress,  Presiding  Prince  or  a  Queen  Mother 
when  a  grave  charge  is  made  against  either  by  two- 
thirds  of  their  members,  and  order  them  to  trial 
either  before  a  committee  of  peers  or  before  the 
Grand  Session.  In  the  event  that  a  presiding 
officer  is  suspended,  the  C.  G.  M.  must  fill  the 
vacancy  by  appointment;  provided  j  there  is  no  Vice 
to  fill  it. 

Sec.  5. — He  can  give  the  Degrees  of  the  Tem- 
ple, Tabernacle  and  Palatium  to  any  distinguished 
person  or  persons  at  will,  and  have  them  enrolled 
as  members  in  any  Temple,  Tabernacle  or  Palatium 
within  the  boundaries  of  his  State  and  jurisdiction. 


89 

This,  however,  will  not  constitute  them  honorary 
members. 

Sec.  6. — When  he  visits  any  Temple,  Taber- 
nacle or  Palatium  within  his  State  and  jurisdiction, 
his  traveling  expenses  and  per  diem  must  be  paid 
by  the  organization  which  he  visits.  He  can  pre- 
side in  any  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  and  Tent 
which  he  honors  with  a  visit. 

Sec.  7. — He  shall  decide  all  questions  or  points 
of  the  State  laws  or  rules.  His  decisions  are  final, 
until  reversed  by  his  successor,  or  by  the  Trien- 
nial Session. 

Sec.  8. — He  can  appoint  Special  Grand  Deputies 
to  represent  him  in  any  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle, or  for  the  transaction  of  any  business  in  his 
own  State  and  jurisdiction. 

Sec.  9. — He  can  appoint  as  many  Deputy  Grand 
Mentors  and  Deputy  Grand  Preceptresses  as  he 
may  need  for  organizing. 

Chief  Grand  Preceptress. 

Sec.  10.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  C.  G.  P.  to 
assist  the  C.  G.  M.  when  he  is  presiding,  and  pre- 
side during  his  temporary  absence  from  the  Chair. 
She  has  the  authority  to  organize  and  set  up  Taber- 
nacles, Palatiums  and  Tents.  She  is  authorized  to 
install  the  officers  of  Tabernacles  and  Palatiums. 
She  is  authorized  to  make  an  annual  visit  to  all 
,  Tabernacles  in  her  State  and  jurisdiction  that  need 
instruction,  and  have  her  traveling  expenses  and 
per  diem  paid  by  the  Tabernacles  that  she  visits. 
She  must  correspond  with  all  the  Chief  Precep- 
tresses in  her  State  and  jurisdiction,  on  the  condi- 


90 


tion  and  prospects  of  the  Order.  The  commissions 
of  Deputy  Grand  Preceptresses  must  have  her  sig- 
nature to  make  them  legal.  It  is  her  duty  to  make 
a  full  report  to  the  Grand  Session,  annually,  of  her 
-^flScial  business,  and  with  the  report  make  such 
recommendations  as  she  believes  to  be  for  the  best 
interests  of  the  Order,  and  the  success  of  Taber- 
nacles. 

Vice-Grand  Mentor. 

Sec.  11. — In  the  absence  of  the  C.  G.  M.  and 
the  C.  G.  P.,  the  Vice-Grand  Mentor  shall  preside 
over  the  business  of  the  Grand  Session.  In  case  of 
the  death,  mental  inability  or  removal  out  of  the 
State  and  jurisdiction,  or  lawful  disqualification  of 
the  C.  G.  M.  during  the  interim  between  the  Grand 
Sessions,  the  V.-G.  M.  shall  attend  to  all  the  of- 
ficial business  of  the  C.  G.  M.,  until  another  is 
duly  elected  and  installed. 

Vice-Grand  Preceptress. 
Sec.  12. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Vice-Grand 
Preceptress  to  perform  the  duties  of  the  C.  G.  P. 
in  the  absence  of  that  officer  from  the  Grand  Ses- 
sion ;  and  in  case  of  the  death  or  lawful  disqualifica- 
tion of  the  C.  G.  P.  during  the  time  between  the 
Grand  Sessions,  the  V.-G.  P.  must  attend  to  all  the 
business  of  the  C.  G.  P.,  until  another  is  duly 
elected  and  installed. 

Chief  Grand  Scribe. 

Sec.  13. — The  Chief  Grand  Scribe  shall  have  the 

custody  and  control  of  the  records  of  the  Grand 

Temple  and  Tabernacle,   and  preserve  all  official 

papers ;  he  shall  also  have  authority  to  provide  his 


91 


office  with  all  necessary  books  and  stationery  to 
enable  him  to  perform  his  duties ;  he  shall  keep  a 
journal  of  the  business  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  and  the  proceedings  of  the  Grand  Ses- 
sion; he  shall  keep  a  register  of  all  Temples, 
Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents,  with  date  of 
charter  and  warrant,  name  of  the  town  or  city, 
county  and  State  where  they  are  situated ;  he  shall 
keep  a  record  of  all  members  of  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle ;  he  shall  keep  in  his  office  a  copy 
of  the  seal  of  each  subordinate  Temple,  Taber- 
nacle, Palatium  and  Tent;  he  shall  receive  and 
give  notice  to  all  the  subordinate  Temples  and 
Tabernacles  of  all  rejected  candidates,  and  of  mem- 
bers that  have  been  suspended  or  expelled;  he 
shall  attend  to  and  carry  on  the  correspondence  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  give  notice 
to  the  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents 
when  and  where  to  meet  the  Grand  Session;  he 
shall  perform  such  other  duties  as  are  assigned  to 
him  by  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle;  he 
shall  receive  all  moneys  coming  to  the  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle,  and  pay  them  over  to  the  Chief 
Grand  Treasurer  without  delay,  taking  his  receipt 
therefor;  draw  all  warrants  on  the  Grand  Treas- 
urer, and  attest  them ;  keep  his  accounts  ready  for 
examination  at  any  time;  he  shall,  at  the  expira- 
tion of  his  term  of  office,  deliver  to  his  successor 
all  books,  papers,  warrants,  charters,  rituals, 
blanks  and  other  property  belonging  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle. 


92 


Chief  Grand  Eecorder. 
Sec.  14. — It  is  the  duty  of  the  C.  G.  R.  to  assist 
the  C.  G.  S.  in  taking  the  proceeding  of  the  Grand 
Session,  and  to  help  him  in  arranging  the  proceed- 
ings for  the  printer,  and  to  attend  to  such  other 
business  as  may  be  assigned  to  her  by  the  Grand 
Session. 

Chief  Grand  Treasurer. 

Sec.  15.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Treasurer  to  receive  all  moneys  and  valuables  be- 
longing to  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and 
keep  a  correct  account  of  the  same ;  he  shall  pay 
all  warrants  when  duly  signed  by  the  Chief  Grand 
Mentor,  and  countersigned  by  the  Chief  Grand 
Scribe ;  he  shall  make  an  annual  report  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  of  the  business  of  his  office ; 
his  books  shall  be  open  for  the  inspection  of  the 
Chief  Grand  Mentor,  or  any  committee  that  he  may 
appoint,  at  all  times;  he  shall  give  to  the  Chief 
Grand  Scribe  a  receipt  for  all  moneys  he  receives ; 
his  books  shall  show  the  amount  of  moneys  re- 
ceived and  paid  out;  he  shall  give  a  statement,  in 
writing,  at  the  Grand  Session,  exhibiting  the 
amounts  of  his  receipts  and  the  amounts  of  his  dis- 
bursements, and  for  what  purpose  the  money  was 
drawn ;  at  the  expiration  of  his  term  of  office  he 
shall  deliver  all  books,  papers  and  moneys  belong- 
ing to  the  Temple  and  Tabernacle  to  his  successor. 

Grand  Queen  Mother. 
Sec.  16. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Grand  Queen 
Mother  to  correspond  with  all  the  Queen  Mothers 
in  the  State  and  jurisdiction,  and  receive  their  re- 


93 


ports  of  the  condition  of  their  Tents,  with  the  num- 
ber of  children  in  each  Tent.  It  is  her  duty  to  visit 
a  Tent  when  requested  by  the  Queen  Mother,  and 
give  needed  instructions.  It  is  also  her  duty  to  re- 
port annually  to  tiie  International  Grand  Queen 
Mother  the  number  of  Tents,  with  the  number  of 
children  in  the  Tents.  She  shall  report  to  the 
Grand  Session,  and  make  any  recommendation  that 
will  be  for  the  good  of  the  Tents.  She  is  author- 
ized to  organize  Tents,  and  install  the  Officers  of 
Tents  of  Maids  and  Pai^^es  of  Honor. 

Chief  Grand  Orator. 

Sec.  17.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Orator  to  lead  the  devotional  exercises  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  perform  the  functions 
of  a  Chaplain  on  all  public  and  private  occasions. 
It  is  his  duty  to  preach  the  sermon  at  the  Annual 
Grand  Session. 

Chief  Grand  Priestess. 

Sec.  18.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Priestess  to  assist  the  Chief  Grand  Orator  during 
the  opening  and  closing  of  the  Grand  Session. 

Grand  Drill-Master.  m 

Sec.  19. — It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Grand 
Drill-Master  to  conduct  the  drill  exercises  during 
the  Grand  Session,  and  to  act  as  Marshal  in  the 
public  turn-outs  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle. He  must  arrange  the  hall  for  the  Grand 
Session,  and  shall  give  instructions  to  the  Chief 
Drill-Masters  of  Temples,  when  requested. 


94 

Grand  Inner  Sentinel. 
Sec.  20.— It  is  the  business  of  the  G.  I.  St.  to 
have  charge  of  the  Inner  Door  of  the  Grand  Ses- 
sion, and  to  admit  none  but  members  who  are  prop- 
erly clothed  and  have'  the  Pass.  She  must  report 
to  the  Vice-Grand  Mentor  the  names  of  all  who  de- 
sire admittance. 

Grand  Color  Bearer. 
Sec.  21.— It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Grand 
Color  Bearer  to  guard  and  protect  the  banner  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  to  unfurl 
and  carry  it  on  all  public  turn-outs  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Chief  Grand  Sentinel. 
Sec.  22.— The  Chief  Grand  Sentinel  shall  have 
charge  of  the  outer  entrance  of  the  Grand  Session. 
He  shall  admit  none  but  members  of  the  Order 
during  the  Session.  He  is  to  inspect  all  who  seek 
admission,  and  see  that  they  are  properly  clothed 
and  have  the  proper  Pass. 

Chief  Grand  Guards. 
Sec.  23.— It  is  the  duty  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Guards  to  assist  the  Presiding  Grand  Officer  in 
keepmg  order  during  the  Grand  Session.  They 
are  the  messengers  of  the  Grand  Session,  and  shall 
attend  to  any  business  entrusted  to  them,  under  the 
orders  of  the  Presiding  Grand  Officer. 

Chief  Grand  Judges. 
Sec.  24.— The   Board   of  Chief   Grand  Judges 
shall  consist  of  seven   members — four  Daughters 
iind  three  Sir  Knights— whose  duty  it  is  to  examine 


95 


all  complaints  and  charges  that  come  before  the 
Grand  Session.  They  shall  investigate  the  charges 
and  complaints  when  referred  to  them  by  the 
Grand  Session.  They  have  authority  to  call  wit- 
nesses before  them  for  examination.  The  C.  G.  S. 
must  place  in  the  hands  of  this  Board  all  the  i)apers 
and  documents  relating  to  any  case  coming  before 
them.  This  Board  shall  investigate  all  appeals 
and  grievances  that  come  before  the  Grand  Session, 
and  report  to  the  Grand  Session  their  findings  in 
all  charges,  complaints,  appeals  and  grievances. 
The  first  named  on  the  Board  is  the  Chairman. 
The  Board  organizes  by  electing  a  Secretary. 

Chief  Grand  Tribunes. 
Sec.  25. — It  is  the  business  of  the  Chief  Grand 
Tribunes  to  assist  the  Chief  Grand  Guards  in  keep- 
ing order  during  the  Grand  Session,  and  to  attend 
to  the  duties  of  messengers,  under  the  direction  of 
the  Presiding  Grand  Officer. 

ARTICLE   IX. 

BOARD  OF  GRAND    CURATORS. 

Section  1. — The  Board  of  Grand  Curators  shall 
consist  of  the  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  Chief  Grand 
Preceptress,  Chief  Grand  Scribe,  Chief  Grand  Re- 
corder and  Chief  Grand  Treasurer.  They  shall  be 
the  incorporators  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle. The  incorporation  shall  be  held  in  their 
name.  All  donations,  devises  or  gifts  for  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  or  for  the  benefit  of 
any  subordinate  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
pr  Tents  shall  be  made  to  them.     The^  shall  invest 


96 


in  such  stocks,  loans  or  securities,  the  funds  of  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  as  the  Grand  Ses- 
sion may  direct.  They  shall  call  in,  sell  and  realize 
on  such  loans,  stocks  and  investments,  under  the 
orders  of  the  Grand  Session ;  collect  interest,  div- 
idends, rents  and  all  money  arising  or  accruing 
from  any  investments  belonging  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle ;  pay  all  money  that  they 
collect  to  the  C.  G.  S.,  or,  if  for  the  benefit  of  a 
subordinate  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or  Tent, 
they  shall  pay  to  the  C.  S.,  C.  K.,  P.  P.  or  Q.  M. 
The  C.  G.  M.  shall  be  Chairman  of  the  Board. 
The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall  furnish  the 
Board  with  such  books  and  stationery  as  they  may 
need.  They  shall  make  an  annual  report  to  the 
Grand  Session  of  all  their  business,  and,  at  the  ex- 
piration of  their  term  of  office,  shall  deliver  to  their 
successors  all  books,  securities,  deposits,  stocks, 
papers,  deeds  and  moneys  belonging  to  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  or  to  Temples,  Tab- 
ernacles, Palatiums  and  Tents. 

ARTICLE  X. 

TRUSTEES. 

Section  1. — The  Vice-Grand  Mentor,  Grand 
Queen  Mother,  Chief  Grand  Orator,  Chief  Grand 
Priestess  and  Grand  Drill-Master  shall  be  the  Trus- 
tees of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  2. — The  Trustees  shall  audit  the  accounts 
of  the  Board  of  Grand  Curators,  also  the  accounts 
of  the  Chief  Grand  Scribe  and  Chief  Grand  Treas- 
urer, at  each  Grand  Session,  and  give  a  full  report 
to  the  Grand  Session, 


97 


Sec.  3. — All  officers  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  who  are  required  to  give  bond  for  the 
faithful  discharge  of  their  duties,  shall  deliver  the 
same  to  the  Trustees  and  their  successors.  All 
bonds  must  be  drawn  up  in  legal  form,  and  when 
approved  by  the  Trustees  of  the  Gi  and  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  they  shall  be  of  binding  force  during 
the  Temple  and  Tabernacle  year.  All  bonds  must 
be  renewed  immediately  after  the  closing  of  the 
Grand  Session. 

ARTICLE  XI. 

BONDS. 

Section  1. — The  Chief  Grand  Scribe  and  Chief 
Grand  Treasurer  shall,  before  entering  upon  the 
duties  of  their  offices,  give  a  bond,  with  ample  se- 
curity, to  the  Board  of  Trustees,  for  the  faithful 
application  of  all  moneys  belonging  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  in  accordance  with  the 
laws  or  orders  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle. 

Sec.  2. — The  amount  of  the  bond  shall  be  fixed 
by  the  Grand  Session,  with  such  securities  as  may 
be  approved  by  tlie  Board  of  Trustees.  The  bond 
shall  be  secured  by  two  or  more  persons,  who  own 
unincumbered  real  estate  of  double  the  value  of  the 
amount  of  the  bond  given. 

Sec.  3. — The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
have  power  to  increase  or  diminish  the  bond  at 
every  Grand  Session. 

(4 — Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


9S 
ARTICLE  XII. 

WIDOWS    AND    ORPHANS. 

Section  1. — A  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
shall  create  and  sustain  a  fund  for  the  benefit  of 
Sir  Knights'  widows  and  orphans,  and  the  orphans 
of  Daughters  of  the  Tabernacle. 

Sec.  2. — The  Grand  Session  shall,  within  three 
years  after  the  organization  of  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle,  form  and  set  to  work  this  depart- 
ment, and  place  it  under  the  control  and  manage- 
ment of  the  Board  of  Grand  Curators. 

Sec.  3. — The  assessment,  against  the  Knights  and 
Daughters  shall  be  liberal  and  sufficient  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  the  good  name  of  the  Order.  The 
assessments  shall  be  collected  from  each  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  quarterly.  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles are  hereby  made  responsible  for  the  non- 
payment of  assessments  of  their  members. 

Sec.  4. — Payment  to  widows  and  orphans  shall 
be  made  quarterly,  in  accordance  with  the  regula- 
tions made  by  the  Grand  Session.  These  regula- 
tions must  be  carefully  drawn  for  the  government  of 
this  fund  so  as  to  insure  the  regular  payment  of  the 
quarterly  allowances  for  the  widows  and  orphans, 
and  for  the  collection  of  the  assessments. 

Sec.  5. — When  a  widow  or  orphan  removes  from 
the  jurisdiction  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle, the  Board  of  Grand  Curators  can,  for  this 
reason,  refuse  to  pay  the  allowance,  but  if  thev  have 
good  reasons  for  paying  it,  and  consider  it  for  the 
best  interests  of  the  Order,  they  may  continue  the 
payment. 


99 


Sec.  6. — When  a  widow  marries,  her  allowance 
ceases.  When  an  orphan  arrives  at  the  age  of  fif- 
teen years,  the  allowance  is  discontinued. 

Sec.  7. — The  above  is  submitted  to  the  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  only  as  a  form  to  draw  a 
widows'  and  orphans'  plan  upon;  provided,  they 
prefer  this  to  the  Taborian  Endowment. 

Sec.  8. — All  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
must  have  some  kind  of  a  benefit — either  a  Widows' 
and  Orphans'  Fund,  or  a  Taborian  Endowment. 

ARTICLE  XIII. 

GRAND  TEMPLES  AND  TABERNACLES. 

Section  1. — The  Grand  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles are  hereby  invested  with  full  authority  to 
make  their  own  Constitutions,  By-Laws  and  Rules 
for  their  own  Government,  but  they  are  not  to  con- 
flict with  the  International  Constitution  or  General 
Laws. 

Sec.  2. — Full  power  is  given  to  the  Grand  Tem- 
ples and  Tabernacles  to  conduct  their  business. 
The  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
cannot  interfere  with  I  heir  business  in  any  form,  so 
long  as  they  do  not  trespass  upon  or  conflict  with 
the  International  Constitution  or  General  Laws. 

ARTICLE  XIV. 

membership    of    the     GRAND     TEMPLES    AND    TABER- 
NACLES. 

The  membership  of  Grand  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles shall  be  as  follows  : 

1. — Chief  Mentors  and  Past  Chief  Mentors. 


100 


2. — Chief  Preceptresses  and  Past  Chief  Pre- 
ceptresses. 

3. — Presiding  Princes  and  Past  Presiding  Princes. 
4. — Vice-Princessei^  and  Past  Vice-Princesses. 
5. — Queen  Mothers  and  Past  Queen  Mothers. 
6. — Grand  Deputies  and  Past  Grand  Deputies. 

ARTICLE  XV. 

MEMBERSHIP    VOTE. 

Section  1. — The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
Constitution  must  arransfe  and  blate  the  number  of 
votes  each  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  and  Tent 
shall  have,  and  what  shall  be  a  Past  Officer's  vote. 

Sec.  2. — A  majority  of  all  votes  cast  shall  be 
Decessary  to  elect  a  Grand  Officer. 

ARTICLE  XVI. 

POWER,  STRENGTH  AND    PERPETUITY. 

Just  as  long  as  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
holds  together,  it  will  prosper  and  be  a  blessing  to 
its  members.  It  is  so  jointed  and  arranged  that  no 
part  can  be  taken  out  without  weakening  the  whole 
fabric.  It  is  just  like  a  wheel.  The  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  is  the  hub,  the 
Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  are  the  spokes, 
and  the  Constitution  and  General  Laws  are  the 
tires  that  bind  the  Order  into  one  compact  body, 
and  make  the  membership  a  unit.  The  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve,  of  Knights  and  Daugh- 
ters of  Tabor,  is  not  a  monarchy,  but  it  is  a  Republic, 
and  as  it  is  governed  by  its  members,  it  has  a 
Central  and  State  Government.  The  Temples,  Tab- 
ernacles, Palatiums  and  Tents  form  the  State  Gov- 


101 


ernments,  and  the  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 
form  the  Central  Government. 

ARTICLE  XYII. 

AMENDMENTS. 

This  part  of  the  General  Laws  can  be  amended 
or  altered  in  the  following  manner:  First,  the 
amendment  or  alteration  must  be  read  in  the  Trien- 
nial Session.  If  three-fourths  of  the  members 
present  vote  for  it,  it  is  recommended;  it  is  then 
published  in  the  Triennial  Proceedings.  Second, 
it  is  read  in  each  Grand  Session  of  the  Grand  Tem- 
ples and  Tabernacles,  and  if  all  of  the  members  of 
the  Grand  Session  vote  for  it,  it  is  then  published 
in  the  Proceedings,  and  the  Temples,  Tabernacles 
and  Palatiums  are  ordered  to  vote  on  the  amend- 
ments or  alterations.  If  three-fourths  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Temples,  Tabernacles  and  Palatiums 
vote  for  it,  and  it  is  so  reported  at  the  Grand  Ses- 
sions, then  if  all  of  the  Grand  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles adopt  said  amendments  or  alterations,  and  it 
is  so  reported  to  the  International  Grand  Session, 
and,  if  adopted  by  an  unanimous  vote  of  the  same, 
the  amendments  or  the  alterations  become  a  law. 

PENALTY. 

There  is  no  effective  law  without  a  penalty.  In 
a  trial  of  members  and  conviction,  when  the  law 
does  not  name  the  penalty,  it  shall  be  the  duty  of 
the  C.  M.,  if  it  is  a  Temple,  or  the  C.  P.,  if  it  is  a 
Tabernacle,  to  name  the  penalty  and  declare  the 
sentence. 


102 


For  disobeying  the  laws  of  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle,  when  the  law  does  not  name  the 
penalty,  the  C.  G.  M.  shall  name  the  penalty  and 
declare  the  sentence. 

For  disobeying  or  neglecting  to  obey  the  General 
Laws,  when  there  is  no  penalty  named  in  the  law, 
the  International  Chief  Grand  Mentor  shall  name 
the  penalty  and  declare  the  sentence. 

Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents,  dis- 
obeying and  failing  to  obey  an  edict  or  the  laws, 
shall  be  notified  by  the  C.  G.  M.  that  if  they  do. 
not  comply  with  the  edict  or  law  within  thirty  days 
after  notice  is  given  by  him,  that  he  will  arrest 
their  charters  and  suspend  their  members,  and  fix 
the  duration  of  their  suspension. 

The  I.  C.  G.  M.  is  authorized  to  name  the  pen- 
alty in  case  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents,  working  under  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  fail  to  obey  an  edict  or  th« 
laws. 


A  KNIGHT'S  FANCY  BADGE, 


103 


INSTALLATION  CEREMONY 


or   THE 


Gn_AND  Temple  ai^d  Tabernacle  Officeijs. 


104 


INSTALLING  CEREMONY 

OF 

GRAND  OFFICKRS. 


:  o  :- 


The  Grand  Officers  may  be  installed  by  any  C. 
G.  O.,  C.  G.  M.,  Past  C.  G.  M.,  I.  C.  G.  M.  or 
Past  I.  C.  G.  M. 

The  Installing  Officer  shall  be  addressed  as 
Sir  Grand.  The  Presenter  or  Introducer  is  ad- 
dressed as  Grand  Marshal. 

When  ready  to  install,  the  Grand  Marshal  shall 
form  all  the  officers  elected  and  appointed  around 
the  altar.  The  Jewels  are  laid  on  the  altar.  The 
officers  to  be  installed  are  so  placed  that  the  Knight 
and  Daughter  to  be  installed  together  will  be  side 
by  side. 

When  the  Grand  Marshal  has  everything  in 
readiness,  he  shall  salute  the  Installing  Officer  and 
say : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  to  present  to 
you  these  officers.  They  have  been  duly  elected 
and  appointed  to  serve  in  the  several  offices  of  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  for  the  ensuing 
term.  They  have  signified  their  willingness  to 
enter  upon  their  official  duties. 

105 


10^ 


Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights  and  Daughters,  you  are 
about  to  be  invested  and  inducted  into  the  several 
offices  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  The 
responsible  positions  to  which  you  hav^e  been  elected 
and  appointed  by  the  members,  shows  the  con- 
fidence they  repose  in  your  integrity^  and  ability  to 
successfully  conduct  the  business  of  the  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor.  It  becomes  my  duty  to 
administer  to  you  an  oath  which  all  former  Grand 
Officers  have  taken  previous  to  being  installed. 
Are  you  willing? 

Answer: — We  are  ready. 

Sir  Grand: — You  will  now  take  the  Manual  in 
your  right  hands,  place  it  upon  your  breasts,  and 
repeat  your  names,  and  say  after  me : 

Oath. 

I ,    do  sacredly   promise  that    I 

will  sustain  the  laws  of  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  of  the  Knights  and 
Daughters  of  Tabor,  and  the  Constitution,  By- 
Laws  and  Rules  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle, I  will  attend  to  the  duties  of  my  office  faith- 
fully, and  with  all  the  ability  I  possess.    Amen ! 

Sir  Grand — (Gives  three  raps,  all  stand):  Sir 
Knights  and  Daughters,  we  are  about  to  commence 
the  business  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve, 
for  another  Taborian  year.  It  is  but  meet  and 
right  that  we  should  implore  the  blessings  of  God 
upon  our  work.  Let  us  bow  our  heads,  and  unite 
in  prayer  with  the  Chief  Grand  Orator.  Sir 
Knights,  uncover. 


107 

Pkayer. 

Almighty  God,  who,  through  Thine  Only  Begot- 
ten Son,  Jesus  Christ,  hast  overcome  death,  and 
opened  unto  us  the  gate  of  everlasting  life,  we 
humbly  beseech  Thee  that,  as  by  Thy  special  grace 
helping  us.  Thou  dost  put  into  our  minds  good  de- 
sires, so  by  Thy  continual  help  we  may  bring  the 
same  to  good  effect.  In  particular,  we  implore 
Thy  grace  and  protection  for  the  ensuing  year. 
Keep  us  temperate  in  our  meats  and  drinks,  and 
diligent  in  our  several  callings.  Grant  us  patience 
under  any  afflictions  Thou  mayest  see  fit  to  lay  upon 
us,  and  let  our  minds  always  be  contented  with  our 
present  condition.  Give  us  grace  to  be  just  and  up- 
right in  all  our  dealings,  quiet  and  peaceable,  full 
of  compassion,  and  ready  to  do  good  to  all  men,  ac- 
cording to  our  abilities  and  opportunities.  Direct 
us  in  all  our  ways,  and  prosper  the  works  of  our 
hands  in  the  business  of  our  several  stations.  De- 
fend us  from  all  dangers  and  adversities,  and  be 
graciously  pleased  to  take  us,  and  all  things  be- 
longing to  us,  under  Thy  fatherly  care  and  protec- 
tion. These  things,  and  whatever  else  Thou  shalt 
see  necessary  and  convenient  to  us,  we  humbly  beg, 
through  the  merits  and  mediation  of  Thy  Son, 
Jesus  Christ,  our  Lord  and  Savior.     Amen ! 

Response. — In  Solo  Deo  8alusl 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights,  cover  (he  gives  one 
rap,  and  all  are  seated. — Music  or  Singing. ) 

Grand  Marshal  then  places  the  C.  G.  M.  and  C. 
G.  P.  elect  in  front  of  the  altar,  and  says: — Sir 
Grand,  I  have  the  honor  to  present  to  you  Sir 


108 


-^ ,  who  has  been   elected  C.   G.   M.,    and 

Daughter ,  who  has  been  elected  C. 

G.  P.  of   the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  for 

and  jurisdiction.     Thej  are  now  ready  to 

be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Mentor. 
Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Sir,  the  evident 
love  you  have  for  our  beloved  Order,  and  your  in- 
timate acquaintance  with  the  duties  of  every  de- 
partment to  work  the  laws,  rules  and  regulations  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  makes  it  unnec- 
essary that  I  should  repeat  them  at  this  time.  The 
high  honor  of  this  office  has  its  weighty  respon- 
sibilities. Your  authority  will  be  respected  by 
every  true  Knight  and  Daughter;  your  commands 
and  orders  will  meet  with  ready  obedience.  Each 
Taboiian  Knight  and  Daughter  will  cheerfully  sus- 
tain you  in  your  care  over  the  interests  of  your 
large  jurisdiction.  You  will  feel  the  necessity  in 
your  daily  life  and  actions  to  exemplify  the  excel- 
lent teachings  of  our  beloved  Order — an  example 
that  all  Sir  Knights  will  gladly  follow.  Be  faith- 
ful to  the  end. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Preceptress. 
Sir  Grand  .-—Right  Faithful  Daughter,  the  Sir 
Knights  and  Daughter  Priestesses  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  have  expressed  their  con- 
fidence in  your  ability  to  attend  to  the  duties  of  C. 
G.  P.,  and  your  fidelity  to  the  Order,  by  electing 
you  to  the  exalted  position  of  Chief  Grand  Precep- 
tress. You  will  find  your  duties  and  instructions  in 
the  Constitution.     Be  faithful  to  the  end. 


109 


Sir  Grand: — Sir  Marshal,  please  invest  theC.  G. 
M.  and  C.  G.  P.  with  their  Jewels  of  office,  and 
seat  them. 

The  Sir  Grand  gives  three  raps  and  all  stand,  ex- 
cept the  C.  G.  M.  and  C.  G.  P. 

Sir  Grand  : — Sir  Knights,  Handle  Swords  !  Draw 
Swords  !  !  Present  Swords  !  !  !  Sir  Knights  and 
Daughter  Priestesses,  let  us  salute  our  C.  G.  M. 
and  C.  G.  P. 

The  Knights  lower  and  raise  their  swords,  and 
the  Daughters  raise  and  lower  their  right  arms,  as 
they  repeat  the  words  after  the  Grand :  We  hail 
our  Chief  Grand  Mentor///  (This  is  repeated 
three  times. )  We  hail  our  Chief  Grand  Pre- 
ceptress// (This  is  repeated  three  times.)  The 
Knights,  at  the  command  of  the  Sir  Grand,  return 
swords.  All  clap  three  times  three.  The  Sir 
Grand  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are  seated. 

Grand  Marshal  then  places  the  V.-G.  M.  and  V.- 
G.  P.  elect  in  front  of  the  altar,  and  says: — Sir 
Grand,   I  have   the  honor   to  present   to  you   Sir 

,  who  has  been  elected  Vice-Grand 

Mentor,    and   Daughter ,    who  has 

been  elected  Vice-Grand  Preceptress.  They  are 
ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Vice-Grand  Mentor. 

Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Sir,  the  important 
station  to  which  the  suffrage  of  your  brother 
Knights  and  Daughters  has  called  you,  demon- 
strates the  confidence  that  they  have  in  your  in- 
tegrity and  ability,  nnd  that  you  will  faithfully  dis- 
charge the  duties  of  the  office.     You  are  the  near- 


110 


est  successor  of  the  Chief  Grand  Mentor.  Should 
any  unforeseen  casualty  happen  to  him,  so  as  to 
prevent  him  from  fulfilling  the  duties  committed  to 
his  care,  which  the  Lord  forbid,  you  are  to  assume 
the  responsibilities  and  functions  of  that  office.  In 
his  presence,  you  are  to  assist  him  with  counsel 
and  advice.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
your  office.     Be  faithful  to  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Vice-Grand  Preceptress. 

Sir  Grand  : — Right  Faithful  Daughter,  you  have 
been  honored  by  the  suffrage  of  the  Knights  and 
Daughter  Priestesses  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  with  the  honorable  office  of  Vice-Grand 
Preceptress.  You  will  find  your  duties  and  instruc- 
tion in  the  Constitution.  Be  faithful.  I  now  in- 
vest you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Sir 
Marshal,  please  seat  the  V.-G.  M.  and  V.-G.  P. 

The  Grand  Marshal  then  places  the  C.  G.  S.  and 
C.  G.  E.  in  front  of  the  altar,  and  says: — Sir 
Grand,   I  take  pleasure  in  introducing  to  you  Sir 

,  who  has  been  elected  Chief  Grand 

Scribe,    and   Daughter ,   who   has 

been  elected  Chief  Grand  Recorder.  They  are  now 
ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Scribe. 
Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Sir,  the  useful  and 
honorable  station  that  the  voice  of  your  brother 
Knights  and  Daughters  has  called  you  to  fill,  shows 
the  confidence  they  repose  in  your  ability  to  dis- 
charge the  duties  of  this  most  important  office. 
The  position  is  one  that  recjuires  prompt  action  and 
punctuality,    and  a  strict  fidelity  to   matters   and 


Ill 


business  appertaining  to  your  several  duties.  I 
have  no  doubt  but  that  you  will  use  due  diligence 
and  correctness  in  the  discharge  of  the  important 
duties  committed  to  your  care,  so  that  benefit  may 
accrue  to  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and 
honor  be  awarded  to  you  by  the  Sir  Knights  and 
Daughters.  I  now  invest  you  witli  the  Jewel  of 
your  office.     Be  faithful  to  your  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Recorder. 

Sir  Grand : — Right  Faithful  Daughter,  you  have 
been  elected  to  the  honorable  office  of  Chief  Grand 
Recorder  by  the  members  of  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle.  You  will  find  your  duties  and  in- 
structions in  the  Constitution.  I  now  invest  you 
with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be  faithful  to  your 
duty.  Sir  Marshal,  you  will  please  seat  the  C.  G. 
S.  and  C.  G.  R. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,    I  now   present  to 

you  Sir ,  who  has  been  elected  Chief 

Grand  Treasurer. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Treasurer. 
Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Sir,  the  members  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  in  their  choice 
of  you  to  the  very  responsible  station  of  Grand 
Treasurer,  have  proved  the  confidence  they  have  in 
your  integrity  and  honor.  The  qualities  that  should 
be  found  in  the  officer  that  fills  this  position  are 
honesty,  accuracy  and  faithfulness.  Be  accurate 
in  keeping  a  fair  account  of  all  receipts  and  dis- 
bursements, and  be  careful  in  preserving  all  the  prop- 
erty and  moneys  that  may  come  into  your  hands, 
with   fidelity;  render   a   just  account   of  all  your 


112 


business  with  the  Order,  when  called  on  by  the 
proper  authority.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel 
of  your  office.  Be  faithful  and  prompt  in  the  dis- 
charge of  the  trust  we  now  confide  into  your  hands. 
Sir  Marshal,  please  seat  the  C.  G.  T. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

introducing  to  you  Daughter  — ,  who 

has  been  elected  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

Instructions  to  the  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Daughter,  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  have  en- 
trusted to  your  care  the  important  office  of  Grand 
Queen  Mother.  You  will  find  your  duties  and  in- 
structions in  the  Constitution.  I  now  invest  you 
with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Take  care  of  the 
children  of  Mount  Tabor.  Sir  Marshal,  you  will 
please  seat  the  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

Grand  Marshall: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure 

of  presenting  to  you  Sir  Rev. ,  who 

has  been  elected  C.  G.  O. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Orator. 

Sir  Grand:  — Right  Faithful  Sir;  Reverend 
Brother  Knight,  your  high  calling  as  a  Christian 
minister  has  prepared  you  for  the  duties  to  which 
you  have  been  elected.  Your  official  duty  is  of  the 
highest  importance  to  the  Sir  Knights  and  Daugh- 
ters, and  so  interesting  that  it  requires  punctual 
attendance  at  all  meetings  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle.  May  you  be  thoroughly  furnished  and 
abundantly  provided  for  the  good  work.  May  you 
be  established  and  perfected  in  your  holy  order  by 
Him  who  presides  and  rules  over  the  destinies  of 


113 


mankind,  and  sits  as  Supreme  Grand  Chief  of  the 
Universe.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office.  Be  thou  faithful  until  your  work  is  finished 
on  earth,  and  the  Most  Faithful  Grand  Chief  of 
the  Heavenly  Temple  will  give  you  a  crown  of  life. 
Sir  Marshal,  please  seat  the  Chief  Grand  Orator. 
Grand  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to  you  Daughter ,  who 

has  been  elected  Chief  Grand  Priestess. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Priestess. 

Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Daughter,  the  hon- 
orable office  to  which  the  Sir  Knights  and  Daughter 
Priestesses  of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
have  elected  you,  is  one  of  highest  dignity.  You 
will  find  your  duties  and  instructions  in  the  Con- 
stitution. I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office.  Be  faithful  to  every  duty.  Sir  Marshal, 
please  seat  the  Chief  Grand  Priestess. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  now  present  to 

you  Sir ,  who  has  been  elected  G. 

D.-M. 

Instructions  to  the  Grand   Drill-Master. 

Sir  Grand: — Right  Faithful  Sir,  having  been 
elected  to  the  important  station  of  Grand  Drill- 
Master,  you  will  find  pleasure  in  the  discharge  of 
your  several  duties.  I  admonish  you  to  be  zealous 
and  active  in  your  teachings  and  instructions  to  the 
Sir  Knights,  and  take  command  of  the  Sir  Knights 
when  on  duty.  I  would  remind  you  of  the  necessity 
of  diligence  in  the  duties  that  devolve  upon  you.  I 
BOW  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be 
thou   a   faithful   soldier,  and   promptly   discharge 


114 


every  command  given  to  you.  You  will  find  your 
duties  and  instructions  in  the  Constitution.  Sir 
Marshal,  please  seat  the  Grand  Drill-Master. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  take  pleasure  in 

presenting  to  you  Daughter ,  who 

has  been  elected  G.  I.  St. 

Instructions  to  the  Grand  Inner  Sentinel. 

Sir  Grand : — Right  Faithful  Daughter,  you  have 
the  high  honor  of  being  elected  by  the  members  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  to  the  important 
station  of  Grand  Inner  Sentinel.  You  will  find 
you  duties  and  instructions  in  the  Constitution.  I 
now  invenst  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  ofiice  and 
Staff  of  Defense.  Guard  the  inner  door  faithfully. 
Sir  Marshal,  please  seat  the  G.  I.  St. 

Grand  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  present  to  you  Sir 
,  who  has  been  appointed  G.  C.  B. 

Instructions  to  the  Grand  Color  Bearer. 

Sir  Grand: — Faithful  Sir,  your  appointment  to 
the  very  important  position  of  Grand  Color  Bearer 
shows  the  confidence  that  is  placed  in  your  courage 
and  ability.  You  will  find  your  duties  in  the  Con- 
stitution. I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office,  and  give  into  your  care  the  Standard  of  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  Sir  Marshal,  please 
seat  the  Grand  Color  Bearer. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  now  present  to 

you  Sir ,  who  has  been  appointed 

C.  G.  St. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Sentinel. 

Sir  Grand : — Right  Faithful  Sir,  the  responsibil- 
ity of  the  station  to  which  you  have  been  appointed 


115 


— ^that  of  Chief  Grand  Sentinel — cannot  be  over- 
estimated. Holding  the  outpost,  and  guarding  the 
entrance  of  our  sacred  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle, I  admonish  you  to  be  vigilant  and  sleepless. 
Look  well  to  every  avenue  of  approach.  May  you 
have  courage  to  keep  every  enemy  at  bay.  Be  kind 
and  courteous  to  all  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters 
who  hail  the  outer  portals.  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be  thou  faithful  as  a 
watchman  upon  the  outer  lines,  and  give  timely 
warning  of  any  approaching  danger.  Sir  Mar- 
shal, please  seat  the  C.  G.  St. 

Grand  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  now  present  to 
you  Sir  Knights  (gives  all  their  names),  who  have 
been  appointed  C.  G.  G.s 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Guards. 

Sir  Grand : — Eight  Faithful  Sirs,  you  having  been 
appointed  to  the  station  of  Chief  Grand  Guards,  I 
congratulate  you  upon  the  trust  that  is  reposed  in 
your  worthiness  to  attend  to  the  important  duties 
pertaining  to  your  office.  You  will,  therefore,  be 
punctual  in  the  observance  of  the  several  official 
duties  of  the  station,  by  which  you  will  merit  the 
approval  of  your  brother  members,  and  the  honor- 
able commendation  of  all  Sir  Knights  and  Daugh- 
ters. I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewels  of  your 
office.  Be  faithful  to  every  duty.  Sir  Marshal, 
please  seat  the  Chief  Grand  Guards. 

Grand  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 
presenting  to  you  Daughters  (gives  all  their 
names),  who  have  been  appointed  C,  G.  Te.s 


116 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Tribunes. 

Sir  Grand : — Eight  Faithful  Daughters,  the  po- 
sition that  you  have  been  appointed  to  requires  the 
closest  attention  to  your  duties.  The  Constitution 
will  give  you  full  information.  1  now  congratulate 
you,  and  invest  you  with  the  Jewels  of  your  office. 
Be  faithful  to  your  trust.  Sir  Marshal,  please  seat 
the  Chief  Grand  Tribunes, 

Grand  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  now  present  to 
you  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters  (gives  all  their 
names),  who  have  been  appointed  C.  G.  J.s 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Grand  Judges. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights  and  Daughters,  the 
office  that  you  have  the  honor  of  being  appointed 
to  is  one  of  great  importance,  and  requires  a  close 
study  of  the  laws  that  govern  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle.  You  will  find  your  duties  in  the 
Constitution.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewels  of 
your  office.  Be  faithful  to  your  official  duties. 
Sir  Marshal,  please  seat  the  Chief  Grand  Judges. 

Music  or  Singing. 

Sir  Grand  gives  three  raps,  and  all  stand,  except 
the  officers  that  have  just  been  installed. 

Grand  Marshal  says: — Sir  Knights,  Daughter 
Priestesses,  Princes  and  Princesses,  Maids  and 
Pages  of  Honor,  Hear  I  Listen! !  and  Receive  the 
Proclamation  !  !  1 

Proclamation. 

Sir  Grand  says : — By  virtue  of  the  authority  in 
me  vested  as  Installing  Grand  Officer,  I  now  and 
here  proclaim  that  the  Grand  Officers  of  the  Grand 


117 

Temple  and  Tabernacle,  for  the  State  of and 

its  jurisdiction,  have  been  regularly  installed  into 
their  various  official  positions  for  the  ensuing  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  year. 

All  the  members  that  are  standing,  shall  repeat 
after  the  Sir  Grand:  We  declare  I  We  declare  1 1 
We  declare! ! !  and  give  claps  three  times  four. 
The  Sir  Grand  then  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are 
seated. 

Music  or  singing. 

Charge  to  Grand  Officers. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Knights  and  Daughters,  you  have 
been  duly  elected  and  installed,  with  the  necessary 
ceremonies,  into  the  several  stations  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle.  The  duties  of  your  various 
positions  you  will  find  fully  laid  down  in  the  Con- 
stitution of  the  Order.  While  your  work  seems 
separate  and  divided,  it  is  really  not  so.  In  the  erec- 
tion of  our  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  a  variety 
of  material  is  used.  Workmen  of  separate  callings 
have  their  part  to  perform  to  make  the  building 
complete.  Just  so  we  are  building  a  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  for  the  good  and  interests  of  human- 
ity. The  erection  requires  sundry  talents  and  vari- 
ous workmen,  each  in  their  several  departments. 
Collectively  and  individually  you  are  to  contribute 
your  part  in  the  grand  undertaking,  so  that,  by  a 
union  of  action  and  a  determination  to  do  your 
whole  duty,  our  Order  will  continue  to  move  for- 
ward to  power  and  usefulness.  The  past  history  of 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  is  a  gallant  one. 
Its  record  is  clear  and  bright.     That  you  will  earn- 


118 

estly  strive  to  keep  it  so,  I  have  no  doubt.  I  ask 
you  to  put  your  trust  in  the  Lord  of  Hosts.  He  is 
a  tower  of  strength.  By  the  faithful  discharge  of 
your  several  duties,  you  will  receive  the  hearty 
approval  of  the  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters.  May 
God,  the  giver  of  every  good  and  perfect  gift, 
guide  and  direct  you  in  your  labor  of  love.  Take 
the  shield  of  faith  and  the  sword  of  the  spirit,  and 
the  breast-plate  of  righteousness,  which  is  the  com- 
mand of  God.  May  peace  and  harmony,  and  faith 
in  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  be  with  you  all  forever. 
Amen! 

Kesponse; — In  Solo  Deo  8alusl 

Music  or  singing.  If  there  is  any  one  who  wishes 
to  deliver  an  oration,  now  is  time  for  speaking. 

C.  G.  M.  gives  three  raps,  and  all  stand;  he  then 
says : — By  virtue  of  the  authority  in  me  vested,  I 
now  declare  the  Grand  Session  of  the  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle  from  work  to  rest.  **Home, 
Sweet  Homel" 


No.  1. 


No.  2. 


No.  4. 


No.  5. 


No.  3.  Palatium  Tin. 

KNIGHTS  OP  TABOR  PINS  AND  EMBLEMS. 


119 


TEMPLE  HOUSE. 


120 


OFFICERS 

OF 

Subordinate  Temples 

OF 

KNIGHTS  OF  TABOK. 

:o: 

Section  1. — The  Constitution  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  must  be  strictly  complied 
with  by  all  subordinate  Temples. 

Sec.  2. — The  officers  of  the  Temple  shall  be  as 
follows  : 

1.  Chief  Mentor, CM. 

2.  Vice-Mentor, V.-M. 

3.  Chief  Scribe, C.  S. 

4.  Assistant  Scribe, A.  S. 

5.  Chief  Treasurer, C.  T. 

6.  Chief  Orator, CO. 

7.  Chief  Drill-Master, C  D.-M. 

8.  Chief  Color  Bearer, C  C  B. 

9.  Chief  Guard, C  G. 

10.  Chief  Guard, C  G. 

11.  Chief  Guard, C.  G. 

12.  Chief  Sentinel, C  St. 

121 


TEMPLE  OFFICERS'  JEWELS-SILVER. 


122 


^i^^^M^tWSI^^H^WWUtW^'' 


TABOBIAN  ALTAR. 


123 


'^«■3 


INSTALLATION-  CEREMONY 

OF 

TEMPLE  OFFICERS 


■:o:- 


The  installation  of  the  officers  of  a  Temple  can 
be  performed  either  in  public  or  private.  Any  C. 
M.  or  P.  C.  M.,  C.  G.  M.  or  P.  C.  G.  M.  shaU 
have  authority  to  install  the  officers. 

PUBLIC  INSTALLATION. 

The  Knights  assemble  in  their  hall.  The  Tem- 
ple is  opened  in  the  Fourth  Degree.  The  neces- 
sary preparations  are  made,  and  instructions  given. 
After  which  the  C.  D.-M.  forms  the  procession  in 
marching  order,  the  Knights  being  in  full  dress  and 
regalia.  If  a  Grand  Officer  or  a  Past  Grand  Of- 
ficer is  present,  proper  respect  must  be  paid  to  him 
or  them. 

The  March 

Shall  be  in  the  usual  form,  to  the  place  where  the 
ceremony  is  to  be  performed. 

The  procession  is  marched  three  times  around  the 
hall,  the  ranks  are  opened,  and  the  officers  are  es- 
corted through  to  the  platform. 

124 


125 


The  temple-house  and  altar  are  placed  in  front  of 
the  Chief  Mentor,  in  the  center  of  the  platform, 
the  officers  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  C.  M. 

The  Sir  Knights,  if  there  is  room  for  them,  are 
in  the  immediate  rear  of  the  officers.  If  there  is 
not  sufficient  room  on  the  platform,  they  are  placed 
in  the  immediate  front  of  the  stage. 

Ladies'  Tabernacle. 

If  the  Daughters  join  in  the  procession  in  the 
hall,  they  march  in  the  rear  of  the  Sir  Knights. 
The  Tribunes'  place  is  in  the  rear  of  the  Daughters. 

The  officers  of  the  Tabernacle  are  seated  on  the 
platform  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  Temple  Of- 
ficers. If  there  is  room,  the  other  Daughters  are 
seated  immediately  in  the  rear;  if  not,  they  are 
seated  in  the  rear  of  the  Sir  Knights  in  front  of  the 
stage.     All  are  seated. 

The   Ceremony. 

Music;  or,  if  there  is  no  band,  the  following 
hymn  is  sung: 

OUR   KING. 

I. 

The  Lord  Jehovah  reigns; 

His  throne  is  built  on  high; 
The  garments  he  assumes 

Are  light  and  majesty. 
His  glories  shine  with  beams  so  bright, 
No  mortal  eye  can  bear  the  sight. 

II. 
The  thunders  of  His  hand 

Keep  the  wide  world  in  awe; 
His  wrath  and  justice  stand 

To  guard  His  holy  law; 
And  where  His  love  resolves  to  bless, 
Hi3  truth  confirms  and  seals  the  grace. 


126 


The  Chief  Mentor  calls  up  the  Knights  and 
Daughters,  and  the  Sir  Chief  announces  the  bus- 
iness that  is  to  be  transacted,  and  states  that  the 
duties  that  devolve  upon  the  officers  about  to  be  in- 
stalled are  so  important,  that  it  is  of  the  greatest 
concern  that  the  guidance  and  blessing  of  our  King, 
the  Mighty  Jehovah,  remain  with  them.  Our  Chief 
Orator  will  now  address  the  Almighty  Father,  our 
Sovereign  Commander,  in  prayer. 

Prayer. 

O  Lord,  Thy  mercy,  our  sure  hope, 

The  highest  orb  of  heaven  transcends; 
Thy  sacred  truth's  unmeasured  scope 
Beyond  the  spreading  sky  extends. 

Thy  justice,  like  the  hills,  remains; 

Unfathom'd  depths  Thy  judgments  are; 
Thy  providence  the  world  sustains; 

The  whole  creation  is  Thy  care. 

Direct  us,  O  Lord,  in  all  our  doings,  with  Thy 
most  gracious  favor,  and  further  us  with  Thy  con- 
tinual help,  that  in  all  our  works  begun,  continued, 
and  ended  in  Thee,  we  may  glorify  Thy  Holy  Name, 
and  finally  by  Thy  mercy  obtain  everlasting  life, 
through  Jesus  Christ,  our  Lord,  who  hath  taught  us 
to  pray  unto  Thee,  O  Almighty  Father,  in  His  pre- 
vailing name  and  words.     Amen  I  Amen  !  I 

All  are  seated.  Music;  or  the  following  hymn  is 
sung. 

THE    THREE    MOUNTAINS. 

I. 

When  on  Sinai's  top  I  see 
God  descend  in  majesty, 
To  proclaim  His  holy  law, 
All  vay  spirits  sink  with  awe» 


127 

When  in  ecstacy  sublime 
Tabor's  glorious  mount  I  climb, 
In  the  too  transporting  light, 
Darkness  rushes  o'er  my  sight. 

II. 
When  on  Calvary  I  rest, 
God  in  flesh  made  manifest 
.   Shines  in  my  Redeemer's  face, 
Full  of  beauty,  truth  and  grace; 
Here  I  would  forever  stay, 
Weep  and  gaze  my  soul  away. 
Thou  art  heaven  on  earth  to  rae, 
Lovely,  mournful  Calvary. 

The  Chief  Drill-Master,  under  the  instructions  of 
the  Sir  Chief,  forms  all  the  Sir  Knights  that  are 
to  be  installed  in  line  in  front  of  the  stage,  and 
says : — Faithful  Sir,  I  have  the  honor  to  present 

to  you  the  officers  elect  of Temple,  No.  — . 

They  are  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

The  Sir  Chief  will  draw  his  sword,  and  order 
the  officer  elect  to  draw  and  lay  the  sword  across 
their  breast,  with  the  point  resting  on  the  side  of 
the  left  shoulder,  the  left  hand  on  the  right  breast, 
and  repeat  the  following 

Oath  of  Office. 

I, ,   do   most   solemnly   and  sincerely 

promise,  upon  the  word  of  a  Taborian  Knight,  that 
I  will,  to  the  best  of  my  ability,  faithfully  discharge 
and  fulfill  the  duties  of  the  office  to  which  I  have 
been  elected.  I  will  support  and  maintain  the  Con- 
stitution, By-Laws,  Eules  and  Kegulations  of  this 
Temple,  and  the  Constitution  and  By-Laws,  and 
Regulations  and  Edicts  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  and  the  Constitution  and  General  Laws 
of  the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 


128 


Instructions. 
The  Sir  Chief  then  says : — Sir  Knights,  you  hav- 
ing been  elected  to  the  important  and  responsible 
duties  of  the  several  offices  in  this  Temple,  we  with 
pleasure  enter  upon  the  duty  of  installing  you,  be- 
lieving that  you  will  attend  to  the  interests  of  the 
Temple,  and  Conduct  the  business  of  your  stations 
with  fidelity.  You  will  study  to  improve  the  use- 
fulness of  our  Order,  realizing  the  importance  of 
the  trust  that  is  committed  to  your  care  by  your 
confiding  brethren.  A  firm  reliance  on  the  teach- 
ings, as  you  find  them  laid  down  in  our  laws,  and 
the  practice  of  those  virtues  that  are  inculcated  in 
our  rites,  and  an  implicit  confidence  in  the  Lord  of 
Lords,  will  so  d"rect  you  in  the  relation  in  wiiich 
you  are  about  to  be  inducted,  that  you  will  reflect 
honor  upon  your  Temple  and  credit  to  yourselves. 

The  Charter. 

The  charter  is  presented,  and  read  by  the  C.  O., 
and  its  powers  explained  by  ftie  Sir  Chief.  The  Sir 
Knights  are  seated,  and  the  C.  D.-M.  introduces  the 
C  M.  elect  to  be  installed. 

The  C.  D.-M.  says  .-—Faithful  Sir,  I  take  pleasure 

in  presenting  to  you  Sir  Knight , 

who  has  been  elected  to  the  office  of  Chief  Mentor 
of Temple,  No.  — .  He  is  prepared  for  in- 
stallation. (His  sword,  cap  and  jewel  are  laid  on 
the  altar. ) 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Mentor. 

The  Sir  Chief  says :— Sir  Knight , 

before  you  are  inducted  into  this  important  office, 
you  will  please  answer  the  following  questions  rela- 


129 


tive  to  the  ofBce.  If  ^  ou  object  to  any  question,  or 
cannot  comply  with  the  request,  frankly  state  your 
objection,  and  it  will  relieve  you  from  the  respon- 
sibilities of  the  office,  and  another  must  be  found  to 
fill  the  station : 

THE    TEST. 

Ques. — Do  you  solemnly  promise,  upon  your  ob- 
ligation as  a  Knight  of  Tabor,  that  you  will  not 
open  the  Temple  for  business  unless  the  charter 
and  a  constitutional  quorum,  not  less  than  seven 
members,  is  present? 

Ans. — T  do. 

Ques. — Will  you  execute  the  Laws,  Rules  and 
Regulations  of  the  Temple  with  fidelity? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  support  and  obey  the  Constitu- 
tion, By-Laws,  Rules  and  Regulations,  and  Edicts 
of  the  Grand  Teinple  and  Tabernacle,  under  whose 
authority  you  hold  your  office? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  endeavor  to  correct  the  irreg- 
ularities, purify  the  morals,  inculcate  charity,  teach 
benevolence  and  true  friendship,  and  promote 
happiness  and  harmony  in  your  Temple? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  preserve  the  Ritualistic  work 
unalterable, — the  solemn  ceremonies  and  instruc- 
tions,— and  continue  them,  as  Chief  Mentors  have 
done  before  you  ? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  promise  that  you  will  not  admit 
into  you  Temple  a  man  who  has  not  been  knighted 
(5— Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


130 


in  {I  n'izuliir  Temple,  nor  one  who  has  been  ex- 
pelled or  su.<pended? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Do  you  acknowledge  that  it  is  impossible 
to  have  intercourse  with  a  Temple  that  does  not 
work  under  a  charter  from  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve? 

Ans. — I  do. 

Ques. — Do  you  believe  that  every  Sir  Knight 
has  a  right  to  his  religious  opinion,  and  that  you 
will  promise  not  to  permit  any  denominational  dis- 
cussions in  the  Temple  ? 

Ans. — I  do. 

Ques. — Will  you  support  the  Constitution,  Rules, 
Regulations  and  Ritualistic  work  of  the  Ladies' 
Tabernacle? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  be  careful  upon  whom  you  con- 
fer the  degrees,  so  that  our  Order  may  be  com- 
posed of  good  and  true  men  only  ? 

Ans. — I  will. 

Ques. — Will  you  bind  your  successor  in  office  to 
observe  the  same  test  that  you  have  taken  ? 

Ans. — I  will.     So  help  me  God  I 

The  Sir  Chief  then  proceeds  as  follows: — You 
will  now  permit  me  to  cover  your  head  with  this 
helmet,  and  present  to  you  this  sword.  Its  hilt  ia 
your  hand  reminds  you  that  it  is  only  to  be  dr.iwa 
in  defense  of  liberty,  equality  a  id  innocence.  The 
Jewel  of  your  office  I  now  invest  you  with.  It  is 
composed  <>f  three  perfect  numbers.  It  is  an  appro- 
priate emblem  of  our  Order.  It  will  continually 
remind  you  of  the  great  principles  upon  which  our 


131 


Order  is  perpetuated.  I  commit  to  your  care  the 
charter  of  this  Temple.  You  will  carefully  guard 
it  as  a  sacred  power  and  authority  that  makes  your 
Temple  legal.  You  will  also  transmit  it  to  your 
successor  in  office.  I  present  to  you  the  Constitu- 
tion, the  great  instructor  of  the  Knights.  Open 
this  book  in  faith,  and  follow  its  teachings  with- 
out faltering  or  wavering,  and  you  will  exert  an  in- 
fluence that  will  be  an  honor  to  yourself  and  a 
blessing  to  the  Knighthood.  The  Constitution  of 
the  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  is 
hereby  presented  to  you,  with  the  Constitution, 
Kules  and  Regulations  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle.  I  admonish  you  to  consult  them  dili- 
gently, and  cause  them  to  be  read  in  your  Temple 
frequently,  so  that  all  Sir  Knights  may  be  informed 
of  their  duty.  I  now  seat  you  in  the  official  chair. 
May  the  Lord,  our  King,  protect  and  keep  you  in 
the  strict  performance  of  your  official  dut}^ 

THE  SALUTE  AND   WELCOME. 

The  Sir  Chief  then  says: — Sir  Knights,  I  pre- 
sent to  you  your  Chief. 

(The  Knights  rise,  and  present  swords;  salute, 
and  return  swords. ) 

Let  us  welcome  our  Chief. 

(The  Knights  and  Daughters  give  the  honors, 
and  repeat  the  words  **  We  welcome, ^^  three  times, 
and  give  the  clap  seven  times,  with  the  words  '^Be 
faithful'') 

The  C.  D.-M.  presents  the  other  officers  in  reg- 
ular order,  by  saying: — Faithful  Sir,  I  present  Sir 
Knight ,  who  has  been  elected  to  the 


132 


office  of  Vice-Mentor,  and  is  now  ready  to  be  in- 
stalled. 

Instructions  to  the  Vice-Mentor. 

Sir   Chief: — Sir   Knight   ,  you 

have  been  elected  to  the  office  of  Vice-Mentor  of 

Temple,  No.  — ,  and  now  invest  you  with  the 

Jewel  of  your  office.  Your  duty  is  to  fulfill  the 
duties  of  the  Chief  Mentor,  when  that  officer  is  ab- 
sent; and  in  his  presence,  you  are  to  counsel  and 
aid  him  in  the  government  of  the  Temple.  You 
will  now  be  seated,  and  may  you  faithfully  perform 
your  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Scribe. 

Sir   Chief; — Sir   Knight   ,  you 

have  been  honored  by  the  suffrage  of  your  breth- 
ren to  the  very  responsible  office  of  Chief  Scribe. 
I  take  pleasure  in  presenting  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
your  office.  It  is  your  duty  to  keep  the  books  of 
the  Temple,  as  also  the  records  and  the  roll  of 
members.  You  shall  keep  a  regular  account  with 
each  member,  and  collect  all  dues,  fines  and  other 
moneys  belonging  to  the  Temple,  and  pay  them 
into  the  treasury.  You  shall  record  the  doings  of 
each  meeting  plainly  and  neatly,  and  report  to  the 
Temple,  when  called  on,  the  condition  of  the  treas- 
ury. You  shall  draw  all  orders  for  money  on  the 
treasury,  and  see  that  they  are  signed  by  the  C. 
M.  and  countersigned  by  yourself.  It  will  be  your 
duty  to  make  an  annual  report  to  the  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle,  with  a  list  of  all  the  members. 
You  are  also  required  to  make  a  monthly  report  to 


laa 


the  Grand  Chief  of  the  condition  of  your  Temple. 
You  will  now  be  seated.     Be  thou  faithful  to  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Assistant  Scribe. 

Sir  Chief : — Sir  Knight  — ,  you  have 

been  elected  Assistant  Scribe,  and  I  now  invest  you 
with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  It  is  your  duty  to 
assist  the  Chief  Scribe  in  the  several  duties  of  his 
office,  and  in  the  absence  of  that  officer  you  are  to 
perform  his  duties.  You  will  be  seated.  May  you 
honorably  fulfill  the  duties  of  your  station. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Treasurer. 

Sir  Chief :— Sir  Knight ,  by  the 

will  of  your  brethren,  you  have  been  called  to  the 
station  of  Treasurer  of  this  Temple,  and  I  now  in- 
vest you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  It  is  your 
duty  to  receive  all  the  moneys  and  valuables  be- 
longing to  the  Temple,  and  pay  all  warrants  when 
properly  drawn.  You  shall  keep  a  correct  account 
of  all  moneys  received  and  paid  out.  You  shall  re- 
port, when  called  upon  by  the  C.  M.,  the  condition 
of  the  treasury.  You  shall  give  a  bond,  to  secure 
the  money  of  the  Temple,  to  the  C.  M.,  C.  O.  and 
C.  S.,  for  the  faithful  application  of  the  Temple's 
money,  per  Constitution — the  amount  of  the  bond 
to  be  agreed  upon  at  a  regular  meeting  of  the  Tem- 
ple. You  shall  give  to  your  successor  a  written 
statement  of  the  condition  of  the  treasury.  You 
shall,  when  your  successor  is  qualified,  turn  over  to 
him  all  books,  cash,  papers  and  other  property  that 
is  in  your  possession.  You  will  now  be  seated. 
Let  integrity,  probity  and  faithfulness  guide  you. 


134 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Orator. 

Sir  Chief : — Sir  Knight ,  you  have 

been  elected  to  the  high  position  of  Chief  Orator 
of  this  Temple,  and  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewel  of  your  office.  It  is  your  duty  to  conduct 
the  devotional  exercises  of  the  Temple,  to  visit  the 
sick  or  disabled  Knights  and  Daughters,  and  to  at- 
tend to  the  funeral  ceremonies.  ,  That  you  may  be 
thoroughly  qualified  for  the  work,  I  present  you 
this  Holy  Volume.  Open  and  read  it;  it  will  give 
you  counsel  and  instruction.  You  will  now  be 
seated.     Be  faithful. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Drill-Master. 

Sir  Chief : — Sir  Knight ,  it  is  with 

pleasure  that  I  find  that  the  brethren  have  honored 
you  by  electing  you  to  the  station  of  Chief  Drill- 
Master.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office  and  your  Implement  (sword)  of  duty.  It  is 
your  business  to  instruct  the  members  in  the  march 
and  drill,  and  the  Taborian  sword  exercise.  Your 
station  is  at  the  inner  door,  which  I  admonish  you 
to  guard  well  during  the  time  of  business.  You 
will  now  be  seated.     Look  well  to  your  duty. 

Instuctions  to  the  Chief  Color  Bearer. 

Sir  Chief: — Sir  Knight ,  I  am 

glad  to  know  that  the  suffrage  of  your  brethren 
has  placed  you  in  the  honorable  position  of  Chief 
Color  Bearer  of  this  Temple.  I  now  invest  you 
with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  I  also  present  you 
the  Standard.  It  is  the  Banner  of  our  Order.  You 
will  carefully  keep  it,  and  defend  it  in  the  time  of 
danger.     It  is  your  duty  to  carry  it  on  all  public 


135 

occasions,  and  in  all  processions.  You  will  now  be 
seated.     Guard  well  the  Banner. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Guards. 
Sir  Chief:  —  Sir  Knights,  you  have  been  elected 
to  the  office  of  Chfef  Guards,  and  the  responsibility 
of  the  position  requires  your  constant  attendance  at 
the  meetings.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewels  of 
your  office.  It  is  your  duty  to  assist  the  Chief 
Mentor  in  giving  the  several  degrees,  and  to  pre- 
serve order  during  the  session  of  the  Temple.  You 
will  now  be  seated.     Be  faithful  to  every  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Sentinel. 

Sir   Chief: — Sir   Knight ,  you 

have  been  elected  to  attend  to  the  responsible  duties 
of  Chief  Sentinel,  and  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewel  of  office.  I  also  present  to  you  this  sword, 
and  admonish  you  to  use  it  in  defending  the  post 
of  duty.  It  is  your  duty  to  guard  the  outside  door 
of  the  Temple,  under  orders  of  the  C.  M.  You 
shall  prepare  and  keep  the  Temple  in  proper  order 
for  the  meetings.  You  shall  receive  such  compen- 
sation for  your  services  as  may  be  awarded  by  the 
Temple.  You  will  now  be  seated.  Look  well  to 
your  post. 

Instructions  to  the  Board  of  Attendants. 

Sir  Chief: — Sir  Knights,  you  have  been  ap- 
pointed a  Board  of  Attendants.  It  shall  be  the 
duty  of  the  Board  to  have  the  oversight  of  all  the 
members  of  the  Temple,  and  report  to  the  C.  M. 
when  a  member  is  sick  or  disabled,  and  what  at- 
tendance the   member  needs.     Your    Board   shall 


136 


draw  and  pay  the  sick  dues ;  you  shall  notify,  by 
order  of  the  CM.,  members  who  are  detailed  to  sit 
up  with  sick  or  disabled  members.  Your  Board 
shall  arrange  and  prepare  the  funeral  of  a  deceased 
Knjorht.  Your  Board  shall  have  the  oversight  of 
Sir  Knights'  widows  and  orphans,  and  report  their 
condition  to  the  Temple  at  every  regular  meeting. 
Your  Board  shall  keep  a  book  and  record  its  doings, 
and  it  shall  be  your  duty  to  report  to  the  Temple 
at  the  regular  monthly  meeting,  what  you  have 
done  during  the  month.  You  will  now  be  seated. 
Be  true  to  duty. 

Instructions  to  the  Board  of  Judges. 

Sir  Chief:  —  Sir  Knights,  you  have  been  ap- 
pointed a  Board  of  Judges.  This  Is  truly  an  im- 
portant position,  and  one  of  great  responsibility, 
and  requires  that  you  should  be  well  acquainted 
with  the  laws  of  our  Order.  This  Board  shall  con- 
sist of  five  members,  who  shall  be  appointed  by  the 
C.  M.  on  the  night  he  is  installed.  To  this  Board 
shall  be  referred  all  matters  of  difference  between 
members,  and  all  trials  of  members  for  any  offense 
whatsoever.  This  Board  shall  hold  regular  meet- 
ings, and  shall  have  the  power  to  summons  wit- 
nesses for  the  plaintiff  and  defendant,  and  carefully 
hear  all  sides,  make  up  their  decision,  and  report  to 
the  Temple  through  their  Secretary.  The  Temple 
shall  enforce  their  recommendation,  and  their  action 
shall  be  final  when  approved  by  the  Temple.  You 
will  now  be  seated.  Let  justice  be  your  rule  and 
guide. 


137 


The  Sir  Chief  then  makes  the  following  pro- 
clamation (all  the  Knights  and  Daughters  standing, 
except  the  installed  officers)  : 

Proclamation. 

By  virtue  of  the  power  and  authority  in  me  vested, 

I  proclaim  that  the  officers  of Temple,  No. — , 

have  been  regularly  installed,  and  are  now  ready 
for  duty  for  the  ensuing  term  of  office.  (The  seven 
claps  are  given,  with  the  words  ^''Be  faithfuL^^ 
All  are  seated. ) 

Music ;  or  the  following  him  is  sung  : 

GOLDEN   HILL. 

I. 

Blest  be  the  tie  that  binds 

Our  hearts  in  Christian  love; 
The  fellowship  of  kindred  minds 

Is  like  to  that  above. 

II. 

Before  our  Father's  Throne 

We  pour  our  ardent  prayers; 
Our  fears,  our  hopes,  our  aims  are  one, — 

Our  comforts  and  our  cares. 


We  share  our  mutual  woes, 
Our  mutual  burdens  bear; 

And  often  for  each  other  flows 
The  sympathizing  tear. 

IV. 

When  we  assunder  part. 

It  gives  us  inward  pain; 
But  we  shall  still  be  joined  in  heart, 

And  hope  to  meet  again. 


138 

V. 

This  glorious  hope  revives 

Our  courage  by  the  way; 
While  each  in  expectation  lives, 

And  longs  to  see  the  day. 

VI. 

From  sorrow,  toil  and  pain, 

And  sin,  we  shall  be  free; 
And  perfect  love  and  friendship  reign 

Through  all  eternity. 

If  there  is  an  oration  to  be  delivered,  this  is  the 
proper  time.  After  which  the  Knights  and  Daugh- 
ters may  partake  of  refreshments,  and  then  the 
Knights  assemble,  and  march  and  drill.  They  then 
march  to  their  hall,  close  the  Temple,  and  disperse. 


BURIAL  SERVICE 


OF   THE 


KNIGHTS  OF  TABOR, 


139 


BURIAL  SERVICE 

OF    THE 

KNIGHTS  ofTABOR 


:  o: 


FORM    OF    rROCESSION. 

Chief  Sentinel. 
Musicians. 
Sir  Knights. 
M  Chief  Color  Bearer. 

-g  Two  Chief  Guards, 

g      Yice-Mentor  and  Chief  Orator. 
;=;  Chief  Treasurer. 

p  Past  Chief  Mentors. 

'g  Chief  Guard. 

g  Chief  Mentor. 

Grand  and  Past  Grand  Officers. 
Officiating  Clergy. 


03 
PL, 


Mourners. 

Tabernacles. 
140 


141 


GENERAL   INSTRUCTIONS. 


1. — A  Sir  Knight,  to  be  buried  with  the  full 
honors,  must  be  a  Uniform  Rank  Knight,  with  the 
T.  D.  P.,  and  in  good  standing  in  his  Temple. 

2. — When  notice  of  the  death  of  a  Sir  Knight  is 
received,  the  Chief  Mentor  shall  summons  the  Tem- 
ple to  convene,  to  prepare  for  the  funeral. 

3. — The  Sir  Knights  must  attend  in  full  uniform, 
with  their  sword-hilts  and  banner  dressed  in  mourn- 
ing, and  Jewels  of  the  officers  in  appropriate  dress. 

4. — On  the  casket  of  the  deceased  Sir  Knight 
will  be  placed  his  sword  and  helmet;  if  an  officer, 
his  Jewel,  clothed  in  black  crape. 

5. — The  day  on  which  the  body  is  to  be  buried, 
the  Knights  will  assemble  in  their  Temple  and 
march  to  the  residence  of  the  deceased,  in  the  reg- 
ular order,  with  swords  reversed.  The  sword  and 
helmet  of  the  deceased  Knight  is  borne  in  the  rear 
of  the  Chief  Mentor.  On  arriving  at  the  house, 
the  lines  open  to  the  right  and  left.  The  bearer 
passes  to  the  casket,  and  places  the  sword  and  hel- 
met on  it.  The  pall-bearers  (Sir  Knights)  take  the 
casket,  and,  led  by  the  Chief  Drill-Master,  pass 
down  through  the  lines  to  the  hearse. 

6. — The  procession  is  then  formed,  and  marched 
to  the  church  or  place  of  public  worship.  The 
Knights  will  then  enter  in  reversed  order,  preced- 
ing the  body,  and  the  mourners  following  the  body. 

7. — The  Chief  Mentor  presides  during  the  serv- 
ices, assisted  by  the  Chief  Orator.  If  Grand  Of- 
ficers or  Past  Grand  Officers  are  present,  they  must 
be  placed  in  the  procession  according  to  their  rank. 


142 


8. — If  the  deceased  be  a  Grand  or  a  Past  Grand 
Officer,  the  Chief  Mentor  having  jurisdiction  will 
invite  the  Grand  Officers  who  are  present  to  con- 
duct the  burial  services. 

9. — The  pall-bearers  should  be.  Sir  Knights,  se- 
lected by  the  Chief  Mentor.  If  the  deceased  was 
a  member  of  other  secret  orders,  a  portion  of  the 
pall-bearers  can  be  taken  from  them,  per  agree- 
ment, they  bearing  a  part  of  the  funeral  expenses. 

10. — While  the  body  is  lying  in  state,  there 
should  be  two  or  more  Sir  Knights  on  duty  near 
the  body,  in  full  dress. 

11. — The  Temple  of  which  the  deceased  was  a 
member  must  march  nearest  the  body.  If  a  so- 
journer, then  the  Temple  having  charge  of  the 
burial  shall  march  nearest.  Where  more  than  one 
Temple  joins  the  procession,  the  youngest  takes 
the  lead. 

12. — When  other  civil  and  military  societies 
unite  with  the  Knights  in  the  burial,  they  shall 
march  in  front  of  the  Knights. 

13. — When  the  head  of  the  procession  shall 
arrive  at  the  place  of  interment,  the  lines  should  be 
opened,  and  the  Chief  Mentor,  or  the  highest  officer 
in  rank,  preceded  by  the  Chief  Drill-Master,  pass 
through,  followed  by  the  others  in  order,  into  the 
cemetery.  On  arriving  at  the  grave  or  vault  they 
open  ranks,  and  the  casket  is  carried  through  to  the 
tomb  or  grave.  The  coffin  is  placed  over  the  grave. 
The  Knights  form  a  circle  around  it,  with  the 
family  at  the  foot,  and  the  Chief  Mentor,  Chief 
Orator,  and  clergy  at  the  head. 


143 


14. — At  the  church  or  place  of  worship,  after 
the  church  services  over  the  body,  the  Temple's 
services  should  begin,  the  Knights  standing  during 
the  service  of  prayer. 

15. — The  procession  will  return  to  the  Temple  in 
the  same  order  that  it  marched  to  the  grave.  A 
Temple  of  Knights  in  procession  is  positively  under 
the  rules  of  an  open  Temple;  therefore,  no  Sir 
Knight  can  enter  or  leave  the  ranks  without  per- 
mission from  the  Chief  Mentor,  conveyed  through 
the  Chief  Drill-Master. 

16. — Should  the  Tabernacle  join  the  procession, 
their  carriages  or  vehicles  will  follow  immediately 
in  the  rear  of  the  family.  The  Daughters  shall 
wear  the  same  dress  that  they  do  at  a  Daughter's 
burial.  In  the  church,  their  seats  are  to  the  left  of 
the  Knights.  At  the  grave,  they  form  around  the 
Knights,  or  at  the  foot  of  the  grave. 

17. — When  the  place  of  worship  or  church  is  not 
convenient  for  a  part  of  the  services  before  going 
to  the  grave,  it  may  be  performed  at  a  more  con- 
venient place,  or  at  the  grave. 

18. — The  face  of  the  deceased  should  be  un- 
covered, if  possible,  during  the  first  part  of  the 
ceremony,  the  Chief  Mentor  at  the  head  of  the 
casket  and  the  Chief  Orator  at  the  foot.  The  Sir 
Knights  must  observe  and  attend  to  every  command 
given  by  the  Chief  Drill-Master  or  the  Chief 
Mentor. 

The   Funeral  Service  of  Sir  Knights  at  the 
Church. 

After  the  religious  services  are  concluded,  the 
Sir  Knio;hts  will  commence  theirs.   Present  swords ! 


144 


FIRST   PART. 


Chief  Mentor: — Sir  Knights,  we  are  daily  re- 
minded of  the  great  lessons  of  time  and  eternity. 
We  are  mortal.  Mortality  is  written  upon  all  living 
beings  on  earth.  Man's  days  are  short  and  fleet- 
ing. One  by  one  we  pass  the  gates  of  death.  We 
are  reminded  to-day  that  we  are  born  to  die.  The 
great  and  unfailing  truth  that  ded^h  is  sure,  is  de- 
monstrated to  our  view  at  this  sad  and  mournful 
hour.  The  door  of  our  Temple  opened  to  receive  a 
messenger,  and  there  was  none  to  say:  ''By  what 
right  do  you  enter  here?"  A  Brother  Knight  has 
been  summoned  to  appear  before  the  Grand  Chief 
of  the  Universe.  His  light  has  been  extinguished 
in  the  earthly  Temple.  He  lies  mute  before  us. 
No  more  will  he  meet  us  around  the  center  square. 
His  voice,  so  ready  in  giving  knightly  greeting,  is 
silent.  His  hand  cannot  grasp  his  sword  in  defense 
of  innocence,  justice  and  country.  All  that  re- 
mains of  our  beloved  Brother  Knight  is  his  cold, 
cold  body,  stilled  in  death.  (  The  Sir  Knights  rer 
turn  swords.)  Sir  Knights,  let  us  attend,  while 
the  Chief  Orator  reads  to  us  from  the  lessons  of  the 
Holy  Scriptures.  May  the  impressions  fill  us  with 
meekness  and  consolation,  that  we  may  be  prepared 
when  the  last  of  earth  comes  to  us. 

Chief  Orator: — O  Lord,  remember  the  faithful 
among  the  people,  for  the  children  of  men  fail  on 
earth. 

Response: — Remember  us,  O  Lord  I 

CO. : — There  is  not  a  just  man  on  the  earth  who 
doeth  good  and  sinneth  not. 


145 


Res.  : — Give  ear,  O  Lord  ! 

C.  O. : — Whatsoever  God  doeth,  it  shall  be  for- 
ever; nothing  can  be  put  to  it,  nor  anything  taken 
from  it. 

Res. : — Redeem  us,  O  Lord! 

C.  O. : — Great  are  Thy  tender  mercies,  O  Lord; 
quicken  us  according  to  Thy  judgments. 

Res. : — Redeem  us,  O  Lord ! 

C.  O. : — We  will  lift  our  eyes  unto  the  hills,  from 
whence  cometh  our  help.  Our  help  cometh  from 
the  Lord,  who  made  heaven  and  earth.  He  that 
keepeth  us  will  not  slumber. 

Res. : — The  Lord  is  my  keeper! 

C.  O. : — Give  thanks  unto  the  Lord,  for  He  is 
good ;  because  His  mercy  endureth  forever. 

Res. : — Give  thanks  unto  the  Lord  ! 

C.  O. : — Lord,  make  us  to  know  our  end,  and  the 
measure  of  our  days,  that  we  may  know  how  frail 
we  are.     There  is  but  a  step  between  us  and  death. 

Res. : — Teach  us,  O  Lord  ! 

C.  O. : — God  hath  made  of  one  blood  all  nations 
of  men,  to  dwell  on  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  hath 
determined  the  times  before  appointed,  and  the 
bounds  of  their  habitation. 

Res. : — Be  nigh  unto  us,  O  Lord  I 

C.  O.  : — The  righteous  hath  hope  in  his  death. 
Let  me  die  the  death  of  the  righteous.  Let  my  last 
end  be  like  his. 

Res. : — Be  merciful  unto  us,  O  Lord! 

CO. : — I  know  that  my  Redeemer  liveth,  and  that 
He  shall  stand  at  the  latter  day  upon  the  earth.. 

Res.  : — May  we  rest  in  hope ! 


146 


CO. : — Christ  died  for  us,  whether  we  wake  or 
sleep. 

Res.: — Lord,  save  us! 

CM. : — Will  the  memory  of  our  brother  be  for- 
gotten among  his  brothers? 

Res. : — We  will  never  forget  his  manly  form  and 
virtues. 

C  M. : — ShsAl  his  name  be  recorded  in  our  Tem- 
ple? 

Res. : — It  is  recorded  here  (hand  on  heart).  May 
he  have  a  clear  record  in  the  heavenly  Temple. 

C  M.  : — He  was  a  true  and  trusted  Knight,  and 
has  passed  from  life's  turmoils  and  struggles.  May 
his  soul  rest  in  peace  I 

Res. : — May  he  rest  in  peace  and  be  happy !  (  The 
Sir  Knights  cover.) 

C  M. : — Sir  Knights,  we  are  assembled  to  look 
upon  the  last  of  our  Brother  Knight.  No  more 
will  our  voices  cheer  him  in  this  world  of  sorrow. 
No  more  will  he  meet  us  in  our  pleasant  retreat — 
the  Temple  of  our  love  on  earth.  Our  swords 
cannot  now  shield  him  from  danger.  The  Chief 
Sentinel's  challenge  will  greet  his  ear  no  more. 
He  has  hailed  the  entrance  for  the  last  time  in  our 
Temple.  To  the  Silent  City  of  the  Dead  we  all  must 
come  at  last.  The  manliest  form,  the  bravest  heart, 
that  surrounds  this  spot  will  be  laid  captive  to 
death,  and  bound  in  the  chain  of  mortality.  But  he 
who  has  been  faithful  to  the  teachings  of  the  Chief 
Mentor  of  Salvation — the  Son  of  Righteousness — 
can,  by  the  will  of  the  Sovereign  Ruler  of  the 
Universe,  claim  a  place  in  the  Eternal  Temple  of 
Bliss,  then  mortality  will  only  be  laid  aside  to  put 


147 


on  the  glittering  robe  of  eternal  day,  and  dwell 
with  the  royal,  happy  company  in  the  Temple  of 
Eternal  Light.  Surely  the  sadness  and  solemnity 
of  this  occasion  are  most  forcibly  felt  by  all  present. 
He  who  now  sleeps  in  death  was  oar  brother  Knight. 
With  him  we  have  met  often  around  the  hollow 
square;  with  him  we  have  formed  the  sacred  chain 
together;  we  have  met  life's  trials  and  pleasures. 
He  is  now  gone  beyond  our  protecting  care.  Him 
whom  we  loved  and  honored,  our  presence  here  in 
the  dress  of  our  Order  proves  that  we  revere  his 
memory.  We  are  here  to  demonstrate  our  respect 
for  his  many  good  qualities;  over  his  errors  and 
faults,  whatever  they  may  have  been,  we  cast  the 
mantle  of  forgetfulness.  Sir  Knights,  each  suc- 
cessive death-call  breaks  the  chain  that  binds  us  to 
this  lower  world ;  make  us  pause  and  reflect  what 
will  be  our  future.  If  we  would  meet  the  Grand 
Chief  of  Heaven  and  earth  in  peace  and  happiness, 
we  must  have  a  clear  passport  from  His  hand.  Then, 
when  the  earthen  vessel  breaks,  our  souls  will  soar 
away  to  blissful  rest. 

Response  by  the  Knights: — In  Solo  Deo  Salusf 

This  closes  the  ceremony  in  the  church.  After 
taking  a  last  look  at  the  face  of  the  deceased,  the 
benediction  is  pronounced. 

The  Drill-Master  forms  the  Knights;  they  then 
march  out  of  the  church  to  the  place  of  interment 
in  the  same  order  as  before. 

On  arriving  at  the  place,  and  having  formed 
around  the  grave  (the  casket  resting  over  the 
grave),  the  following  hymn  is  sung: 


148 

^' My  flesh  also  shall  rest  in  hope.''^   . 
I. 

Rest  for  the  toiling  hand, 

Rest  for  the  anxious  brow, 
Rest  for  the  weary,  way-worn  feet, 

Rest  from  all  labor  now. 

II. 

Rest  for  the  fevered  brain, 

Rest  for  the  throbbing  eye; 
Through  these  parched  lips  of  thine  no  more 

Shall  pass  the  moan  or  sigh. 

III. 

Soon  shall  the  trump  of  God 

Give  out  the  welcome  sound, 
That  shakes  thy  silent  chamber-walls. 

And  breaks  the  turf-sealed  ground. 

IV. 

Ye  dwellers  in  the  dust, 

Awake!  come  forth  and  sing; 
Sharp  has  your  frost  of  winter  been, 

But  bright  shall  be  your  spring. 

V. 

'Twas  sown  in  weakness  here ; 

'Twill  then  be  raised  in  power; 
That  which  was  sown  an  earthly  seed, 

Shall  rise  a  heavenly  flower! 

The  foUowiag  prayer  will  then  be  made  by  the  C. 
C,  or  an  extemporaneous  prayer,  if  preferred  by 
him ;  or  a  clergyman  may  be  invited  to  pray. 

Prayer. 

Holy  Lord  God  I  Thou  that  presidest  over  the  des- 
tinies of  man,  in  this  hour  of  sorrow  we  humbly 
lift  our  hearts  to  Thee.  Thou  hast  mercifully  pro- 
claimed in  Thy  Holy  Word  that  Thou  wouldst  com- 


■   149 

fort  the  mourner,  and  give  consolation  to  the 
troubled  heart.  We  worship  and  adore  Thee, 
Maker  of  Heaven  and  Earth,  for  all  things  that 
Thou  hast  given  to  us.  Cleanse  Thou  the  thoughts 
of  our  hearts  with  the  inspiration  of  Thy  Holy 
Spirit,  that  we  may  perfectly  love  Thee,  and  worth- 
ily magnify  Thy  adorable  name.  Be  Thou  a  father 
to  the  fatherless,  and  a  husband  to  the  widow,  and 
as  God  administer  consolation  to  those  who  are  sor- 
rowing this  day.  We  have  the  evidence  before  us 
how  frail  men  are,  and  how  uncertain  our  contin- 
uance on  earth  is  held.  We  are  reminded  that  our 
lives  are  but  vapor.  Oh,  let  the  light  of  Thy  di- 
vine countenance  shine  upon  us,  and  lead  us  by  Thy 
grace  and  spirit  to  turn  our  thoughts  to  things  that 
make  our  everlasting  peace  and  happiness.  'May  the 
burning  lamp  of  Thy  pure  love  light  our  pathway 
through  the  dark  valley  and  shadow  of  death,  that 
we,  by  the  commendation  of  Thy  Beloved  Son,  our 
Lord  and  Savior,  may  be  enabled  to  gain  admit- 
tance to  the  Heavenly  Temple  above,  and,  in  the 
glorious  presence  of  our  Lord  and  Master,  enjoy  a 
blissful  immortality  with  the  angelic  host  and  the 
redeemed  of  earth  forever,  through  Jesus  Christ, 
our  Lord.    Amen ! 

Response: — In  God  alone  is  safety! 

The  C.  D.-M.  removes  the  sword  and  cap  from 
the  casket.  The  Knights  present  swords.  It  is 
then  lowered  into  the  grave. 

The  CO.  then  says : — I  am  the  resurrection  and 
the  life.  He  that  believeth  in  Me,  though  he  were 
dead,  yet  shall  he  live.  Whosoever  liveth  and  be- 
lieveth in  Me,  shall  never  die.     To  the  earth  we 


150 


commit  the  mortal  remains  of  our  deceased  Brother. 
May  his  soul  rest  in  peace.  Earth  to  earth.  (  Cast 
earth  on  the  casket.  )  Dust  to  dust.  (  Cast  again.) 
Ashes  to  ashes.  (  Cast  again,)  Until  the  morn  of 
the  resurrection,  when,  like  our  risen  Lord  and 
Savior,  may  he  break  every  chain  and  bond  of 
death,  and  ascend  to  dwell  forever  in  the  sunshine 
of  heavenly  beams. 

Res. : — So  may  it  be.     Amen !  Amen ! ! 

C.  D.-M. : — Sir  Knights,  return  swords. 

The  V.-M.  then  presents  the  sword  of  the  de- 
ceased to  the  C.  M. 

The  C.  M.  then  says : — Sir  Knights,  you  will  re- 
member that  our  deceased  Brother  Knight  was 
taught  while  in  life  that  this  sword,  in  the  hands  of 
a  true  and  trusty  Knight,  was  an  emblem  of  manly 
worth;  in  his  grasp,  he  was  to  defend  the  innocent, 
protect  the  weak,  have  mercy  on  the  fallen,  and  aid 
the  distressed.  Be  true  as  steel  to  a  Brother  Knight. 
Obey  every  order  given  from  justice,  and  silently 
admonish  an  erring  Brother  Knight.  May  the 
sword  of  Divine  Justice  open  the  way,  and  permit 
him  to  enter  the  blessed  abode  of  saints  and  angels, 
and,  in  their  company  and  companionship,  live  for- 
ever in  the  realms  of  eternal  joy. 

Res. : — Amen  I     So  be  it !  I     Amen !  1 1 

The  C.  T.  then  presents  the  key  to  the  C.  O., 
who  says : 

C.  O. : — This  symbol  of  truth  reminds  us  of  Him 
who  said:  **I  am  the  way.  I  am  the  door.  No 
man  can  come  unto  the  Father  but  through  Me.  I 
have  the  keys  of  death  and  the  kingdom  of  heaven." 
We  place  this  upon  the  breast  of  our  brother,  there 


151 

to  remain  as  an  evidence  that  he  believed  in  the 
Divine  Being  that  has  power  to  save  to  the  utter- 
most. May  this  hope  of  our  brother  in  life  safely 
convey  his  immortal  soul,  and  admit  it  to  the 
heavenly  mansions,  to  rest  forevermore. 

Ees. : — Bless  the  Father !     Honor  the  Son !  ! 

The  C.  O.  casts  the  key  into  the  grave.  The 
Knights  uncover,  and  the  C.  O.  repeats  the  follow- 
ing prayer: — Our  Father  which  art  in  heaven. 
Hallowed  be  Thy  name.  Thy  kingdom  come.  Thy 
will  be  done  on  earth  as  it  is  in  heaven.  Give  us 
this  day  our  daily  bread ;  and  forgive  us  our  tres- 
passes, as  we  forgive  those  who  trespass  against  us. 
And  lead  us  not  into  temptation,  but  deliver  us 
from  evil.  For  Thine  is  the  kingdom,  and  the 
power,  and  the  glory,  forever.     Amen  ! 

Res. : — In  Solo  Deo  8alus! 

The  Knights  cover,  and  give  the  farewell  salute 
three  times.  Then  they  form  the  wall  of  steel,  and 
sing  the  following,  or  some  other  hymn,  or  the 
band  may  play  a  solemn  dirge  : 

Friend  after  friend  departs. 

Who  hatii  not  lost  a  friend? 
There  is  no  union  here  of  hearts 

That  finds  not  here  an  end; 
Were  this  frail  world  our  final  rest, 
Living  or  dying,  none  were  blest. 

II. 

Beyond  the  flight  of  time, 

Beyond  this  vale  of  death, 
There  surely  is  some  blessed  clime 

Where  life  is  not  a  breath, — 
Nor  life's  affections  transient  fire, 
Whose  sparks  fly  upward  to  expire. 


15^ 


III. 


There  is  a  world  above, 

Where  parting  is  unknown, — 
A  whole  eternity  of  love, 

Formed  for  the  good  alone ; 
And  faiih  beholds  the  dying  here. 
Translated  to  that  happier  sphere. 

The  C.  O.  pronounces  the  benediction,  the  lines 
are  formed,  and  they  march  back  to  their  hall ;  and, 
after  the  business  is  finished,  the  Temple  is  closed. 


TABERNACLE   HOUSE. 


153 


I   DAUGHTERS   OF    j 
[♦TABERNACLE-f  I 


TABERNACLE  OFFICERS'  JEWELS. 
1S4 


A, 
Q 


No.  1. 


No.  4— K  Size. 


No.  2. 


No.  3. 


No.  5. 


No.  6. 


DAUGHTERS'  PINS  AND  EMBLEMS. 


155 


INSTALLING  CEREMONY 


OF   THE 


Officers  of  the  Tabernacle 


166 


ORKICERS 

OF  THE 

LADIES'  TABERNACLE. 

:o: 

Section  1.  —  The  Constitution  of  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  must  be  strictly  complied 
with  by  all  subordinate  Tabernacles. 

Sec.  2. — The  officers  of  the  Tabernacle  shall  be 
as  f  olloAVS : 

1.  Chief  Preceptress, C.  P. 

2.  Vice-Preceptress, V.-P. 

3.  Chief  Recorder, C.  R. 

4.  Vice-Recorder, V.-R. 

5.  Chief  Treasurer, C.  T. 

6.  Chief  Priestess, C.  Ps. 

7.  Inner  Sentinel, I.   S. 

8.  Outer  Sentinel, O.  S. 

9.  Chief  Tribune, C.  Te. 

10.  Chief   Tribune, C.  Te. 

11.  Chief   Tribune, C.  Te. 

1.  Board  of  Visitors, B.  V. 

2.  Board  of  Visitors, B.  V. 

3.  Board  of  Visitors, B.  V. 

1.  Board  of  Examiners, B.  E. 

2.  Board  of  Examiners, B.  E. 

3.  Board  of  Examiners, B,  E, 

157 


INSTALLATION  CEREMONY 

OF 

Tabernacle  Officers. 

:o: 

The  officers  of  the  tabernacle  may  be  installed 
either  in  public  or  private.  The  ceremony  can  be 
performed  by  any  C.  P.,  Past  C.  P.,  C.  G.  P.,  Past 
C.  G.  P.,  C.  M.,  Past  C.  M.,  C.  G.  M.,  or  Past 
C.  G.  M. 

PUBLIC  OR  PRIVATE  INSTALLATION. 

The  Daughter  Priestesses  assemble  in  a  room  or 
place  near  the  hall  or  room  where  the  installation 
ceremonies  are  to  be  performed,  dressed  in  full 
regalia,  and  march  in  the  following  order  to  the 
place  of  installation,  under  the  marshalship  of  one 
of  the  Meroes. 

THE    PROCESSION. 

c.  p. 

C.  T.     P.  C.  T. 

V.-P. 

C.  R.     V.-R. 

C.  Ps. 

§        O.  S.     I.  S. 

I  C.  Te.s 

^       B.  V.     B.  V. 

B.  V. 

[house.] 

B.  E.     B.  E. 

B.  E.,  with  Banner. 

P.  C.  P.      P.  C.  P. 

P.  V.-P.      P.  V.-P. 

Members  by  Twos. 

Sir  Knights, 
158 


159 


The  Tabernacle  House  is  borne  by  four  Daugh- 
ters. The  procession  marches  three  times  around 
the  hall.  The  officers  and  past  officers  are  seated 
on  the  platform,  and  the  members  and  Sir  Knights 
in  front  of  the  platform.  The  Tabernacle  House  is 
placed  in  front  of  the  Chief  Preceptress,  in  the  cen- 
ter of  the  platform,  the  officers  to  the  right  and  left 
of  her. 

The  Ceremony. 

Music;  or,  if  there  is  no  band,  the  following 
hymn  is  sung: 

PRAISE    TO    GOD. 

I. 

Praise  to  God,  the  Great  Creator; 

Praise  to  God  from  every  tongue; 
Join  my  soul  with  every  creature, — 

Join  the  universal  song. 
II. 
Joyfully  on  earth  adore  Him, 

Till  in  heaven  our  song  we  raise; 
Then,  enraptured,  fall  before  him, 

Lost  in  wonder,  love  and  praise. 
III. 
Praise  to  God,  the 'Great  Creator, — 

Father,  Son  and  Holy  Ghost; 
Praise  Him,  every  living  creature. 

Earth  and  heaven's  united  host. 

The  Chief  Preceptress  gives  three  sounds,  and  all 
the  Daughters  and  Knights  stand  while  the  follow- 
ing prayer  is  said  by  the  C.  O.,  or  some  one 
appointed  for  that  purpose  : 

Eternal  God!  Eternal  King! 

Ruler  of  heaven  and  earth  beneath! 
From  Thee  our  hopes,  our  comforts  spring; 

In  Thee  we  live,  and  move,  and  breathe. 
Thy  word  brought  forth  the  flaming  sun, 

The  changeful  moon,  the  starry  host; 


160 

In  Thine  appointed  course  they  run, 

Till  in  the  final  ruin  lost. 
We  lift  our  hearts  to  Thee, 

Thou  Day-Star  from  on  high  I 
The  sun  itself  is  but  Thy  shade, 

Yet  cheers  both  earth  and  sky. 
Oh,  let  Thy  rising  beams 

Dispel  the  shades  of  night; 
And  let  the  glories  of  Thy  love 

Come  like  the  morning  light! 

Bless  Thou  the  officers  and  members  of  the  Tab- 
ernacle wherever  they  may  be  located,  and  we  give 
Thee  all  honor  and  praise.     Amen ! 

Res. : — In  God  alone  is  safety ! 

The  C.  P.  gives  one  sound,  and  all  are  seated. 

Music;  or  the  following  ( or  any  other)  hymn  is 


Let  all  the  earth  their  voices  raise, 
To  sing  the  choicest  psalm  of  praise; 

To  sing  and  bless  Jehovah's  name; 
His  glory  let  the  heathen  know. 
His  wonders  to  the  nations  show. 

And  all  His  saving  works  proclaim. 

He  framed  the  globe,  He  built  the  sky, 
He  made  the  shining  worlds  on  high, 

And  reigns  complete  in  glory  there; 
His  beams  are  majesty  and  light; 
His  beantie=5,  how  divinely  bright  I 

His  Tabernacle,  how  divinely  fair! 

The  Meroe  lights  the  candles  and  places  them  on 
the  Tabernacle  House,  and  places  all  the  officeivs' 
jewels  on  a  stand.  The  officers  elect  stand  in  a 
semi-circle. 


161 


She  then  says: — Faithful  (Here  the  title  of  the 
Installing  Officer  is  to  be  given),  I  have  the  pleasure 

of  presenting  to  you  the  officers  elect  of 

Tabernacle,  No. .     They  are  now  ready  for  in- 
stallation. 

Inst.  Off. : — You  will  please  open  your  Manuals, 
and  answer  the  following  questions : 

Inst.  Off. : — Are  you  willing  to  serve  in  the  ca- 
pacity to  which  you  have  been  elected? 

Ans. : — I  am  willing  to  do  the  duties  pertaining 
to  the  office. 

Inst.  Off.: — Will  you  punctually  attend  to  the 
business  of  you  office? 

Ans. : — I  am  resolved  to  attend  to  all  that  is  re- 
quired of  me  under  the  laws  of  our  Order. 

The  Installing  Officer  then  requests  them  to  link 
their  right  and  left  hands  together,  whereupon  they 
repeat  the  following  words  after  the  Installing 
Officer : 

As  we  are  joined  together,  hand  in  hand,  so  we 
will  sustain  and  support  each"  other  in  our  official 
duties.  We  promise  to  be  present  at  every  meeting 
of  the  Tabernacle,  unless  detained  at  home  by  sick- 
ness, or  by  absence  from  the  city. 

The  Inst.  Off.  gives  one  sound,  and  all  stand. 

The  Meroe  then  places  the  Chief  Preceptress 
elect  in  front  of  the  Tabernacle  House,  and  says  : — 
Faithful    (give  title  of  Installing  Officer),  I  have 

the  honor  of  presenting  to  you  Daughter 

,  who  has  been  elected  to  preside  in  this  Tab- 
ernacle. 

6 — Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


162 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Priestess. 

Inst.  Off.  : — Tharbis,  you  will  please  receive  into 
your  hand  the  Constitution  of  the  Order,  and  the 
By-Laws  of  this  Tabernacle. 

Inst.  Off.  to  the  Chief  Preceptress: — These  are 
the  Laws  of  the  Order.  It  is  your  duty  to  have 
them  executed  promptly;  have  them  read  in  your 
Tabernacle  at  stated  times.  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  your  office,  and  I  present  you  the  Staff 
of  Power.  You  will  please  be  seated,  and  listen. 
It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  H.  P.  to  preside  at  all 
meetings  of  the  Tabernacle,  call  special  meetings 
when  the  business  of  the  Tabernacle  requires  it, 
decide  all  questions  of  order  or  of  the  rules,  sign 
all  money  orders,  preserve  order,  enforce  the  laws, 
instruct  the  candidates  in  the  several  degrees,  and 
cause  the  members  to  learn  well  the  Ritual. 
(Gives  one  sound,  and  all  are  seated.) 

Meroe: — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter    

,    who    was    elected   Vice-Priestess    of 


Tabernacle,  No.  — . 


Instructions  to  the  Vice-Priestess. 

Inst.  Off. : — Amisis,  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewel  of  your  office.  You  will  please  be  seated. 
It  is  your  duty  to  be  present  at  all  meetings  of  the 
Tabernacle,  and  assist  the  High  Priestess  in  her 
several  official  duties;  and,  in  the  absence  of  the 
H.  P.,  you  are  to  preside  in  the  meetings  of  the 
Tabernacle,  and  attend  to  the  duties  of  the  office. 

Meroe : — I      now     pi  esent     to     you    Daughter 

,  who  was  elected  Chief  Recorder 

of Tabernacle,  No.  — . 


163 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Recorder. 

Inst.  Off. : — Sesotheni,  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewel  of  your  office.  You  will  please  be 
seated.  It  is  your  duty  to  keep  the  proceedings  of 
each  meeting,  and  the  business,  under  proper 
heads.  You  shall  have  the  minutes,  the  roll,  and 
account  books  in  your  possession.  You  shall  issue 
all  notices,  draw  all  warrants  on  the  Treasurer,  re- 
ceive and  record  all  moneys  received  into  the  Tab- 
ernacle, pay  all  moneys  you  receive  into  the  treas- 
ury, make  an  annual  report  in  full  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  report,  every  three 
months,  the  condition  of  the  Tabernacle  to  the 
members  and  the  Grand  Chief.  You  shall  notify 
the  C.  G.  S.,  within  five  days,  of  the  expulsion  of 
a  member,  and  why  she  was  expelled,  and  fill  out, 
sign  and  seal  all  certificates  by  order  of  the  Taber- 
nacle. 

Meroe: — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter   

,    who    was    elected   Vice-Recorder   of 


Tabernacle,  No.  — . 

Instructions  to  the  Vice-Recorder. 

Inst.  Off.  : — I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
your  office.  You  will  please  be  seated.  It  is  your 
duty  to  assist  the  C.  R.  in  her  several  duties,  and 
attend  to  all  the  business  of  the  office  in  the  ab- 
sence  of  the  C.  R.  It  is  furthermore  your  duty  to 
correspond  with  other  Tabernacles,  and  to  conduct 
the  correspondence  of  the  Tabernacle. 

Meroe : — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter  

,   who  was    elected   Chief  Treasurer  of 


Tabernacle,  No.  — . 


164 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Treasurer. 

Inst.  Off. : — Seraphis,  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewel  of  your  office.  You  will  please  be  seated.  It 
is  your  duty  to  receive  all  funds  coming  into  the 
Tabernacle  from  the  C.  R.,  keep  an  accurate  ac- 
count, an  1  pay  all  warrants.  You  shall  report  the 
condition  of  the  treasury,  every  three  months,  to 
the  Tabernacle,  or  at  the  reguhir  quarterly  meet- 
ing. Your  further  duties  and  instructions  you  will 
find  in  the  Constitution. 

Meroe: — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter 

,    who   was   elected    Chief  Priestess  of 


Tabernacle,  No.  — . 


Instructions  to  the  Chief  Priestess. 

Inst.  Off. : — Hyerego,  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
Jewel  of  your  office,  and  present  to  you  the  Shep- 
herdess' Crook.  You  will  please  be  seated.  It  is 
your  duty  to  be  present  at  every  meeting,  and  open 
it  with  devotional  exercises,  give  counsel  to  the  sick 
or  disabled  members,  and  instruct  candidates  on  the 
sacredness  of  their  obligation.  Your  office  is  one 
of  usefulness  and  benefit.     Be  true  to  duty. 

Meroe: — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter  

and  Daucrhter ,  who  were 


elected  Inner  and  Outer  Sentinels  respectively  of 
Tabernacle,  No. — . 

Instructions  to  the  Inner  and  Outer  Sentinels. 
Inst.  Off. : — Abassine  and  Lybenus,  I  now  invest 
you  with  the  Jewels  of  your  office,  and  present  to 
you  the  Rods  of  your  authority.  You  will  please 
be  seated.  It  shall  be  your  duty  to  guard  the  inner 
and  outer  entrances  of  the  Tabernacle,  and  perform 


165 


such  other  duties  as  are  found  in  the  Ritual.  Your 
punctual  and  early  attendance  is  absolutely  re- 
quired.    Look  well  to  your  duty. 

Meroe: — I  now  present  to  you  Sir  Knight 

,    Sir  Knight ,  and    Sir 

Knight ,  who  have  been  elected  Tri- 
bunes of Tabernacle,  No.  — . 

Instructions  to  the  Chief  Tribunes. 

Inst.  Off. : — Sir  Meroes,  I  now  invest  you  with 
the  Jewels  of  your  office,  and  present  to  you  the 
Javelins  of  authority.  You  will  please  be  seated. 
It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Meroes  to  assist  the  H. 
P.  in  conferring  the  degrees,  arrange  the  hall  for 
meetings,  conduct  all  public  business,  and  attend 
every  meeting.  You  will  be  members  of  the  Tab- 
ernacle only  during  your  term  of  office. 

Meroe  : — I  now  present  to  you  Daughter  

,    and   Daughter   ,    and 

Daughter ,  who  were  appointed  the 

Board  of  Visitors  of Tabernacle,  No.  — . 

Instructions  to  the  Board  of  Visitors. 

Inst.  Off.  : — Hespers,  I  now  invest  you  with  the 
elewels  of  your  office.  You  will  please  be  seated. 
It  shall  be  your  duty  to  visit  the  members  in  regu- 
lar order,  and  report  any  who  are  sick,  disabled,  or 
need  aid  and  attendance.  It  will  also  be  your  duty 
to  attend,  and  report  to  the  H.  P.  the  condition  of, 
the  members.  You  shall  cause  orders  to  be  drawn 
on  the  Treasury  for  all  weekly  benefits,  and  pay 
them  to  the  members.  You  shall  report  your  busi- 
ness to  every  regular  meeting,  in  a  written  report? 
signed  by  all  the  members  of  the  Board. 


166 


Meroe: — I  now   present  to  you  Daughter   

,    and    Daugfhter   ,   and 


Daughter ,  who  were  appointed  a 

Board  of  Examiners  of Tabernacle,  No.  — . 

Instructions  to  the  Board  of  Examiners. 

Inst.  Off. : — Gyrenes,  I  now  present  to  you  the 
Jewels  of  your  office.  You  will  please  be  seated. 
It  shall  be  your  duty  to  examine  any  matter  or  busi- 
ness of  the  Tabernacle  that  is  referred  to  you. 
You  shall  prepare  candidates  for  the  degrees,  and 
shall  conduct  visitors  to  their  proper  seats.  '  You 
shall  make  a  written  report  to  every  regular  meet- 
ing, signed  by  all  the  members  of  the  Board. 

The  Installing  Officer  then  gives  three  sounds, 
and  all  stand,  except  the  installed  officers.  He  then 
says : — By  virtue  of  the  authority  in  me  vested,  I 

declare  the  officers  of Tabernacle,  No.  — , 

installed  and  ready  for  duty  for  the  ensuing  Taberr 
nacle  year. 

Response  by  the  members: — We  declare/  We 
declare// 

Meroe: — I  now  proclaim  the  officers  of 

Tabernacle,  No.  — ,  duly  installed  in  regular  form. 

The  Sir  Knights  and  Daughters  give  five  claps, 
and  say :   '*  We  declare/''     This  is  given  three  times. 
The  last  time  they  say :   ''We  declare  the  officers  of 
Tabernacle,  No.  — ,  regularly  installed.'' 

Inst.  Off.   gives  one  sound,  and  all  nro  seated. 

Music  or  singing;  after  wliicli  an  oration  may  be 
delivered,  then  they  march  three  times  around  the 
hall,  and  the  Tabernacle  closes  in  the  usual  form, 
or,  if  in  a  public  hall,  the  H.  P.  declares  the  Taber- 
nacle at  rest. 


TABERNACLE  FURNITURE. 
(For  Balance  of  Tabernacle  Furniture,  see  page  358.) 

167 


TEMPLE  FURNITUKE. 


(For  Balance  of  Temple  Furniture,  see 
pages  359  and  360.) 


BURIAL  SERVICE 


OF   THE 


DAUGHTERS 


OF   THE 


TABKRNACIvB 


1G9 


FUNERAL  CEREMONIES 

OF   THE 

Daughters  of  the  Tabernacle, 


:o:- 


The  ceremonies  which  are  observed  at  Tabernacle 
funerals,  and  for  the  interment  of  the  dead,  are  very 
impressive  and  appropriate.  They  are  performed 
as  an  imperative,  yet  a  sorrowful  duty,  and  as  a 
token  of  affection  and  respect  to  the  memory  of  a 
departed  Daughter. 

Directions. 

1. — No  Daughter  of  the  Tabernacle  can  be  buried 
with  the  formalities  of  the  Tabernacle,  unless  she  is 
a  Daughter  Priestess  in  good  standing ;  nor  without 
the  consent  of  her  family. 

2. — The  Chief  Priestess,  having  received  notice 
of  the  death  of  a  Daughter  (the  deceased  being  a 
Daughter  Priestess  in  good  standing),  it  shall  be 
her  duty  to  issue  orders  to  the  Tabernacle  to  make 
preparations  to  attend  the  funeral,  and  extend  an 
invitation  to  the  Temples  and  other  Tabernacles. 
(Should  the  family  of  the  deceased  desire  to  arrange 
for  the  funeral,  their  wishes  must  be  complied  with, 
and  it  relieves  the  Tabernacle  from  all  funeral  ex- 
penses.) 

170 


171 


3. — The  whole  arrangement  for  the  burial  of  a 
Daughter  by  the  Tabernacle  must  be  made  by  the 
High  Priestess  and  the  Meroes.  The  ceremonies  are 
conducted  by  the  C.  O.  or  C.  M.  of  the  nearest 
Temple,  or  any  Grand  Officer. 

4. — Whenever  other  societies  unite  with  the  Tab- 
ernacle in  the  burial  of  a  Daughter,  the  body  of  the 
deceased  must  be  in  charge  of  the  Tabernacle  hav- 
ing jurisdiction.  Other  societies  are  permitted  to 
perform  their  ceremonies,  but  the  services  of  the 
Tabernacle  must  not  be  omitted. 

5. — If  a  sojourner,  in  good  standing,  dies  within 
the  jurisdiction  of  a  Tabernacle,  it  shall  be  the  duty 
of  the  Tabernacle  to  inter  her  with  all  the  formali- 
ties of  the  Order,  or  attend  to  sending  the  body  to 
its  home.  Where  there  are  two  or  more  Tabernacles, 
the  oldest  Tabernacle  has  precedence,  unless  other- 
wise arranged.  The  Tabernacle  of  which  the  de- 
ceased sojourner  was  a  member  shall  pay  all  fune- 
ral expenses  incurred  to  the  Tabernacle  which 
attended  to  this  duty. 

6. — The  pall-bearers  shall  be  Sir  Knights  of  Tabor, 
selected  by  the  High  Priestess. 

7. — No  Tabernacle  can  unite  with  other  societies 
in  the  burial  of  a  person  not  a  Daughter  or  a  Knight 
of  Tabor,  without  a  dispensation  from  the  Chief 
Grand  Mentor,  or  the  consent  of  the  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle  having  jurisdiction. 

8. — The  members  of  the  Tabernacle  shall  attend 
the  funeral  of  a  deceased  Dauojhter  either  on  foot 


172 


or  in  vehicles.  The  H.  Ps.  and  P.  H.  Ps.  carry 
their  Staffs  trimmed  with  crape.  The  I.  S.  and  O. 
S.  carry  their  Eods  trimmed  with  crape. 

9. — A  Sir  Knight  attending  the  funeral  of  a 
Daughter  shall  wear  a  black  suit,  brown  gloves,  and 
the  regulation  undress.  The  Meroes  shall  carry 
their  spears.  The  C.  M.s  and  P.  C.  M.s  carry  their 
swords  trimmed  with  black.  Should  a  C.  G.  M.  or 
P.  C.  G.  M.  attend,  the  C.  G.s  march  in  their  rear 
with  swords  reversed,  the  C.  C.  B.,  with  two  assist- 
ants, in  front  of  them. 

10. — When  two  or  more  Tabernacles  are  in  pro- 
cession, the  Tabernacle  of  which  the  deceased  was 
a  member  shall  march  nearest  to  the  corpse.  If  the 
deceased  member  was  a  member  of  other  secret 
societies,  such  society  or  societies  shall  bear  a  part 
of  the  funeral  expenses. 

The  Service. 

11. — The  Tabernacle  shall  assemble  at  their  hall, 
or  some  pUice  that  is  proper  near  the  residence  of 
the  deceased.  The  H.  Ps.  shall  declare  the  Taber- 
nacle opened,  and  announce  the  business  that  has 
called  them  together.  The  C.  K.  reads  the  name 
and  age  of  the  deceased  member,  how  long  she  has 
been  a  member,  the  day  and  date  of  her  death,  and 
gives  the  date  when  she  was  interred.  It  shall  be 
enrolled  in  the  record-book. 

Order  of  March. 

12. — After  the  procession  is  formed,  they  march 
to  the  residence  of  the  deceased  member,  receive 


173 


the  corpse,  and  proceed  in  the  following  order  to 
the  church  or  place  appointed  for  the  services ; 

Two  Meroes,  with  spears. 
High  Priestess. 
Past  High  Priestesses,  by  twos. 
^  Inner  and  Outer  Sentinels. 

'^  Chief  and  Assistant  Recorder. 

g  Vice-Priestess. 

Chief  Treasurer  and  Hyerego. 
Members,  two  by  two. 
Other  Tabernacles,  in  the  same  order. 
Chief  Orator  and  Clergy. 

*  H        * 

*  %  * 

*  X       * 

Family. 

Knights,  in  their  marching  order. 

Other  Societies. 

Carriages. 

13. — A  Tabernacle  in  procession  is  under  the  dis- 
cipline of  an  open  Tabernacle,  and  no  one  must 
leave  the  ranks  without  positive  permission  from 
the  High  Priestess,  conveyed  through  one  of  the 
acting  Meroes. 

At  the  Church. 

14. — The  Tabernacle  and  Sir  Knights  will  open 
ranks,  and  the  corpse  and  family  will  pass  into  the 
church.  The  Daughters  and  Knights  will  follow, 
and  take  their  seats. 

After  the  church  ceremony  and  sermon  by  a 
minister  or  the  Chief  Orator,  the  Daughters  and 
Sir  Knights  shall  rise,  whereupon  the  Chief  Orator 


174 


repeats  the  following  invocation,  and  the  Daugh- 
ters and  Knights  respond : 

Chief  Orator: — Almighty  Father,  may  we  realize 
that  Thine  all-pervading  presence  is  with  us ;  may 
Thy  spirit  perfect  us  in  truth  and  obedience  to  Thy 
will. 

Response: — May  the  Lord's  will  be  done! 

C.  O. : — May  we  meet  our  Sister  Daughter  in  the 
fadeless  lio^ht  of  God's  kinsfdom. 

Res. : — Into  the  Lord's  hands  we  cbmmit  our 
souls ! 

C.  O. : — Behold,  O  Lord,  we  are  in  sorrow.  O 
Lord,  let  the  light  of  Thy  countenance  shine  upon 
us  in  our  distress.  Comfort  us,  and  turn  our 
mourning  into  joy. 

Res. : — The  Lord  will  hear  and  answer  our 
prayer;  only  trust  Him! 

C.  O.  : — Blessed  is  the  Lord.  From  the  rising  to 
the  setting  of  the  sun,  praise  the  name  of  the  Lord. 

Res.: — Give  thanks  unto  the  Lord;  his  mercy 
endureth  forever! 

C.  O. : — Hear  us,  O  Lord,  and  comfort  our 
mourning  heaits. 

Res.: — The  Lord  will  meet  us  in  our  Taber- 
nacles ! 

C.  O.  :— Our  God  dwelleth  in  the  Heavenly  Tab- 
ernacle; He  hears  the  voice  of  our  supplications. 

Res. : — May  He  save  us  all  with  an  everlasting 
salvation ! 

The  Chief  Orator  (or  the  minister,  if  he  is  a 
member),  then  reads  the  following  prayer,  the 
Daughters  and  Knights  holding  up  their  joined 
hands  durins:  the  same: 


175 

Prayer. 

O  Merciful  God,  the  Father  of  our  Lord  Jesus 
Christ,  who  is  the  resurrection  and  the  life;  in 
whom  whosoever  believeth  shall  live,  though  he 
die;  and  whomsoever  liveth  and  believeth  in  Him, 
shall  not  die  eternally  ;  who  also  hath  taught  us, 
by  His  holy  Apostle  St.  Paul,  not  to  be  sorry,  as 
men  without  hope,  for  those  who  sleep  in  Him. 
We  humbly  beseech  Thee,  O  Father,  to  raise  us 
from  the  death  of  sin  unto  the  life  of  righteous- 
ness; that  when  we  shall  depart  this  life,  we  may 
rest  in  Him,  and  that  at  the  general  resurrection  on 
the  last  day,  we  may  be  found  acceptable  in  Thy 
sight,  and  receive  that  blessing  which  Thy  Well- 
Beloved  Son  shall  then  pronounce  to  all  who  love 
and  fear  Thee,  saying:  ''Come,  ye  blessed  children 
of  my  Father,  receive  the  kingdom  prepared  for 
you  from  the  beginning  of  the  world."  Grant  this, 
we  beseech  Thee,  O  Merciful  Father,  through 
Jesus  Christ,  our  Mediator  and  Redeemer.    Amen ! 

Response. — In  God  alone  is  safety  ! 

Whereupon  the  following  hymn  is  sung: 

I. 

Dear  as  thou  wert,  and  justly  dear, 

We  will  not  weep  for  thee; 
One  thought  shall  check  the  starting  tear, — 

It  is,  that  thou  art  free. 

II. 

And  thus  shall  faith's  consoling  power 

The  tears  of  love  restrain ; 
Oh,  who  that  saw  thy  parting  hour 

Could  wish  thee  back  asrain! 


176 


III. 

Triumphant  in  thy  closing  eye 

The  hope  of  glory  shone; 
Joy  breathed  in  thine  expiring  sigh, 

When  thou  wert  taken  home. 

The  following  exhortation  is  delivered  by  the 
High  Priestess  : 

Exhortation. 

Daughters,  this  solemn  scene  tells  us  that  our 
Tabernacle  has  been  visited  by  that  dread  messen- 
ger— Death — against  whose  certain  entrance  sen- 
tinels and  closed  doors  offer  no  stay  or  stop.  The 
chain  of  our  circle  has  been  broken,  and  a  link  is 
gone,  never  more  to  return.  We  mourn  the  loss 
of  a  dear  companion.  The  dead  body  of  our  be- 
loved Sister,  M N ,  is  now  before  us  in 

its  narrow  house.  This  is  the  last  of  earthly  Tab- 
ernacles for  her  whom  we  have  met  so  often  in  our 
undisturbed  retreat,  away  from  the  worldly-minded, 
to  enjoy  a  brief  season  of  happiness;  and  now 
we  have  assembled  to  bid  our  Sister  a  last,  long 
farewell.  She  sleeps  with  the  unnumbered  dead. 
The  storms  and  calms  of  life  have  passed  over  her 
pathway.  She  is  at  rest.  Her  toils  on  earth  have 
ended.  As  it  has  pleased  our  Heavenly  Father  to 
call  the  soul  of  our  departed  Sister  from  its  earthly 
Tabernacle,  may  she  find  joy  and  happiness  in  the 
Tabernacles  of  that  peaceful  land  where  the  eter- 
nal light  and  love  of  the  Eternal  Father,  Son  and 
Holy  Spirit  will  shed  their  rays  forever,  and,  in  the 
company  of  the  angelic  host  and  the  redeemed  of 
earth,  may  we  meet  our  loved  Sister,  to  part  no 
more.     Farewell,  for  \\  little  while. 


177 


The  Daughters  and  Knights  stand,  with  arms 
folded  across  their  breasts,  during  the  reading  of 
the  exhortation.  When  the  H.  P.  says  Farewell! 
the  Daughters  and  Knights  drop  their  arms  to 
their  sides  and  fold  them  across  their  breasts — this 
is  done  three  times — each  time  slowly  repeating  the 
word,  Farewell! 

The  Knights  and  Daughter  Priestesses,  the  family 
and  friends,  will  march  around  and  view  the  body, 
while  the  choir  chants  a  funeral  anthem,  or  a  hymn 
is  sung  by  the  congregation.  The  Sir  Knights  and 
Priestesses  then  form  in  front  of  the  church,  and 
open  ranks,  when  the  casket  is  passed  through  to 
the  hearse. 

MARCH   TO    THE    CEMETERY. 

Chief  Meroes. 
Chief  Orator  and  Clergy. 


*  M       * 

*  W       * 

Family  Carriages. 

Daughters  in  Vehicles. 

Other  Societies, 

Sir  Knights. 
Other  Vehicles. 

AT  THE  GRAVE. 

15. — The  Daughters  and  Sir  Knights  form  a 
circle  around  the  grave  (the  casket  being  placed 
over  the  grave),  with  the  family  at  the  head,  and 
the  C.  O.  and  ministers  at  the  foot.  The  Daugh- 
ters and  Sir  Knights  join  hands,  and  while  the 
casket  is  being  lowered,  the  following  hymn  is  sung : 


178 

I. 

Unveil  thy  bosom,  faithful  tomb; 

Take  this  new  treasure  to  thy  trust, 
And  give  these  sacred  relics  room 

To  slumber  in  the  silent  dust. 

II. 

Nor  pain,  nor  grief,  nor  anxious  fear, 

Invade  thy  bounds ;  no  mortal  woes 
Can  reach  the  peaceful  sleeper  here, 

While  angels  watch  the  soft  repose. 

III. 
So  Jesus  slept;  God's  dying  Son 

Passed  thro'  the  grave,  and  blest  the  bed: 
Kest  here,  blest  saint,  till  from  His  throne 

The  morning  break,  and  pierce  the  shade. 

IV. 

Break  from  His  throne,  illustrious  morn  I 
Attend,  O  earth !  His  sovereign  word : 

Kestore  thy  trust;  a  glorious  form 
Shall  then  ascend  to  meet  the  Lord! 

The  ceremonies  may  conclude  with  the  church 
order  for  the  burial  of  the  dead,  or  by  the  follow- 
ing, read  by  the  C.  O. : 

Prayer. 

Forasmuch  as  it  hath  pleased  Almighty  God,  in 
His  wise  providence,  to  take  out  of  this  world  the 
soul  of  our  deceased  Sister,  we,  therefore,  commit 
her  body  to  the  ground — earth  to  earth,  ashes  to 
ashes,  dust  to  dust;  looking  for  the  general  resur- 
rection in  the  last  day,  and  the  life  of  the  world  to 
come,  through  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  at  whose 
second  coming  in  glorious  majesty  to  judge  the 
world,  the  earth  and  the  sea  shall  give  up  their 
dead;  and  the  corruptible  bodies  of  those  who  sleep 
in  Him  shall  be  changed,  and  made  like  unto  His 


179 


own  glorious  body,  according  to  the  mighty  work- 
ing whereby  He  is  able  to  subdue  all  things  unto 
Himself.     Amen ! 

The  services  close,  and  the  procession  returns  to 
the  place  from  whence  it  came;  and  after  the 
necessary  business  is  finished,  the  Tabernacle  is 
closed. 


PALATINE  GUAKDS'  CHAPEAU, 


Button  No.  1. 


Button  No.  2. 


Helmet 
UNIFORM  RANK  HELMET. 


ISO 


PALATIUM 


OF   THE 


Royal  House  of  Media, 


NIliTH,  TENTH  AND  ELEVENTH  DEGREES 


OF    THE 


I^nigM?  aiid  Daugh^erg  of  TaboP, 


OF    THE 


International  Order  of  Twelve, 


181 


PALATIUM 

OF    THE 


ROYAL  HOUSE  OF  MEDIA 


:  o: 


This  is  the  highest  department  in  the  Interna- 
tional Order  of  Twelve.  It  is  the  Koyal  Social 
House,  where  the  Knights  and  Daughter  Priestesses 
meet  as  equals.  The  business  of  this  House  is  to 
exert  a  refining  influence  over  the  members  of  the 
order. 

1. — It  is  proposed  to  be  a  part  of  the  Interna- 
tional Order  of  Twelve,  with  all  the  rights  and 
privileges  it  confers. 

2. — The  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  must 
make  a  Code  of  Laws  or  Constitution  for  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Palatiums. 

3. — Our  order  is  so  constituted,  that  the  benefits 
for  members  are  derived  from  Temples  and  Taber- 
nacles; however,  it  is  optional  with  Palatiums 
whether  or  not  they  will  adopt  the  beneficial 
feature. 

4. — Each  Palatium  may,  if  it  desires  to  make  By- 
Laws,  have  its  members  pay  monthly  dues  and 
to  give  sick  or  distress  benefits,  and  to  aid  the 
Temple  or  Tabernacle  in  paying  funeral  expenses. 

182 


183 


5. — The  Members  of  the  Palatiums  being  a  part 
of  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  they  must 
pay  grand  dues,  but  not  as  much  as  is  paid  by  the 
Temples  and  Tabernacles. 

6. — A  Palatium  is  divided  into  two  departments: 
First,  the  Knightly  Princes — that  is,  the  Palatine 
Guards.  These  are  to  be  ready  to  march  and  drill 
at  any  time.  Special  privileges  are  given  to  them 
to  accumulate  funds  to  prepare  their  outfits,  and 
to  get  money  into  their  treasury  to  pay  travel- 
ing expenses  when  they  are  called  to  a  distant 
point.  They  are  permitted  to  have  a  Treasurer 
independent  from  the  one  of  the  Palatium,  and 
shall  be  known  as  the  Palatine  Guards'  Treasurer. 
They  may  give  entertainments  for  the  purpose  of 
replenishing  their  Treasury.  They  must  be  ready 
when  the  C.  G.  M.  orders  them  to  meet  the  Grand 
Session  for  a  Grand  Parade. 

Second^  the  Princesses  of  Media.  These  are  the 
Ladies  of  the  Palace.  They  shall  have  the  same 
rights  and  privileges  that  the  Knights  have  in  the 
management  of  the  Palatium.  It  is  they  who  make 
the  meetings  of  the  Palatium  pleasant  and  sociable. 
They  shall  aid  the  Palatine  Guards  in  all  their 
efforts.  In  a  parade  the  Princesses  shall  turn  out 
in  carriages  and  in  full  dress. 

7. — All  Grand  Officers  should  be  members  of  the 
Palatium.  This  is  necessary,  because  the  Palatium 
is  a  department  in  the  International  as  well  as  in  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  Grand  Officers 
cannot  properly  attend  to  all  their  duties,  unless 
they  become  members  of  all  the  various  depart- 
ments of  the  Order. 


184 


8. — The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  in  mak- 
ing a  Code  of  Laws  for  the  Palatium,  shall  define 
the  duties  of  the  officers. 

9. — The  C.  G.  M.  may  give  a  dispensation  allowing 
the  Vice-Princess  to  preside  in  case  the  Presiding 
Prince  is  required  to  act  as  Prince  Marshal. 

Officers  of  the  Palatium. 

1. — Presiding  Prince, P.  P. 

2. — Vice-Princess, V.-P. 

3. — Kecording  Prince, R.  P. 

4. — Assistant  Princess, A.  P. 

5. — Prince  Banker, P.  B. 

6. — Princess  Nonna, P.  N. 

7. — Prince  Clericus, P.  C. 

8. — Princess  Revista, P.  R. 

9. — Prince  Marshal, P.  M. 

10. — Prince  Gonfalonier, P.   G. 

11. — Princess   Sentina, S. 

12.— Prince  Wardship, P.  W. 


The  officers  are  elected  at  the  regular  meeting  in 
the  month  of  March,  and  installed  the  fifth  day  of 
April,  or  within  twenty  days  thereafter.  The  in- 
stallation may  be  either  public  or  private. 

The  installation  ceremony  may  be  performed  by 
a  Presiding  Prince,  Past  Presiding  Prince,  Chief 
Grand  Mentor,  or  International  Deputy  Grand 
Mentor. 


PALATIUM  OFFICER'S  JEWEL, 
Twelve  Jewels,  with  Initials  of  Office  on  Each  Jewel. 


186 


INSTALLING  CEREMONY 


OF   THE 


Officers  of  the  Palatium, 


OR 


Royal  House  of  Media. 


186 


INSTALLING  CEREMONY 

OF   THE 

OFFICERS  OF  THE  PALATIUM. 

:  o: 

The  members  of  the  Palatium  shall  assemble  in 
their  hall  (or  some  place  near  to  where  the  instal- 
lation is  to  be  held,  if  it  is  to  be  public).  The 
Princes  and  Princesses  shall  appear  in  full  dress. 
The  P.  P.  declares  the  Palatium  open  for  work. 
The  Prince  Marshal  forms  the  procession.  If  a 
Grand  or  Past  Grand  Officer  is  present,  proper 
respect  must  be  shown  him  or  her. 

The  March. 

The  procession  marches  around  the  hall  four 
times.  The  ranks  are  opened  and  the  officers  are 
marched  to  the  platform  in  the  following  order : 

Tabernacle — Daughter  Priestesses,  in  full  dress. 

Temple — Uniform  Rank  Knights,  in  full  dress. 

Grand  and  Past  Grand  Officers,  in  full  dress. 

Palatium — Princesses,  in  full  dress. 

Palatium — Palatine  Guards,  in  full  dress. 

If  the  Maids  and  Pages  take  part  in  the  cere- 
mony, they  shall  march  in  front  of  the  procession. 

If  there  is  room  on  the  platform,  the  Grand  and 
Past  Grand  Officers,  and  the  C.  M.s,  C.  P.s  and  Q. 
M.s  are  seated  to  the  right  and  left  of  the  officers 
about  to  be  installed. 

187 


188 


The  Installing  Officer  shall  be  addressed  as   Sir 

Grand,    the    Presenter   or    Introducer   as    Prince 

Marshall. 

Ceremony. 

The  Prince  Marshal  places  all  the  officers'  Jewels 
on  the  altar. 

Music;   or,   if  there  is  no   band,  the  following 
hymn  is  sung : 

S.  M. 


Through  all  the  lofty  sky, 

Through  all  the  inferior  ground, 
The  Almighty  Maker  shines  confessed, 

And  pours  his  blessings  'round. 

II. 
Each  year  the  teeming  earth, 

With  flowers  and  fruits  is  crowned; 
And  grass,  and  herbs,  and  harvests,  grow, 

And  send  their  joys  around. 

III. 
The  world  of  waters  yields 

A  rich  supply  of  food. 
And  distant  lands  their  treasures  send 

Upon  the  rolling  flood. 

IV. 

To  serve  and  bless  our  land 

The  elements  conspire; 
And  mercies  mix  themselves  with  earth, — 

With  ocean,  air,  and  fire. 

V. 

O  that  the  sons  of  men 

To  God  their  songs  would  raise. 
And  celebrate  his  power  and  love 

In  never-ceasing  praise ! 

Sir  Grand  gives  four  raps  and  all  stand ;  he  then 
Bays : — We  have  assembled  at  this  hour  to  install  the 


189 


officers  of  Palatium,  No.  — ,  of  the  Royal  House  of 
Media.  So  important  is  the  business  which  we  are 
about  to  transact,  that  before  we  go  any  further,  it 
is  necessary  to  dedicate  the  work  to  God,  our  Ruler 
and  Preserver,  and  ask  his  guidance  and  blessing 
upon  the  Palatium  and  its  officers.  Prince  Clericus 
will  favor  us  by  addressing  Him  who  sits  on  the 
throne  of  great  grace.  Palatine  Guards  and 
Knights,  uncover! 

Prayer  by  Prince  Clericus. 

Prince  Clericus : — Holy  and  Divine  Father,  it  is 
Thou  that  controls  and  rules  in  the  world  of  man- 
kind; Thou  art  the  Supreme  Dispenser  of  every 
good  and  perfect  gift.  We  come,  asking  and 
pleading  that  Thou  wouldst  in  mercy  bless  and 
protect  the  Royal  House  of  Media.  Grant  unto  us 
wisdom,  that  we  may  conduct  the  business  of  this 
Palatium  in  a  manner  that  all  its  membership  may 
be  drawn  to  serve  Thee  and  bless  Thy  holy  name; 
breathe  into  our  hearts  Thy  life-giving  word,  and 
save  us  with  an  everlasting  salvation.  Guide  us  in 
our  counsels,  shield  us  by  Thy  love.  Thou  Prince 
and  Savior,  bless -the  nations,  comfort  the  widows, 
care  for  the  orphans,  and  receive  us  all  into  Thy 
favor.  This  is  our  prayer,  and  will  be  now,  hence- 
forth and  forever.     Amen ! 

Response  by  all  the  members: — May  the  Lord 
bless  the  Palatium ! 

Sir  Grand: — Palatine  Guards  and  Sir  Knights, 
cover!     (Gives  one  rap  and  all  are  seated.) 


190 

Music;  or  the  following  hymn  is  sung: 

C.  M. 

I. 

Eternal  Sovereign  of  the  sky, 

And  Lord  of  all  below, 
We  mortals  to  Thy  majesty 

Our  first  obedience  owe. 

II. 

Our  souls  adore  Thy  throne  supreme, 

And  bless  Thy  providence 
For  magistrates  of  meaner  name, 

Our  glory  and  defense. 

III. 

The  acts  of  pious  rulers  shine 

With  rays  above  the  rest; 
Where  laws  and  liberties  combine, 

The  people  are  made  blest. 

Prince  Marshal  to  Sir  Grand: — I  have  the  honor 

of  presenting  to  you  Prince ,  who 

has  been  elected  Presiding  Prince   of  Pala- 

tium,  No.  — ,  and  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Presiding  Prince. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince,  you  have  been  elected 
byj^ie  members  of  your  Palatium  to  preside  over 
its   important   work.     I  place  in  your  hands  the 

charter — that  makes  Palatium,   No.   — ,  a 

legal  body.  It  must  be  present  when  the  Palatium 
is  open  for  business.  You  will  carefully  guard  it 
as  a  sacred  power.  I  present  to  you  the  Constitu- 
tion of  the  Palatium,  and  the  Laws  of  the  Inter- 
national Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  of  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  It  is  your  duty  to 
have  these   Laws   enforced   in  vour  Palatium.     I 


191 


present  to  you  this  sword,  with  the  hilt  in  your 
hand.  You  are  to  teach  the  Royal  Palathie  Guards 
how  to  use  it  in  the  defense  of  their  country  when 
assailed  by  an  enemy,  and  to  protect  the  innocent. 
I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be 
an  example  to  the  Princes  and  Princesses.  Sir 
Prince  Marshal,  please  seat  the  Presiding  Prince. 
Prince  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to  you  Princess ^,  who 

has  been  elected  Yice-Princess  of Palatium, 

No.  — ,  and  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Vice-Princess. 

Sir  Grand: — Princess,  I  take  pleasure  in  saying 
to  you  that  the  members  of  the  Palatium  have  ex- 
pressed their  confidence  in  your  ability  by  electing 
you  to  the  important  office  of  Vice-Princess.  Your 
duty  is  to  assist  the  Presiding  Prince  by  counsel 
and  advice  in  his  several  duties.  You  shall  preside 
during  his  absence  from  his  seat.  I  now  invest  you 
with  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  May  you  attend  to 
your  duties  punctually.  Prince  Marshal,  you  will 
please  seat  the  Vice-Princess. 

Prince  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  now  present  to 

you  Prince ,  who  has   been  elected 

Recording  Prince  of Palatium,  No.  — .     He 

is  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  the  Recording  Prince. 
Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince,  you  have  been  elected 
to  the  position  of  Recording  Prince  by  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Palatium.  It  is  your  duty  to  be  pres- 
ent at  every  meeting  of  the  Palatium,  and  record 
the  business.     You  must  keep  a  roll-book,  and  en- 


192 


roll  the  names  of  every  member.  You  are  to  make 
a  quarterly  report  to  the  C.  G.  M.  on  the  condition 
of  the  Palatium,  receive  all  moneys  paid  into  the 
Palatium,  and  draw  all  warrants  for  money  on 
Prince  Banker,  and  see  that  they  are  properly  signed 
by  the  Presiding  Officer,  and  countersigned  by 
yourself.  Pay  all  moneys  that  you  receive  for  the 
Palatium  to  Prince  Banker,  and  take  his  receipt 
therefor.  You  are  the  corresponding  officer  of  the 
Palatium.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of 
your  office.  Be  careful  in  your  business.  Prince 
Marshal,  please  seat  the  Recording  Prince. 

Prince  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  take  pleasure  in 

introducing  Princess ,  who  has  been 

elected  Assistant  Princess  of Palatium,  No. 

— ,  and  is  now  ready  for  installation. 

Instructions  to  the  Assistant  Princkss. 

Sir  Grand: — Princess,  I  congratulate  you  on  the 
honorable  position  which  you  have  attained.  It  is 
your  duty  to  assist  the  Recording  Prince  in  his  sev- 
eral duties,  and  to  attend  to  his  business  during  his 
absence.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office.  May  you  have  good  success.  Prince  Mar- 
shal, you  will  please  seat  the  Assistant  Princess. 

Prince  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to  you  Prince ,  who  has 

been    elected   Prince    Banker  of  Palatium, 

No.  — .     He  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Prince  Banker. 
Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince,  by  the  suffrage  of  the 
members  of  this  Palatium,  you  are  called    to  the 
very  important  position  of  Prince  Banker.     It  is 


193 


your  duty  1o  receive  all  moneys  and  valuables  which 
are  the  properly  of  the  Palatium,  and  pay  all  war- 
rants drawn  on  the  Bank  when  tliey  are  signed  by 
the  P.  P.  and  countersigned  by  the  R.  P.  You 
■must  make  a  report  lo  the  Palatium  of  the  condi- 
tion of  the  Bank,  when  requested  by  the  Presiding 
Officer.  You  must  make  a  written  statement  to  your 
successor  of  the  condition  of  the  Bank,  and  turn  over 
to  him  all  the  moneys,  valuables,  books  and  other 
property  belonging  to  the  Palatium  when  he  is  in- 
stalled. I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office.  Be  true  to  your  trust.  Prince  Marshal,  please 
seat  Prince  Banker. 

Prince  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure 

of  introducing  to  you  Princess ,  who 

has  been  elected  Princess  Nonna  of  Pala- 
tium, No.  — ,  and  is  now  ready  for  installation. 

Instructions  to  Princess  Nonna. 

Sir  Grand: — Princess,  I  congratulate  you  on  the 
very  responsible  office  that  the  Palatium  members 
have  entrusted  to  your  care.  The  office  requires 
that  you  should  promptly  attend  all  meetings,  and 
be  thoroughly  versed  in  the  Ritualistic  work.  I 
now  present  to  you  the  Jewel  of  your  office.  Be 
active  in  your  duties.  Prince  Marshall,  please  seat 
Princess  Nonna. 

Prince  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to  you  Prince ,  he  having 

been   elected  Prince  Clericus  by Palatium, 

No.  — .     He  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 
7 — Dicksons'  New  Manual.) 


194 


Instructions  to  Prince  Clericus. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Priace,  you  have  been  honored 
by  the  members  of  the  Palatium  by  their  electing 
you  to  the  high  office  of  Prince  Clericus.  It  is 
your  duty  to  conduct  the  devotional  exercises  of  the 
Palatium,  visit  the  sick  or  distressed  Princes  or 
Princesses,  and  to  perform  the  funeral  ceremonies 
of  the  Palatium.  I  now  present  to  you  the  Jewel 
of  your  office.  May  you  be  well  instructed  in  the 
Holy  Scriptures.  Prince  Marshal,  you  will  please 
seat  Prince  Clericus. 

Prince  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleasure 

of  introducing  to  you  Princess ,  who 

has  been  elected  Princess  Revista  of Pala- 
tium, No — ,  and  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Princess  Re  vista. 

Sir  Grand: — Princess,  the  office  to  which  you 
have  been  elected  is  one  that  requires  your  closest 
attention.  Your  duty  is  fully  explained  in  the 
Ritual.  I  advise  you  to  carefully  study  your  part, 
so  that  you  may  be  qualified  in  the  business  of  your 
office.  I  now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your 
office.  May  you  honorably  perform  your  duty. 
Prince  Marshal,  please  seat  Princess  Revista. 

Prince  Marshal: — Sir  Grand,   I  have  the  honor 

of  presenting  to  you  Prince ,  who 

has  been  elected  Prince  Marshal  of Palatium, 

No.  — .     He  is  now  rendy  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Prince  Marshal. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince, it  is  with  pleasure  I  hear 
that  the  members  of  the  Palatium  have  elected  you 


195 


as  Prince  Marshal.  It  is  your  duty  to  instruct  the 
Palatine  Guards  in  the  march,  drill  and  the  sword 
exercises,  and  conduct  all  public  turn-outs  of  the 
Palatine  Guards.  Your  station  is  to  guard  the 
inner  door  during  the  Session  of  the  Palatium.  I 
now  present  to  you  the  Jewel  of  your  office  and 
this  sword.  You  will  find  need  for  it  in  your  duties. 
Be  courageous.  Prince  Marshal,  please  seat  the 
elected  Prince  Marshal. 

Prince  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  honor  of 

presenting  to  you  Prince ,  who  has 

been  elected  Prince  Gonfalonier  of Palatium, 

No. — .     He  is  now  ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Prince  Gonfalonier. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince,  the  members  of  the  Pa- 
latium have  conferred  on  you  the  honorable-  duty 
of  unfurling  and  carrying  the  Royal  Banner  of  the 
Royal  House  of  Media.  It  is  your  duty  to  guard 
the  Gonfalon,  and  defend  it  in  time  of  danger.  I 
now  invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office  and 
place  in  your  care  the  Gonfalon  of  the  Palatium. 
Prince  Marshal,  please  seat  Prince  Gonfalonier. 

Prince  Marshal : — Sir  Grand,  I  take  pleasure  in 

introducing   to  you   Princess ,  who 

has  been  elected  as  Princess  Sentina,  and  is  now 
ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Princess  Sentina. 
Sir  Grand: — Princess,  you  have  been  honored  by 
the  members  of  the  Palatium  by  their  electing  you 
to  the  very  important  office  of  Princess  Sentina. 
It  is  your  duty  to  guard  the  inner  entrance  of  the 
Palatium  during  the  hours  of  the  Sessions.     Your 


196 


further  duties  you  will  find  in  the  Ritual.  I  now 
invest  you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office,  and  the 
Poniard  of  defense.  B3  prompt  to  every  duty. 
Prince  Marshal,  please  seat  Princess  Sentina. 

Prince  Marshall: — Sir  Grand,  I  have  the  pleas- 
ure of  introducing  to   you  Prince , 

who  has  been  elected  Prince  Wardship.  He  is  now 
ready  to  be  installed. 

Instructions  to  Prince  Wardship. 

Sir  Grand: — Sir  Prince,  you  have  been  elected 
Prince  Wardship  by  the  members  of  the  Palatiuni. 
It  is  a  responsible  office,  and  in  entrusting  you  with 
the  position,  the  members  have  shown  their  confi- 
dence in  your  integrity  and  ability.  Your  station 
is  at  the  outer  post;  you  are  to  guard  the  entrance, 
and  report  all  who  desire  admittance.  I  now  invest 
you  with  the  Jewel  of  your  office,  and  present  to 
you  this  sword;  use  it  in  defense  of  your  position; 
may  you  perform  your  duties  with  honor.  Prince 
Marshal,  please  seat  Prince  Wardship. 

Sir  Grand  gives  four  raps,  and  all  stand,  except 
the  newly  installed  officers.  Prince  Marsh  d  forms 
a  procession  of  the  Palatine  Guards,  Princesses, 
Uniform  Rank  Knights  and  Priestesses  (if  there  is 
room)  who  march  four  timos  around  the  hall,  while 
the  band  is  playing,  or  while  some  familiar  hymn  is 
sung. 

At  the  conclusion  of  the  fourth  round,  the  Prince 
Marshal  forms  a  circle  around  the  installed  officers — 
the  Palatine  Guards  and  the  Princesses  in  the  inner 
circle,  and  the  Uniform  Rank  Knights  and  Priest- 
esses on  the  outer  circle. 


197 


Prince  Marshal : — Palatine  Guards  and  Uniform 
Rank  Knights,  Handle  Swords !  Draw  Swords !  ! 
Present  Swords  ! !  !  Princesses,  Handle  Poniards  ! 
Draw  Poniards ! !  Present  Poniards  ! ! ! 

Sir  Grand: — By  virtue  of  the  authority  in  me 
vested  as  Installing  Officer,  I  now  and  here  an- 
nounce that  the  officers  of Palatium,  No. — , 

are  duly  installed  and  ready  to  perform  the  duties 
of  their  several  offices  for  the  ensuing  Palatium 
year. 

Prince  Marshal: — Salute  the  installed  officers. 
(The  salute  with  swords  and  poniards  is  given  four 
times.)  Carry  Swords!  Return  Swords  and  Po- 
niards ! ! 

The  P.  P.  or  Y.-P.  (while  all  the  officers  stand) 
says : — By  virtue  of  the  authority  in  me  vested,  I 

announce  that  Palatium,  No. — ,  is  at  rest 

from  work.  Members  of  the  Temples,  Tabernacles 
and  Palatiums,  I  thank  you  for  your  assistance. 
You  are  now  disbanded. 

Music  or  singing,  after  which  addresses  may  be 
delivered,  followed  by  a  drill  and  march. 


FUNERAL  CEREMONY 


:OF    THE 


PALATINE  GUARDS, 


198 


BURIAL  CEREMONY 

OF  THE 

PALATINE    GUARDS 


:0: 


Instructions. 

1. — A  Palatine  Guard,  to  be  enterred  with  the 
full  honors,  must  be  a  member  of  the  Uniform  Rank, 
and  in  good  standing  in  the  Palatium. 

2. — At  the  summons  of  the  Presiding  Prince, 
the  Palatine  Guards  assemble  to  prepare  for  the 
interment. 

3. — The  Guards  must  attend  in  full  uniform,  with 
their  sword  hilts  and  banner  draped  in  mourning, 
the  officers  wearins^  their  Jewels. 

4. — On  the  day  on  which  the  remains  are  to  be 
interred,  the  Guards  shall  assemble  in  their  hall,  and 
march  to  the  residence,  or  wherever  the  remains 
are,  in  Palatine  order.  The  sword  and  chapeau  is 
borne  in  the  rear  of  the  P.  P.  On  arriving  at  the 
place  were  the  remains  are,  the  lines  are  opened  to 
the  right  and  left,  the  pall-bearers  pass  through 
the  lines,  and  place  the  sword  and  chapeau  on  the 
casket.  The  pall-bearers  (Palatine  Guards)  take 
the  casket,  and,  conducted  by  Prince  Wardship 
pass  through  the  lines  and  place  it  in  the  hearse. 

199 


200 


5. — The  procession  is  then  formed  by  Prince 
Marshal  and  his  Assistant  Marshals, whereupon  they 
march  to  the  church  or  place  where  the  services  are 
to  be  held,  in  the  following  order: 

Prince  Wardship  (on  Foot  or  Horse). 

Music. 

Other  Societies  or  Orders  (Men). 

Uniform  Kank  (Knights). 

Palatine  Guards. 


CO     Cm 

i 

^ 

p     nps\     p 

?     M 

B 

!— ! 

^     1 ' 

^1 

1 

03        ?   . 

B 

G- 

O 

H 

O 

1          || 

1 

P 
•-J 

^~^            oj 

H 

CD 

c3         Y 

9 

>-i 

Ph        i 

W 

GO 

Family  (in  Carriages). 

Princesses  (in  Carriages). 

Priestesses  (in  Carriages). 

Grand  and  Past  Grand  Officers. 

Citizens  (in  Carriages). 

6. — After  arriving  at  the  church,  the  Palatine 
Guards  and  Knights  shall  enter  in  reversed  order, 
preceding  the  casket,  followed  by  the  Princesses, 
Priestesses  and  Grand  Officers. 

7. — The  P.  P.  shall  preside  during  the  ceremony, 
assisted  by  Prince  Clericus.  After  the  sermon,  the 
Uniform  Rank  Knights  open  with  their  burial 
ceremony,  which  is  followed  by  the  Palatine 
Guards.  The  members  of  the  order  stand  during 
prayer  and  the  ceremonies. 


201 


8. — While  the  remaius  are  lying  in  state,  there 
shall  be  either  two  Uniform  Rank  Knights  or  two 
Palatine  Guards  on  duty. 

9. — The  march  to  the  cemetery  shall  be  in  the  same 
order  as  the  march  to  the  church  was.  When  the 
head  of  the  procession  arrives  at  the  "^lace  of  in- 
terment, the  P.  P.,  preceded  by  the  P.  M.,  pass 
through,  followed  by  the  Uniform  Rank  Knights  and 
then  by  the  other  orders.  On  arriving  at  the  grave 
or  vault,  they  open  ranks,  and  the  casket  is  con- 
veyed through  to  the  grave,  and  placed  over  the 
tomb.  A  circle  is  then  formed  around  the  casket, 
with  the  family  at  the  foot  and  the  P.  P.,  P.  C, 
C.  M.,  C.  O.,  and  clergy  at  the  head,  the  Uniform 
Rank  Knights  then  form  the  inner  circle  and  per- 
form their  part  of  the  ceremony  without  lowering 
the  casket.  When  they  have  finished,  the  Palatine 
Guards  take  the  inner  circle,  and  they  finish  the 
ceremony. 

10. — The  face  of  the  deceased  should  be  uncovered 
during  the  ceremony  in  the  church,  if  thought 
proper. 

11. — The  funeral  procession  shall  return  from  the 
cemetery  to  the  place  of  disbandment  in  the  same 
order  in  which  it  was  originally  formed.  The  P. 
P.,  on  arriving  at  the  place  of  disbandment,  shall 
declare  the  Palatium  at  rest. 

12. — Princesses  and  Priestesses  shall  wear  their 
Badges  of  membership,  and  officers  their  Jewels  of 
office,  or  full  dress,  if  all  the  members  decide  to 
appear  in  full  regalia. 


202 


Ceremony  ix  the  Church. 

After  the  sermon  and  church  services,  and  after 
the  Uniform  Rank  Knights  have  performed  their 
part  of  the  church  ceremony  and  are  seated,  the  P. 
P.  commands,  in  ak)W  voice: — Guards,  Stand  and 
Uncover!  *The  Guards  fold  their  arms,  with 
chapcaus  resting  on  their  left  arms. 

Presiding  Prince: — Palatine  Guards,  we  are  sad 
to-day ;  our  ranks  have  been  broken ;  a  true  and 
trusted  Guard  has  passed  through  the  gates  of 
death ;  Prince is  no  more  of  earth ;  he  re- 
ceived the  summons  that  must  be  obeyed ;  kind  and 
loving  arms  could  not  keep  him  here ;  our  swords, 
so  ready  to  be  wielded  in  defence  of  every  Palatine 
Guard,  remain  in  their  scabbards,  our  blades  could 
not  shield  him  in  that  dreadful  hour,  nor  defend  him 

in   his    struggle    with    death.      Prince has 

passed  the  portals,  and  we  to-day  mourn  his  demise. 
The  Royal  House  of  Media  will  no  more  hear  his 
Princely  voice.  He  is  silent;  he  is  wrapped  in  life- 
less mortality ;  he  will  never  meet  the  Guards  again 
in  the  Palatine.  His  hand  will  never  wield  his 
sword.  His  feet  will  never  tread  the  earth  aijain 
in  the  royal  march  and  drill;  all  that  remains  of 
Brother  Prince  and  Guard  is  his  lifeless  body 
stilled  in  the  embrace  of  death.  Palatine  Guards, 
Cover  I  Let  us  reverently  attend  to  the  lessons  of 
the  Sacred  Scriptures. 

Prince  Clericus: — In  my  distress,  I  called  upon 
the  Lord  and  cried  unto  my  God.  He  heard  my 
voice,  and  my  cry  came  before  Him.  I  will  rejoice 
in  Thy  mercy ! 


^203 


Response  r^Hear  us,  Lord,  and  in  mercy  save  us. 

P.  C: — The  Lord  will  give  strength  unto  His 
people;  we  trust  in  Thee,  O  Lord;  shine  upon  Thy 
servants. 

Res. : — Hear,  O  Lord,  have  mercy  upon  us. 

P.  C. : — God  is  our  refuge  and  strength,  an  ever 
present  help  in  trouble. 

Res. : — Lord,  remember  us  in  love  and  mercy. 

P.  C. : — Help  us,  O  God,  of  our  salvation,  for 
the  glory  of  Thy  name,  and  deliver  us  and  purge 
away  our  sins,  for  Thy  name's  sake. 

Res. : — Lord,  let  Thy  tender  mercies  remain  with 
us. 

P.  C. : — Teach  us  to  number  our  days,  that  we 
may  apply  our  hearts  to  wisdom. 

Res. : — Bless  the  Lord,  oh  my  soul. 

P.  C. : — Praise  ye  the  Lord,  O  give  thanks  unto 
the  Lord,  for  He  is  good;  His  mercy  endureth  for- 
ever. 

Res.: — Save  us,  O  Lord,  we  praise  Thee,  our 
Savior. 

P.  C. :— Teach  us,  O  Lord,  to  do  They  will,  for 
Thou  art  our  God;  lead  us  in  the  land  of  the  up- 
right. 

Res. : — Deliver  us,  O  Lord,  and  we  will  praise 
Thy  holy  name. 

P.  P. : — One  by  one  we  pass  from  earth.  Shall 
we  remember  our  Princely  Brother  ? 

Res. : — We  will  revere  his  name  and  his  many 
virtues. 

P.  P. : — Shall  his  name  be  recorded  in  the  Pala- 
tium? 


204 

Res. : — The  record  is  made.  It  is^  written  here, 
(hand  on  heart). 

P.  P. : — He  was  loved  and  respected;  may  he  be 
enrolled  in  the  heavenly  land. 

Res. : — May  he  rest  in  the  never-fading  light  of 
glory. 

The  following  is  then  sung : 
C.  M. 

I. 

Teach  me  the  measure  of  my  days. 

Thou  maker  of  my  frame : 
I  would  survey  life's  narrow  space, 

And  learn  how  frail  I  am. 


A  span  is  all  that  we  can  boast, 

An  inch  or  two  of  time; 
Man  is  but  vanity  and  dust, 

In  all  his  flower  and  prime. 

III. 
What  shall  I  wish,  or  wait  for  then, 

From  creatures,  earth  and  dust? 
They  make  our  expectations  vain, 

And  disappoint  our  trust. 

IV. 


Now  I  forbid  my  carnal  hope, 
My  fond  desires  recall; 

I  give  my  mortal  interest  up. 
And  make  my  God  my  all. 


Whereupon  the  following  prayer  is  read  by  Prince 
Clericus : 

Prayer. 

Our  Heavenly  Father,  in -the  name  of  Jesus,  our 
Redeemer,  in  our  sorrow  we  come  unto  Thee.  Thou 
art  the  heart's  comforter,  in  mercy  hear  us.  We 
thank  Thee  for  Thy  providential  care  over  us  during 


205 


our  past  life.  Oh  let  the  light  of  Thy  divine  coun- 
tenance shine  within  us  at  this  hour.  We  know- 
that  Thou  hearest  our  prayer.  Death  has  entered 
our  ranks.  A  Brother  has  passed  through  the  dark 
valley.  We  mourn  his  departure.  We  humbly 
beseach  Thee  to  give  consolation  to  the  bereaved 
friends  and  relatives,  and  teach  us,  who  are  assem- 
bled here,  that  we  are  but  mortal,  that  we  are  frail, 
and  that  our  days  on  earth  are  uncertain.  O  Lord, 
draw  us  unto  Thee,  that  we  may  apply  our  hearts  to 
holy  wisdom,  which  will  in  the  end  bring  us  to  a 
life  of  eternal  joy  and  happiness,  through  the  mer- 
its of  Thy  Only  Son,  Jesus  Christ,  our  Eedeemer. 
Amen  !  Amen !  I 

Kesponse: — The  Lord  is  merciful,  and  will  hear 
our  prayer! 

P.  P. : — Princes,  Handle  Swords  !  Draw  Swords  !  I 
Present  Swords !  !  !  Sir  Princes  of  the  Palatine 
Guards,  we  are  here  to  pay  our  last  respects  to  a 

Prince  Palatine.     All  that  remains  of  Prince 

lies  before  us,  wrapped  in  the  cold  embrace  of 
death.  He  will  never  meet  us  again  in  our  pleas- 
ant Pnlatium;  his  seat  is  vacant;  his  voice,  which 
mingled  with  ours  in  the  Royal  House  of  Media,  is 
silent.  When  the  command  is  given  to  Fall  in. 
Guards^  his  absence  will  be  felt;  no  more  will  he 
respond  to  his  number  at  the  call  of  the  Prince 
Marshal;  his  sword,  which  he  was  ever  ready  to 
draw  at  the  command,  his  hand  will  grasp  it  no 
more;  the  Guards  that  were  reaoly  at  all  times  to 
defend  him  with  their  swords,  and  to  protect  him 
in  the  time  of  danger  by  a  wall  of  steel,  were  im- 
potent when  the  enemy — Death — claimed  him;  our 


206 


blades  of  steel  could  not  shield  our  Princely  Pala- 
tine; the  guarded  doors  of  our  Palatium  could  not 
prevent  the  entrance  of  the  "grim  slayer;"  the  lov- 
ing hands  of  the  Princesses  of  Media  would  have 
held  their  Princely  brother  to  the  earth,  but  smiles 
and  tears  could  jtht  retain  him,  nor  prevent  the  cold 
touch  of  deatJj''^to  the  silent  rest  we  h;ive  brought 
him;  he  sleeps  with  the  unnumbered  multitude; 
canily  he  passed  into  the  regions  of  the  dead ;  may 
he  find  ^at  rest  which  is  given  to  the  believer  in  the 
Presicjfng  Prince  of  the  Heavenly  Land ;  may  the 
Son  and  Savior  give  him  a  place  in  the  paradise 
of^'bliss,  and  exchange  his  earthly  armor  for  the 
royal  robes  of  eternal  light;  this  sad  and  sorrow- 
ful circle  tells  how  well  we  loved  our  Prince  Pala- 
tine ;  with  him  we  cannot  again  meet  on  earth ;  he 
is  gone,  to  return  no  more ;  we  will  remember  his 
many  good  qualities,  and  over  his  faults  cast  the 
mantle  of  forgetf ulness.  Princes  and  Princesses  of 
the  Royal  House  of  Media,  one  by  one  we  must  pass 
from  earth;  our  names  will  be  dropped  from  the 
roll-books  of  the  Palatium;  may  we  so  live  that 
our  names  will  be  enrolled  in  the  Lamb's  Book  of 
Life;  that  when  the  chill  of  death  clogs  our  blood, 
and  our  hearts  cease  to  respond  to  the  call  of  life, 
our  unfettered  souls  will  have  clear  passports  into 
the  realms  of  eternal  bliss  and  happiness. 

After  the  usual  custom  of  reviewing  the  body  has 
been  observed  by  the  congregation,  Palatine  Guards, 
Uniform  Rank  Knights,  Princesses  and  Priestesses, 
the  procession  will  then  form  and  march  to  the 
place  of  interment.  After  the  Uniform  Rank 
Knights   have  finished  their   ceremony,  the   Pala- 


207 


tine  Guards  form  a  perfect  circle  around  the  casket, 
witii  the  P.  P.  and  P.  C.  at  the  head,  and  the  fam- 
ily of  the  departed  at  the  foot  of  the  grave. 

P.  P. : — Palatine  Guards,  salute  Prince  Palatine 
for  the  last  time.     (Four  salutes  are  given.) 

If  there  is  room,  the  Prince  forms  the  Palatine 
Guards  in  single  file,  and  marches  them  around  the 
casket  four  times,  each  touching  the  head  of  the 
casket  with  the  point  of  his  sword  every  time  he 
goes  around,  and  says.  Farewell. 

Music ;  or  the  following  hymn  is  sung : 

C.  M. 
I. 

Thy  mighty  arm !     O  God,  was  nigh 

When  we  our  foes  assailed  ; 
'Tis  Thou  hast  raised  our  honors  high. 

And  o'er  their  host  prevailed, 
ir. 
The  thund'ring  horse,  the  martial  band, 

Without  Thine  aid  were  vain; 
And  vict'ry  flies  at  Thy  command 

To  crown  the  bright  campaign. 

Their  mounds,  their  camps,  their  lofty  towers, 

Into  our  hands  are  given; 
Not  from  desert  or  strength  of  ours, 

But  through  the  grace  of  Heaven. 

IV. 

The  faithful  tablet  of  our  heart 

These  mercies  shall  record. 
And  never  thence  shall  they  depart, 

Nor  we  forget  the  Lord. 

V. 

To  our  young  race  will  we  proclaim 

The  mercies  God  has  shown; 
That  they  may  learn  to  bless  His  name. 

And  choose  Him  for  tUejr  o\vn. 


208 


VI. 


Thus,  while  we  sleep  in  silent  dust, 

When  threat'ning  dangers  come, 
Their  fathers'  God  shall  be  their  trust. 

Their  refuge,  and  their  home. 

After  the  circle  is  formed,  Prince  Marshal  gives 
the  command  to  reverse  swords  and  uncover.  (The 
Guards  stand  with  folded  arms,  their  chapeaus 
resting  on  their  right  arms  over  the  hilts  of  their 
swords.)  The  Prince  Marshal  removes  the  chapeau 
and  sword  from  the  casket,  whereupon  it  is  lowered 
into  the  grave. 

The  Prince  Marshal  points  the  deceased  Prince's 
sword  over  the  grave,  and  says: — Sir  Princes,  this 
is  an  emblem  of  defense  and  attack.  Our  deceased 
Palatine  Brother  was  instructed  that  with  the  hilt 
in  his  hand  he  was  to  defend  the  innocent  and 
protect  the  weak,  and  be  true  to  every  trust.  The 
sword  is  a  symbol  of  the  Sword  of  the  Spirit.  He 
who  possesses  that  symbolized  sword  has  the  pass 
into  the  holy  presence  of  the  Master  Commander 
of  Heaven  and  Earth.  May  the  spiritual  sword  of 
love  permit  us  to  meet  our  Palatine  Brother  in  the 
Heavenly  Mansions. 

Prince  Marshal: — Palatine  Guards,  Cover!  Ke- 
turn    Swords !  I     Hear    and    Assist   Prince   Cleri- 


cus 


T  '  T 


P.  C. : — I  am  the  resurrection  and  the  life.  He 
that  believeth  in  Me,  though  he  w^ere  dead,  yet 
shall  he  live.  Whosoever  liveth  and  believeth  in 
Me,  shall  never  die.  To  the  earth  we  commit  the 
mortal  remains  of  our  deceased  Brother.  May  his 
soul  rest  in  peace,     Earth  to  eurtU,     {Oast  earth 


209 


on  the  casket.)  Dust  to  dust.  (Oast  again.) 
Ashes  to  ashes.  (Cast  again.)  Until  the  morn 
of  the  resurrection,  when,  lii^e  our  risen  Lord  and 
Savior,  may  he  break  every  chain  and  bond  of 
death,  and  ascend  to  dwell  forever  in  the  sunshine 
of  heavenly  beams. 

Response: — In  Solo  Deo  Salusf 

The  P.  M.  gives  the  command  to  uncover  (the 
Guards  stand  with  folded  arms  and  bowed  heads. ) 

Prayer. 

Our  Father  which  art  in  Heaven,  hallowed  be 
Thy  name.  Thy  kingdom  come.  Thy  will  be  done 
in  earth  as  it  is  in  heaven.  Give  us  this  day  our 
daily  bread;  and  forgive  us  our  trespasses  as  we 
forgive  those  who  trespass  against  us.  Lead  us 
not  into  temptation,  but  deliver  us  from  evil.  For 
Thine  is  the  kingdom,  and  the  power,  and  the 
glory,  forever.     Amen ! 

Response : — Amen !    Amen !  I    Amen !  I ! 

P.  M. : — Palatine  Guards,  Cover! 

Prince  Clericus,  or  a  clergyman,  gives  the  bene- 
diction. The  lines  are  formed  and  they  march 
back  to  the  hall,  or  the  P.  P.  announces  the  Pala- 
tiUm  at  rest,  and  they  disperse. 


TABORIAN  CADET  JAVELINS. 


210 


CAPS  OF  UNIFORM  RANK  KNIGHTS,  PALATINE 
GUARDS  AND  TABORIAN  CADETS. 


211 


General  Laws 


GOVERNING 


TENTS  OF  MAIDS 


AND 


PAGES  OF  HONOR, 


212 


GENERAL    LAWS 

GOVERNING 

Tehjs  of  Maids  a^d  Pages  of  Honoi}. 


Instkuctions. 

1. — The  membership  of  Tents  shall  consist  of 
children  rano^ing:  from  the  as^es  of  six  months  to 
eighteen  years. 

2. — A  Girl  must  join  a  Tabernacle  when  she 
arrives  at  the  age  of  sixteen  years.  She  cannot  re- 
main a  member  of  the  Tent  after  that  age. 

3. — A  Boy  must  join  a  Temple  when  he  becomes 
eighteen  years  of  age.  He  cannot  remain  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Tent  after  that  age. 

4. — The  only  adult  members  of  a  Tent  shall  be  the 
Queen  Mother,  Vice-Queen  Mother,  and  Father  of 
the  Tent;  and  they,  to  hold  these  offices,  must  be 
members  in  good  standing  in  their  respective  Tab- 
ernacles or  Temples. 

5. — The  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  shall 
frame  a  Constitution  for  the  government  of  Tents. 

6. — The  Boys  of  the  Tent  shall  be  known  as 
Taborian  Cadets. 

7. — The  Tent  is  one  of  the  four  departments  in 
the  International  Order  of  Twelve.     It  is  governed 

213 


214 


by  its  own  laws,  and  is  subject  to  neither  the  Tem- 
ple nor  the  Tabernacle  Constitutions. 

8. — The  Queen  Mother  shall  have  full  control  or 
management  of  the  Tent,  and  will  be  held  account- 
able to  the  Grand  Body,  under  which  its  charter  is 
held,  for  the  manner  in  which  she  administers  the 
laws. 

9. — The  Queen  Mother  shall  represent  her  Tent 
in  the  Grand  Session,  and  make  a  full  report  of  the 
work  and  business  during  the  previous  Tent  year. 

10. — Tents  shall  elect  their  own  officers.  After 
a  Maid  or  Page  moves  to  place  a  candidate  in  nomi- 
nation— and  being  duly  seconded — a  standing  vote 
is  taken,  and  a  majority  of  the  votes  given  will 
elect.  The  Queen  Mother,  assisted  by  the  Father 
of  the  Tent,  shall  conduct  the  election. 

11. — The  Tent  has  no  secret  degrees.  The  only 
secrets  being  the  Password  and  Saluting  Sign. 

12. — When  a  Maid  arrives  at  the  age  of  sixteen 
years,  she  choses  the  Tabernacle  which  she  desires 
to  join.  The  Queen  Mother  gives  her  a  transfer, 
recommending  her  to  the  Tabernacle  which  she  de- 
sires to  join,  giving  her  age  and  stating  how  long 
she  has  been  a  member  of  the  Tent,  and  shall  cer- 
tify as  to  her  moral  character,  good  deportment, 
and  that  she  is  in  perfect  health.  A  Tabernacle 
shall  not  receive  a  member  from  any  Tent,  unless 
acceptable  as  regards  morality  and  good  deport- 
ment, and  is  in  perfect  health. 

13. — When  a  Taborian  Cadet  arrives  at  the  age 
of  eighteen  years,  he  must  choose  the  Temple 
which  he  desires  to  join.  The  Queen  Mother  gives 
him  a  transfer,  stating  how  long  he  has  been   a 


215 

member  of  the  Tent,  recommending  him,  giving 
his  age,  deportment,  and  general  health.  A  Tem- 
ple shall  not  receive  a  member  from  a  Tent,  unless 
his  deportment  is  good,  and  he  is  in  sound  health. 

14. — A  Maid  cannot  remain  a  member  of  a  Tent 
after  she  becomes  sixteen  years  of  age.  A  Taborian 
Cadet  cannot  remain  a  Page  in  the  Tent  after  he 
arrives  at  the  age  of  eighteen  years. 

15. — The  Tabernacle  to  which  the  Maid  is  trans- 
ferred, must  confer  all  the  degrees  upon  her,  and 
enroll  her  name.  (The  Maid  shall  pay  one  dollar 
when  her  name  is  enrolled.) 

16. — The  Temple  to  which  the  Page  is  transferred, 
shall  give  him  all  the  degrees.  (He  shall  pay  one 
dollar  on  being  enrolled.) 


GENERAL  LAWS. 


ARTICLE  I. 

REGALIA. 

Section  1. — The  regalia  of  the  Maids  shall  con- 
sist of  a  white  dress;  white  gloves;  a  pink  sash, 
four  inches  wide,  worn  from  either  right  or  left 
shoulder ;  a  wreath  of  leaves  and  flowers  for  head- 
wear,  and  a  Tent  badge. 

Sec.  2. — The  Taborian  Cadets  shall  be  neatly 
dressed  in  dark  blue  suits;  knee  pants  and  scarlet 
stockings;  coat  buttoned  up  in  front;  brown 
gloves;  scarlet  belt;  Tent  badge,  to  be  worn  on 
left  breast;  iron  or  tin-pointed  javelin,  five  feet 
long,  one  inch  and  a  half  in  thickness,  of  scarlet 
color;  black  cadet  cap,  with  silver  band,  and  letters 
T.  C.  thereon. 


216 


ARTICLE  II. 

Section  1. — The  banner  shall  be  two  by  three 
feet,  one  side  deep  scarlet,  with  the  name  of  the 
city  and  State  thereon.  The  other  side  light  green, 
with  the  name  and  number  of  the  Tent.  The  ban- 
ner is  trimmed  with  silver  lace  and  fringe. 

ARTICLE  III. 

Section  1. — The  regalia  of  the  Queen  Mother 
shall  be  a  white  dress  and  a  dark  pink  robe,  en- 
train; a  golden  coronet,  ornamented  with  white 
stones;  pink  gloves;  emerald  green  belt,  with  sil- 
ver clasps,  and  figures  333 ;  a  scepter,  made  to  suit 
the  taste.  When  she  does  not  wear  the  robe,  the 
regalia  is  an  emerald  green  collar,  trimmed  with 
twelve  silver  stars  and  silver  lace,  and  the  letters 
Q.  M.  thereon. 

Sec.  2. — The  Vice-Queen  Mother  wears  the 
same,  excepting  the  robe  and  scepter. 

Sec.  3.— The  Father  of  the  Tent  shall  wear  the 
Uniform  Rank  dress  and  regalia. 

ARTICLE  IV. 

Section  1. — The  officers  of  the  Tent  may  be  in- 
stalled by  any  Past  Q.  M.,  Grand  Deputy,  or  G. 
Q.  M. 

Sec.  2. — The  manner  of  installing  is  as  follows: 
All  the  officers  are  seated  in  their  proper  stations. 
Their  individual  duties  are  read  to  them  from  the 
Constitution,  commencing  with  the  Queen  Mother, 
and  so  on  until  all  the  officers  are  installed.  When 
this  is  finished,  the  Installing  Officer  calls  up  all 
those   present,  except  the  officers  who  have  just 


217 


been  installed;  he  then  declares  the  officers  in- 
stalled, and  all  give  the  twelve  claps — four  times 
three. 

Sec.  3. — At  the  conclusion  of  the  installing  cere- 
mony, the  Taborian  Cadets  may  drill,  or  have  other 
exercises,  under  the  orders  of  the  Queen  Mother. 
Every  Page  over  the  age  of  six  years  is  a  Cadet. 
The  Father  of  the  Tent  is  required  to  give  full  in- 
structions to  the  Tent  Marshal  in  the  drill  and 
march. 

ARTICLE  V. 

Section  1. — The  Queen  Mother  must  carefully 
instruct  the  children  in  deportment  and  politeness, 
and  teach  them  to  respect  persons  older  than  them- 
selves, to  love  the  members  of  the  Tent,  and  to 
meet  at  the  Sessions  of  the  Tent  punctually  at  the 
appointed  hour. 

Sec.  2. — The  Queen  Mother  must  not  permit 
noisy  and  unruly  children  to  remain  members  of 
the  Tent.  The  Queen  Mother  has  the  authority  to 
admit  and  enroll  as  many  children  in  her  Tent  as 
she  desires.  She  must  have  the  Constitution  and 
By-Laws  read  in  open  session  at  least  once  in  every 
quarter. 

Sec.  3. — The  Queen  Mother  must  report  quar- 
terly the  condition  of  her  Tent  to  the  Grand  Queen 
Mother,  as  also  the  number  of  members. 

Sec.  4. — Every  new  member  is  introduced  to  the 
Tent,  and  received  with  twelve  claps — four  times 
three — and  instructed  in  the  Password  and  Salut- 
ing Sign,  and  impressed  that  they  shall  keep  them 
secret  from  all  who  are  not  members  of  the  Tent. 


218 


ARTICLE  YL 

TENT  TREASURER. 

Section  1. — The  Queen  Mother  shall  be  the 
Treasurer  of  the  Tent.  She  shall  receive  all  moneys 
and  valuables  belonging  to  the  Tent,  and  shall  re- 
port monthly,  at  a  regular  meeting  of  the  Tent, 
the  amount  of  money  received  and  paid  out  during 
the  month. 

Sec.  2. — The  Yice-Queen  Mother  shall  receive 
all  money  paid  into  the  Tent,  and  account  for  it  in 
a  book  kept  for  that  purpose.  She  shall  also  keep 
an  account  of  all  money  drawn  from  the  Treasurer. 

Sec.  3.— Money  can  only  be  drawn  from  the 
Treasurer  on  a  warrant  signed  by  the  Y.-Q.  M., 
and  countersigned  by  the  C.  R.  K. 


FORM  OF  THE  TENT. 


c.  c. 


Q.M.Ms. 


Q.  M,         P.  Q.  Ms. 
C.  M.  P. 


Tisitors. 


C.  B.  B. 


C.  T.  K. 


TENT. 


F.  T. 


C.  T.  M. 


219 


'iJJ».../»^l..t«a» 


AND  PAGES 


820 


THE  TENT  BADGE. 


N«!t,H 


>^r"*^  1f^'  ^\k]i 


221 


222 


Officers  of  the  Tent. 

l._Queen  Mother  (Adult) Q.  M. 

2._Vice-Queen Mother  (Adult) V.-Q.  M. 

3.— Father  of  the  Tent  (Adult).. .  . . .  .F.  O.  T. 

4.— Chief  Maid  Presiding  (Girl) CM.  P. 

5.— Chief  Page  Vice  (Boy) C.  P.  V. 

6._Chief  Record  Keeper  (Girl) C.  R.  K. 

7. — Vice-Record  Keeper  (Boy) V.-R.  K. 

8.— Chief  of  the  Chest  (Girl) C.  O.  C. 

9.— Chief  Tent  Marshal  (Boy) C.  T.  M. 

lO.—Chief  Banner  Bearer  (Boy) C.  B.  B. 

11.— Chief  Cup  Bearer  (Girl) C.  C.  B. 

12.— Chief  Cup  Bearer  (Girl) C.  C.  B. 

13.— Chief  Cup  Bearer  (Girl) C.  C.  B. 

14.— Chief  Mace  Bearer  (Boy) C.  M.  B. 

15.— Chief  Mace  Bearer  (Boy) CM.  B. 

16.— Chief  Mace  Bearer  (Boy) C  M.  B. 

17.— Chief  Tent  Keeper  (Girl) C  T.  K. 

18._0uter  Tent  Keeper  (Boy) O.  T.  K. 

19. — Queen  Mother's  Messenger  (Girl).Q.  M.  M. 
20. — Queen  Mother's  Messenger  (Boy).Q.  M.  M. 

General  Regulations. 

1, — The  Queen  Mother  shall  represent  her  Tent 
at  the  Grand  Session  of  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle,  and  at  the  THennial  Grand  Session. 

2. — The  Tent  is  a  department  in  the  International 
Order  of  Twelve,  and  the  government  of  the  Tent 
is  under  the  control  of  the  Queen  Mother.  She  is 
responsible  for  any  violation  of  the  laws  of  the 
Order. 

3. — The  Taborian  Cadets  shall  be  commanded  by 
the  Chief  Tent  Marshal.     He  must  instruct  them  ia 


223 


the  drill  and  march.  The  Cadets  must  drill  regu- 
larly. 

4.  — The  Queen  Mother  shall  instruct  the  Maids 
and  Pages  in  mannerly  behavior,  the  use  of  polite 
language,  obedience^  to  parents,  teachers  and 
elderly  persons,  enforce  cleanliness  in  dress  and 
person,  and  inculcate  a  love  for  home  and  the 
Order. 

5. — A  Tent  may  make  its  own  By-Laws,  but  they 
shall  not  conflict  with  the  Constitution.  The  By- 
Laws  may  regulate  the  fees  for  membership,  the 
monthly  dues,  the  sick  dues  and  burial  benefits,  and 
the  day  and  hour  of  the  regular  meetings. 

6. — Queen  Mothers  will  be  held  responsible  should 
they  fail  to  enforce  the  general  laws  respecting 
Tents.  All  Tents  must  have  precisely  the  same 
kind  of  dress,  regalia  and  badges  as  the  General 
Laws  direct. 


FUNERAL  CEREMONY 


OF 


•t*XENXSi^ 


OF 


MAIDS  AlfD  PAGES  OF  M^ 


\ 


224 


FUNERAL  CEREMONIES 


OF 


Tents  of  Maids  and  Pages  of  Honoh_. 


Instructions. 

When  the  death  of  a  member  of  the  Tent  is  re- 
ported to  the  Queen  Mother,  it  is  her  first  duty  to 
consult  the  parents  or  guardians  of  the  child  re- 
garding the  arrangements  for  the  funeral.  The 
Tent  is  not  expected  to  pay  the  entire  expense ;  it 
pays  only  the  sum  allowed  by  the  By-Laws  of  the 
Tent.  If  the  parents  desire  to  have  the  child 
buried  according  to  the  ceremonies  of  the  Tent,  the 
Queen  Mother  proceeds  to  make  all  the  needed  pre- 
paration. The  members  of  the  Tent  are  called  to 
meet,  the  children  instructed,  and  other  Tents  are 
invited  to  attend. 

The  Funeral  Dress. 

The  dress  of  the  Maids  shall  be  black,  with  a 
small  white  collar ;  on  the  left  breast  they  shall  wear 
the  Badge  of  the  Tent ;  on  their  heads  a  wreath  of 
white  flowers  is  placed,  and  white  gloves  are  worn. 

The  Tabor i an  Cadets  shall  wear  the  reo:ulation 
dress,  cap  and  white  gloves;  their  javelins  have  a 
crape  bow  near  the  spear. 

(8— Dickson's  New  Manual.)  225 


226 


The  Queen  Mother  shall  wear  the  Tabernacle 
funeral  dress  and  her  Jewel  of  oflSce;  her  scepte'r  is 
to  be  craped. 

The  Vice-Queen  Mother  shall  wear  the  Tabernacle 
dress  and  her  Jewel  of  office. 

The  Father  of  the  Tent  shall  wear  a  black  suit, 
white  gloves,  and  his  Jewel  of  office. 

The  Pall-bearers — either  Maids  or  Cadets — shall 
wear,  in  addition  to  their  other  dress,  white  sashes. 

The  Banner  of  the  Tent  shall  be  trimmed  with 
white  and  black  crape. 

The  March. 

The  Maids  and  Pages  shall  assemble  at  a  desig- 
nated place  near  the  residence  of  their  deceased 
member,  and  form  in  line  of  march,  as  follows : 

^  Father  of  Tent. 

2  Queen  Mother  and  Vice-Queen  Mother. 
g  Cadets,  by  twos. 

-g  Banner. 

^  Maids,  by  twos. 


CO 


Family,  in  Carriages. 
Citizens,  in  Carriages. 

The  Knights  and  Daughters  will  show  their  re- 
spects by  wearing  their  Jewels  or  Badges  during 
the  ceremony. 


227 


Ceremony  at  the  Church. 

If  the  remains  are  conveyed  to  a  church,  when 
the  procession  arrives  there  the  lines  are  opened, 
and  the  casket  is  conducted  by  the  Father  of  the 
Tent  to  the  door  of  the  church,  where  the  minister 
meets  it.     They  then  enter  in  the  following  order; 

Minister  and  Father  of  the  Tent. 


Family. 
Queen  Mother  and  Vice-Queen  Mother. 
Maids,  by  twos. 
Cadets,  by  twos. 

When  the  casket  is  rested,  the  C.  M.  P.  sits  at 
the  head  of  casket,  and  the  C.  P.  V.  at  the  foot. 
The  Q.  M.,  V.-Q.  M.  and  F.  of  T.  in  front  of  the 
altar,  and  the  Maids  and  Pages  in  the  rear  of  the 
family 

The  minister  then  opens  the  services,  and  preaches 
the  sermon.  After  which  the  Queen  Mother  or 
Father  reads  the  following  (all  stand)  : 

Maids  and  Pages,  we  assemble  at  this  hour,  in 
obedience  to  a  solemn  duty  which  we  owe  to  the 

memory  of  one  who  was  a  loving  member  of 

Tent,  No.  — .  We  mourn  the  loss  of  a  near  and 
dear  child.     A  golden  link  in  the  chain  that  formed 


228 


around  our  Tent  is  broken,  and  a  precious  name  is 
transferred  from  our  roll-book  to  the  roll-call  in 
the  Land  of  Eternal  Bliss.  Children  of  Tabor,  we 
who  are  in  life  now  are  reminded  that,  though 
young  in  years,  we  may  be  called  away  at  any  hour. 
Let  us  trust  and  have  faith  in  God,  our  Savior. 
To-day  we  bid  farewell  to  (give  the  name),  and 
pray  that  it  may  be  our  happy  lot  to  meet  her  (or 
him)  in  the  Paradise  of  Eternal  Rest.  Mothers, 
Fathers,  Brothers  and  Sisters,  remember  that  one 
by  one  we  depart  from  earth.  Let  us  pray  to  our 
Heavenly  Father,  that  he  may  unite  all  the  family 
in  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven,  where  there  will  be 
no  more  separation. 

The  following  is   then   sung   by  the  Maids  and 
Pages  : 

**  When  blooming  youth  is  snatched  away.^'' 

I. 

■    When  blooming  youth  is  snatched  away 
By  death's  resistless  hand, 
Our  hearts  the  mournful  tribute  pay 
Which  pity  must  demand. 

II.  ; 

While  pity  prompts  the  rising  sigh, 

Oh,  may  this  truth,  impressed 
With  awful  power,  **I,  too,  must  die," 

Sink  deep  in  every  breast  I 
III. 
Let  this  vain  world  engage  no  more: 

Behold  the  opening  tomb! 
It  bids  us  seize  the  present  hour; 

To-morrow,  death  may  oome. 

IV. 

Oh,  let  us  fly — to  Jesus  fly  I 

Whose  powerful  arm  can  save; 
Then  shall  our  hopes  ascend  on  high, 

And  triumph  o'er  the  gravel 


229  ^ 

V. 

Great  God !  Thy  sovereign  grace  impart, 

With  cleansing,  healing  power; 
This  only  can  prepare  the  heart 

For  death's  surprising  hour. 

The  Queen  Mother  then  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are 
seated. 

The  Chief  Record  Keeper  reads  from  the  record 
of  the  Tent  the  name  and  age  of  the  decea-ed,  how 
long  he  (or  she)  was  a  member  of  the  Tent,  and 
the  date  of  birth  and  death,  parents'  names,  and  date 
of  burial.  (This  record  must  be  carefully  written 
in  the  record  book,  before  the  funeral  takes  place.)* 

The  Queen  Mother  gives  three  raps,  and  all  the 
Maids  and  Pages  stand,  with  their  arms  folded 
across  their  breasts.  The  Queen  Mother  then  leads 
the  invocation,  and  the  children  respond. 

Invocation. 

Queen  Mother: — Lord  Jesus,  Thou  hast  said: 

Response  : — Suffer  little  children 

Q.  M. : — To  come  unto  me, 

Res. : — ^And  forbid  th<;m  not, 

Q.  M. : — For  of  such  is  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven. 

Res. : — O  Lord,  teach  our  hearts  to  praise  Thee. 

Q.  M. : — Thou  art  full  of  love  and  kindness. 

Res.  : — Lord  Jesus,  bless  and  save  our  parents. 

Q.  M. : — O  Lord,  bless  the  officers  and  children 
of  the  Tents. 

Res. : — God,  in  mercy  hear  our  prayers. 

Q.  M. : — Lord,  save  the  world,  and  bless  all  man- 
kind. 

Res. : — Lord  Jesus,  bless  Thy  church  and  people. 

Q.  M. : — In  God  alone  there  is  safety. 


230 


Res. : — Lord,  hear  our  prayer,  and  bless  and 
comfort  all  that  mourn. 

Q.  M. : — Lord,  dismiss  us  with  Thy  blessing. 

Closing  of  the  Church  Service. 

The  Doxology  is  sung  (the  congregation  stand- 
ing). The  minister  then  dismisses  them,  and  re- 
quests the  congregation  to  be  seated  until  the  Tent 
marches  out. 

While  some  familiar  hymn  is  sung,  the  children 
of  the  Tents  march  around  and  view  tlie  remains, 
they  then  pass  out  and  form  in  open  ranks  on  the 
outside.  The  congregation  is  then  permitted  to 
view  the  remains,  whereupon  they  pass  out.  The 
family  bids  a  last  farewell,  and  the  casket  is  carried 
out  in  the  following  order:  First,  the  minister; 
second,  the  Queen  Mother  and  Vice-Queen  Mother; 
third,  the  Father  of  the  Tent;  and  fourth,  the  cas- 
ket, with  the  family  following.  All  pass  through 
the  lines  to  the  hearse. 

The  March  to  the  Cemetery. 
Q.  M.     V.-Q.  M.     F.  of  T.,  and  Pastor. 


cc         h1s\ 

hj 

u       KiJ^ 

^ 

^   11 

^       mm 

cr 

'^        IH 

o 

^      U  B 

» 

1             wl  JgE 

i-j 

^            W  Jg 

o 

^       vm 

•-s 

P^       W 

r/i 

Family. 

The  Children  of  the  Tents. 

The  Friends  of  the  Family. 

(All  of  the  above  in  carriages  or  vehicles.) 


231 


Ceremony  at  the  Grave. 

At  the  grave  the  children  of  the  Tents  open 
ranks,  and  the  casket  is  conveyed  through  in  the 
same  manner  in  which  it  left  the  church,  and  is 
placed  over  the  grave.  The  children  form  a  circle 
around  the  casket,  with  the  Q.  M.,  V.-Q.  M. ,  F.  of 
T.  and  the  minister  at  the  head,  and  the  family  at 
the  foot. 

The  children  join  hands,  and  the  following,  or 
some  other  familiar  hymn,  is  sung: 

CM. 

'■''It  is  appointed  unto  men  once  to  die.'''* 
I. 
If  I  must  die,  Lord  let  me  die 
With  hope  in  Jesus'  blood — 
The  blood  that  saves  from  sin  and  guilt, 
And  reconciles  to  God. 

II. 
If  I  must  die,  then  let  me  die 

In  peace  with  all  mankind, 
And  change  these  fleeting  joys  below 

For  pleasures  all  refined. 

III. 
If  I  must  die — and  die  I  shall — 

Let  some  kind  seraph  come. 
And  bear  me  on  his  friendly  wing 

To  my  celestial  home. 

IV. 

Of  Canaan's  land,  from  Pisgah's  top, 

May  I  but  have  a  view, 
Though  Jordan  should  o'erflow  its  banks, 

I'll  boldly  venture  through. 

Prayer  by  the  minister  or  the  Father  of  the  Tent. 
The  casket  is  then  lowered  into  the  grave.  The 
children  forming  the  chain  raise  their  hands  until 


232 


the  casket  arrives  at  the  bottom  of  the  grave,  they 
then  drop  their  hands  and  break  the  chain,  they 
then  fold  their  arms  across  their  breasts  until  the 
ceremony  is  ended. 

The  minister  or  the  Father  of  the  Tent  concludes 
the  ceremony,  as  follows : 

Forasmuch  as  it  hath  pleased  Almightv  God,  in 
His  wise  providence,  to  take  out  of  this  world  the 
soul  of  our  deceased  child,  we  therefore  commit  its 
body  to  the  ground — earth  to  earth,  ashes  to  ashes, 
dust  to  dust;  looking  for  the  general  resurrection 
in  the  last  day,  and  the  life  of  the  world  to  come, 
through  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ,  at  whose  second 
coming  in  glorious  majesty  to  judge  the  world,  the 
earth  and  the  sea  shall  give  up  their  dead;  and  the 
corruptible  bodies  of  those  who  sleep  in  Him  shall 
be  changed,  and  made  like  unto  His  own  glorious 
body,  according  to  the  mighty  workings  whereby  He 
is  able  to  subdue  all  things  unto  Himself. 

An  appropriate  hymn  is  sung,  and  the  ceremony  is 
closed  by  the  Lord's  Prayer :  Our  father  who  art  in 
heaven,  hallowed  be  Thy  name ;  Thy  kingdom  come ; 
Thy  will  be  done  on  earth,  as  it  is  in  Heaven;  give 
us  this  day  our  daily  bread ;  and  forgive  us  our  tres- 
passes, as  we  forgive  those  who  trespass  against 
us;  and  lead  us  not  into  temptation,  but  deliver  us 
from  evil.     Amen! 

Benediction,  and  all  return  to  their  homes. 


CEREMONY 


OP 


AYING  CopEIi-STOp. 


233 


CEREMONY 

OP 

Laying  Corner-Stone. 

:  o  : 

The  laying  of  corner-stones  of  churches,  public 
buildings  and  bridges,  is  a  part  of  the  duty  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve. 

The  ceremony  of  laying  the  corner-stone  shall 
be  under  the  control  of  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and' Tabernacle,  or  of  tlie  Grand  Temple 
and  Tabernacle. 

Parties  desiring  the  Order  to  lay  their  corner- 
stone, must  make  application  to  the  Chief  Mentor 
of  the  nearest  Temple,  stating  the  time  and  place 
at  which  they  wish  the  ceremony  to.  be  performed. 
This  petition  must  be  signed  by  the  committee  that 
has  charge  of  the  building.  A  Chief  Mentor,  when 
he  receives  the  petition,  must  lay  the  matter  before 
the  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  with  any  recommendation 
that  he  and  the  other  Chief  Mentors  ( if  there  are 
other  Temples  in  the  city  or  town)  have  to  make. 
The  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  when  he  receives  the  pe- 
tition and  the  recommendation  (if  favorable),  issues 
an  official  notice  to  the  Chief  Mentors  to  prepare 
for  a  procession,  and  to  assist  in  laying  the  corner- 
stone. 

234 


235 


On  the  day  on  which  the  ceremony  is  to  be  per- 
formed, the  Uniform  Rank  Knights  and  Palatine 
Guards  shall  assemble  in  their  hall  in  full  dress 
regalia.  The  Chief  Grand  Mentor  (if  present) 
opens  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  and  ap- 
points Grand  Officers  pro-tem.,  if  the  regular  offi- 
cers are  not  present.  (If  the  C.  G.  M.  cannot  at- 
tend, he  shall  appoint  a  Deputy  to  represent  him. ) 

If  the  Daughter  Priestesses  take  part  in  the  pro- 
cession, they  shall  wear  full  dress  regalia,  or  they 
may  wear  their  Jewels  and  Badges. 

The  Vice-Grand  Mentor  carries  the  ewer  with 
earth  (sand). 

The  Chief  Grand  Scribe  carries  the  ewer  with 
corn. 

The  Chief  Grand  Treasurer  carries  the  ewer  with 
pure  water. 

The  procession  is  under  the  command  of  the 
Grand  Drill-Master  and  his  aides. 

Form  of  Procession. 

Chief  Sentinel. 

Music. 

Taborian  Cadets. 

Uniform  Rank. 

Palatine  Guards. 

Past  Chief  Mentors. 

Chief  Mentor. 

Banner. 

C.  G.  St. 

C.  G.  S. C.  G.  T. 

y.-G.  M. 
Grand  Officers. 


236 


Past  Grand  Officers. 

«  Past  Chief  Grand  Mentors. 

Chief  Grand  Mentor. 

Guard,  Guard, 

(with  Drawn  Sword.)  (with  Drawn  Sword.) 

I.  C.  G.  Sentinel. 

I.  G.  Officers. 

I.  C.  G.  M. 

Three  Guards,  with  Drawn  Swords. 

Maids  of  Honor,  in  Vehicles. 

Priestesses,  in  Carriages. 

When  the  procession  arrives  at  the  place  where 

the  stone  is  to  be  laid,  the  ranks  are  opened,  ^nd 

the  officer  who  is  delegated  to  lay  the  stone,  marches 

through,  followed  by  those  who  were  in  the  rear; 

they  march  around  the  stone  four  times,  and  then 

form  a  circle  around  it.     The  Daughter  Priestesses 

form  around  the  Knights;    the  following  hymn  is 

then  sung : 

L.  M. 

Laying  the  foundation. 

I. 

When  to  the  exiled  seer  was  given 
A  rapt'rous  foregaze  into  Heaven, 
All  glorious  though  the  visions  were, 
Yet  he  beheld  no  temple  there. 

II. 
The  new  Jerusalem  on  high 
Hath  one  pervading  sanctity; 
No  sin  to  mourn,  no  grief  to  mar — 
God  and  the  Lamb  its  temple  are. 

III. 
But  we,  frail  sojourners  below, 
The  pilgrim-heirs  of  guilt  and  woe. 
Must  seek  a  tabernacle,  where 
Our  scattered  souls  may  blend  iu  prayer. 


237 

IV. 

Oh  Thou !  who  o'er  the  ch«rubini 
Didst  shine  in  glories  veiled  and  dim, 
With  purer  light  our  temple  cheer. 
And  dwell  in  unveiled  glory  here. 

The  Grand  Chief: — Sir  Knights,  Uncover!  Let 
us  bow  our  heads,  while  our  Chief  Grand  Orator 
invokes  the  blessings  of  our  Heavenly  Father. 

Prayer. 

Almighty  and  Everlasting  Ruler  of  Heaven  and 
Earth,  Thou  most  Holy  and  Eternal  Father,  in  the 
name  of  our  Lord  and  Savior,  hear  our  prayers  and 
grant  our  petitions  this  day.  In  love  and  mercy 
let  Thy  presence  be  felt.  Bless  the  multitude  as- 
sembled here.  Gracious  Father,  accept  the  work 
which  the  Knights  and  Daughers  of  Tabor  have  as- 
sembled to  perform  in  Thy  name.  Grant  us  the 
power  of  quickening  grace  to  prepare  us,  that  we 
may  receive  Thy  approval  in  laying  this  corner- 
stone. Bless  the  builder  and  workmen,  protect  them 
from  danger,  guide  and  direct  them  by  Thy  unerring 
counsel,  so  that  this  house  may  be  completed  to  Thy 
glory,  and  be  a  benefit  and  blessing  to  all  who  may 
enter  within  its  doors.  Unto  Thee,  the  Only  Eter- 
nal God,  and  to  Thine  Only  Begotten  Son,  Jesus 
Christ,  our  Lord  and  Redeemer,  we  will  give  honor, 
glory  and  praise  now  and  forever.     Amen ! 

C.  G.  M. :— Sir  Knights,  Cover! 

A  select  piece  of  music,  appropriate  for  the  occa- 
sion, is  rendered  by  the  band. 

C.  G.  M. : — Ladies  and  gentlemen,  we  have  as- 
sembled to-day  as  members  of  the  International 
Order  of  Twelve,  to  lay  the  foundation  stone  of  a 


238 


building  to  be  occupied  for  a  (give  the  purpose  for 
which  the  house  is  to  be  built).  One  of  the  doc- 
trines of  our  Order  is  to  encourage  all  and  any  un- 
dertakings which  have  for  their  object  the  palliation 
of  the  sufferings  of  the  human  race.  In  obedience 
to  the  commands  of  our  Order,  we  have  assembled 
here  to-day  to  take  part  in  laying  the  corner-stone 
of  this  building.  We  feel  honored  at  our  being  in- 
strumental in  laying  the  stone  that  is  to  firmly  bind 
the  building  together.  We  apply  the  secret  lock 
to  the  four  corners  and  find  them  true,  having  passed 
upon  every  square.  The  large  attendance  here 
bespeaks  the  amount  of  interest  which  the  friends  and 
citizens  share  in  the  erection  of  this  building.  May 
it  be  an  honor  and  benefit  to  this  community,  and  may 
success  crown  every  effort  for  good  that  has  its 
origin  in  this  house. 

G.  D.-M. :— Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Handle 
Swords !     Draw  Swords ! !     Present  Swords  ! ! ! 

The  C.  G.  M.  places  the  box  in  the  cavity,  and 
the  stone  is  lowered  to  its  resting  place  and  then 
fixed  firmly  by  the  architect  (the  band  in  the  mean- 
time rendering  some  appropriate  music). 

G.  D.-M. : — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Carry,  Com- 
rades ! 

C.  G.  M.  Let  us  now  listen  to  the  C.  G.  O.,  who 
will  read  from  the-Holy  Scriptures: 

Thus  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts:  Consider  your 
ways. 

Go  up  to  the  mountain,  and  bring  wood,  and  build 
the  house;  and  I  will  take  pleasure  in  it,  and  I  will 
be  glorified,  saith  the  Lord. 


239 


Ye  looked  for  much,  and,  lo,  it  came  to  little; 
and  when  ye  brought  it  home,  I  did  blow  upon  it. 
Why?saiththe  Lord  of  Hosts.  Because  of  Mine 
house  that  is  waste,  and  ye  run  every  man  unto  his 
own  house. 

Therefore  the  heaven  over  you  is  stayed  from 
dew,  and  the  earth  is  stayed  from  her  fruit. 

And  I  called  for  a  draught  upon  the  land,  and 
upon  the  mountains,  and  upon  the  corn,  and  upon 
the  new  wine,  and  upon  the  oil,  and  upon  that 
which  the  ground  bringeth  forth,  and  upon  men 
and  upon  cattle,  and  upon  all  the  labor  of  the  land. 

Then  Zerubbabel,  the  son  of  Shealtiel,  and  Joshua, 
the  son  of  Josedech,  the  high  priest,  and  all  the 
remnant  of  the  people,  obeyed  the  voice  of  the 
Lord,  their  God,  and  the  words  of  Haggdi,  the 
prophet,  as  the  Lord,  their  God,  had  sent  him,  and 
the  people  did  fear  before  the  Lord. 

Then  spake  Haggai,  the  Lord's  messenger  in  the 
Lord's  message,  unto  the  people,  saying,  I  am  with 
you,  saith  the  Lord. 

And  the  Lord  stirred  up  the  spirit  of  Zerubbabel, 
the  son  of  Shealtiel,  governor  of  Judah,  and  the 
spirit  of  Joshua  the  son  of  Josedech,  the  high  priest, 
and  the  spirit  of  all  the  remnant  of  the  people ;  and 
they  came  and  did  work  in  the  house  of  the  Lord  of 
Hosts,  their  God. 

In  the  four  and  twentieth  day  of  the  sixth  month, 
in  the  second  year  of  Darius,  the  king. 

In  the  seventh  month,  in  the  one  and  twentieth 
day  of  the  month,  came  the  word  of  the  Lord  by 
the  prophet  Haggai,  saying; 


240 


Speak  now  to  Zerubbabel,  the  son  of  Shealtiel, 
governor  of  Judali,  and  to  Joshua,  the  son  of  Jose- 
dech,  the  high  priest,  and  to  the  residue  of  the 
people,  saying: 

Yet  now  be  strong,  O  Zerubbabel,  saith  the 
Lord;  and  be  strong,  O  Joshua,  son  of  Josedech, 
the  high  priest ;  and  be  strong,  all  ye  people  of  the 
land,  saith  the  Lord,  and  work:  for  I  am  with  you, 
saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts : 

According  to  the  word  that  1  covenanted  with 
you  when  ye  came  out  of  Egypt,  so  My  spirit  re- 
maineth  with  you :   fear  ye  not. 

For  thus  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts :  Yet  once,  it 
is  a  little  while,  and  I  will  shake  the  heavens,  and 
the  earth,  and  the  sea,  and  the  dry  land. 

And* I  will  shake  all  nations,  and  the  desire  of  all 
nations  shall  come ;  and  I  will  fill  this  house  with 
glory,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

The  silver  is  Mine,  and  the  gold  is  Mine,  saith 
the  Lord  of  Hosts. 

The  glory  of  this  latter  house  shall  be  greater 
than  of  the  former,  saith  the  Lord  of  Hosts :  and 
in  this  place  will  I  give  peace,  saith  the  Lord  of 
Hosts. 

G.  D.-M. :  —Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Carry 
Swords ! 

Music  by  the  band. 

C.  G.  M.:— Sir  Chief  Grand  Orator,  you  will 
please  mark  the  Taborian  signs  and  the  perfect 
figures  on  the  top  of  the  stone.  (''777—333—12" 
is  marked  on  the  stone  with  green  chalk.) 

G.  D.-M. : — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Present 
Swords ! 


241 


C.  G.-M. : — The  emblematic  figures  **333  convey 
a  deep  significance,  and  prove  the  faith  the  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor  have  in  an  overruling 
Providence.  We  believe  in  a  triune  God — the 
Father,  Son  and  Holy  Ghost.  May  He  bless  this 
building  and  the  inhabitants  of  this  city. 

G.  D.-M.:— Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Salute! 
(They  salute  three  times.) 

C.  G.  M. :— The  mystic  ««777"  emblematizes  the 
triple  perfection  of  the  International  Order  of 
Twelve,  founded  upon  the  solid  principles  of  justice, 
equity,  benevolence,  prudence,  loyalty,  unity  and 
impartiality.  May  these  principles  govern  the 
business  of  this  building. 

G.  D.-M.: — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Salute! 
(They  salute  four  times.) 

C.  G.-M.  : — We  place  the  symbolized  number 
**12"  on  this  stone  to  express  our  unwavering 
confidence  and  trust  in  the  motto  of  our  Order: 
In  God  alone  is  safety  I 

G.  D.-M.: — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Form  a 
Wall  of  Steel! 

C.  G.  M. : — Sir  Vice-Grand  Mentor,  we  will  now 
consecrate  this  stone  with  earth.  (The  V.-G.  M. 
scatters  the  earth  over  the  stone.  He  stands  by 
the  side  of  the  Chief .  )  May  the  building  to  be  erected 
upon  this  stone  be  plentifully  endowed  with  the 
riches  of  this  earth. 

C.  G.  M. :— Sir  Chief  Grand  Scribe  (the  C.  G. 
S.  stands  by  the  side  of  the  Chief),  we  will  now 
set  apart  this  house  that  is  to  be  erected  on  this 
stone  (he states  the  purpose,  and  then  the  C.  G.  S. 
scatters  the  grains  of  wheat  or  corn  over  the  stone.) 


242 


May  there  be  gathered  within  these  walls  the  golden 
harvest  of  success ;  may  the  seeds  of  eternal 
happiness  be  planted  here  and  grow  up  to  the  glory 
of  God  and  be  garnered  in  the  heavenly  rest,  to  live 
forever. 

C.  G.  M. :— Sir  Chief  Grand  Treasurer  (the 
C.  G.  T.  stands  by  the  side  of  Chief),  with  this 
pure  water  we  consecrate  the  house  to  be  erected 
upon  this  stone  to  Purity,  Peace  and  Harmony. 
(The  C.  G.  T.  pours  the  water  around  the  outside 
of  the  stone,  touching  the  four  sides.)  Water  is 
an  emblenj  of  purity.  May  all  who  enter  this  house 
live  a  pure  life ;  may  they  inherit  the  waters  of  re- 
generation, and  by  a  life  in  the  service  of  the  Lord 
be  enabled  to  drink  from  the  fountain  of  eternal  life 
in  the  building  not  made  with  hands  eternal  in  the 
Kingdom  of  Bliss  and  Glory. 

C.  G.  M.  strikes  the  stone  four  distinct  times 
with  his  mallet,  and  says: — By  virtue  of  the 
authority  in  me  vested,  I  now  and  here  announce  that 
this  foundation  stone  is  truly  laid  and  firmly  laid 
and  tried ;  may  the  Lord  bless  the  work. 

G.  D.-M. : — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Present 
Swords  I  Return  Swords!  I  (If  there  is  a  collection 
to  be  made,  now  is  the  time  to  announce  it.) 

Music  by  the  band.  The  Knights  and  Daughters 
of  Tabor  form  a  procession  and  march  by  the  stone 
slowly,  and  contribute  what  they  may  want  to  give 
on  the  stone.     The  strangers  and  citizens  follow. 

The  return  march  to  their  hall  is  made  in  the 
same  manner  in  which  they  marched  out.  On  ar- 
riving: in  the  hall  the  C.  G.  M.  then  declares  the 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  at  rest. 


"BKig.y  *»wn 


p§M7frwrrr¥¥¥: 


P3  3 

ill 


^4i 


Belt  Clasp— X  Size. 
SABA  MERGE  CORONETS  AND  BELT  CLASP. 

243 


BADGE  OF  DAUGHTER  PRIESTESSES. 


244 


In  Solo  Deo  SalusI 


DEDICATING  CEREMONY 


OF 


\miW  ^i  Daughter?  of  TaboP 


HKLLS. 


245 


DEDICATION  CEREMONY 

OF 

KnjGHTS  AND  Daughters  of  Tabor  Halls. 


The  dedication  ceremony  of  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle halls  may  be  either  public  or  private. 

Instructions. 

1.  The  hall,  before  it  is  dedicated,  must  be  fur- 
nished with  all  the  necessaries  for  the  work  and 
business  of  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor. 

2.  The  ceremony  must  be  performed  by  a  C.  G. 
M.,P.  C.  G.  M.,  oraD.  G.  M. 

3.  The  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Houses  within 
the  square,  with  their  full  furniture  in  sight,  and 
candles  burning. 

4.  The  Daughters  are  marched  into  the  hall,  in 
full  dress  and  regalia;  the  officers  in  their  stations, 
and  seated. 

5.  The  Knights,  in  full  dress  and  regalia,  as- 
semble in  the  ante-rooms,  or  some  place  near  the 
hall,  and  march  into  and  around  the  hall  three 
times,  and  are  seated;  officers  in  their  stations. 
Music;  or  the  foNowing  hymn  is  sung: 

246 


U7 
I. 

How  lovely  are  Thy  dwellings  fair, 
Oh,  Lord  of  Hosts!     How  dear 

The  pleasant  Tabernacles  are, 
Where  Thou  dost  dwell  so  near. 

II. 

My  soul  doth  long,  and  fainting,  sigh 

Thy  Temples,  Lord,  to  see; 
My  heart  and  flesh  aloud  do  cry, 

O,  living  God,  for  Thee! 

III. 

Happy,  who  in  Thy  house  reside, 
Where  Thee  they  ever  praise; 

Happy,  whose  strength  in  Thee  doth  bide, 
And  in  their  hearts  Thy  ways. 


They  journey  on  from  strength  to  strength, 

With  joy  and  gladsome  cheer. 
Till  all  before  our  God,  at  length. 

In  Zion  do  appear. 

The  C.  M.  of  the  Temple  gives  three  raps,  and 
all  stand.  He  then  says: — We  have  assembled  for 
the  purpose  of  dedicating  this  hall  to  the  work  and 
business  of  the  Knights  and  Daughters   of  Tabor. 

I  now  take  pleasure  in   introducing   Sir 

,  the  Dedicating  Officer. 

The  C.  M.  then  presents  the  gavel  to  the  Dedi- 
cating Officer. 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  one  rap,  and  all  are 
seated.  He  then  reads,  as  follows  : — Sir  Knights 
and  Daughters,  the  solemn  duties  of  the  hour,  and 
the  importance  of  the  business  that  has  called  us 
together,  cannot  be  overestimated  in  an  Order  like 
ours,  fulfilling  a  high  and  holy  duty  in  this  Chris- 
tian age.     We  are  banded  together  for  mutual  aid 


248 


and  protection;  to  help  each  other  in  sickness;  to 
comfort  each  other  in  distress;  to  support  disabled 
members;  to  care  for  the  lonely  orphans  of 
Knights  or  Daughters,  and  make  glad  the  heai  ts  of 
mourning  widows.  This  is  the  misssion  of  our  be- 
loved Order.  Then,  how  necessary  it  is  that  we 
should,  in  all  our  work  and  business,  remember  an 
overruling  Providence,  and  ask  that  He  may  pre- 
side over  our  counsels,  and  give  us  wisdom  to  suc- 
cessfully conduct  and  guide  the  affairs  of  our  Or- 
der, that  it  may  continue  a  blessing  for  all  time  to 
come.  Let  us  not  only  dedicate  our  hall  to  the 
Lord  God,  but  give  ourselves  unto  His  keeping. 
The  Ceremony. 
The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  three  raps,  and  all 
stand.     He  then  gives  the  following  commands: — 

1.  Sir  Knights,  Form  a  Hollow  Square  !  (The  C. 
M.,  C.  O.  and  C.  P.  in  the  center  of  the  square, 
near  the  Temple  House.) 

2.  Sir  Knights,  Handle  Swords  I 

3.  Sir  Knights,  Draw  Swords  I 

4.  Sir  Knights,  Present  Swords  ! 

5.  Sir  Knights,  Deposit  Swords !  (The  swords 
are  laid  down  pointing  to  the  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
Houses.) 

6.  Sir  Knights,  To  the  Right  About  Face  I 
(Turn,  face  out.)  Deposit  Helmets! ! 

7.  Sir  Knights,  To  the  Left  About  Face!  (Turn, 
face  in. ) 

8.  Let  us  pray. 

The  Knights  will  kneel  on  their  right  knees,  with 
their  arms  across  their  breasts,  the  Daughters  stand- 


249 


The  C.    O.,    standing,    will   read   the  following 

prayer :. — 

Prayer. 

O,  Eternal  God,  mighty  in  power,  and  majesty 
incomprehensible,  whom  the  heaven  of  heavens 
cannot  contain,  much  less  the  walls  of  Temples 
made  with  hands,  and  who  yet  hast  been  graciously 
pleased  to  promise  Thy  especial  presence  wherever 
two  or  three  of  Thy  faithful  servants  shall  assemble 
in  Thy  name  to  offer  up  their  praises  and  supplica- 
tions unto  Thee ;  vouchsafe,  O  Lord,  to  be  present 
with  us,  who  are  here  gathered  together,  with  all 
humility  and  readiness  of  heart,  to  consecrate  this 
place  to  the  honor  of  Thy  great  name.  Accept,  O 
Lord,  this  service  at  our  hands,  and  bless  it  with 
such  success  as  may  tend  most  to  Thy  glory,  and 
the  furtherance  of  our  happiness,  both  temporal 
and  spiritual,  through  Jesus  Christ,  our  blessed 
Lord  and  Savior.     Amen  I 

All  respond: — In  God  alone  is  safety  ! 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  one  rap,  and  all 
stand. 

The  Chief  Mentor  reads  the  following  lesson  : 
Lesson. 

Lord,  what  is  man,  that  Thou  takest  knowledge 
of  him !  or  the  son  of  man,  that  Thou  makest  ac- 
count of  him ! 

Man  is  like  to  vanity ;  his  days  are  like  a  shadow 
that  passe th  away. 

Bow  Thy  heavens,  O  Lord,  and  come  down ; 
touch  the  mountains,  and  they  shall  smoke. 

Cast  forth  lightning,  and  scatter  them ;  shoot  out 
Thine  arrows,  and  destroy  them. 


250 

Send  Thine  hand  from  above,  rid  me,  and  deliver 
me  out  of  great  waters,  from  the  hand  of  strange 
children. 

Whose  mouth  speaketh  vanity,  and  their  right 
hand  is  a  right  hand  of  falsehood. 

I  will  sing  a  new  song  unto  Thee,  O  God !  upon 
a  psaltery  and  an  instrument  of  ten  strings  will  I 
sing  praises  unto  Thee. 

It  is  He  that  giveth  salvation  unto  kings ;  who 
delivereth  David,  His  servant,  from  the  hurtful 
sword. 

Rid  me,  and  deliver  me  from  the  hand  of  strange 
children,  whose  mouth  speaketh  vanity,  and  their 
right  hand  is  a  riorht  hand  of  falsehood. 

That  our  sons  may  be  as  plants  grown  up  in  their 
youth ;  that  our  daughters  may  be  as  corner-stones 
polished  after  the  similitude  of  a  palace. 

That  our  garners  may  be  full,  affording  all 
manner  of  store ;  that  our  sheep  may  bring  forth 
thousands  and  ten  thousands  in  our  streets. 

That  our  oxen  may  be  strong  to  labor;  that  there 
be  no  breaking  in,  nor  going  out;  that  there  be  no 
complaining  in  our  streets. 

Happy  is  that  people,  that  is,  in  such  a  case ;  yea, 
happy  is  that  people,  whose  God  is  the  Lord. 

The  Dedicating  Officer,  standing  near  the  Temple 
House,  says: — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  Form  the 
Living  Chain !  (The  Knights  clasp  hands  all  around, 
so  as  to  form  a  continuous  chain.  The  command 
is  then  given  to  the  Daughters  to  form  a  living 
chain  around  the  Knights.) 

The  Chief  Preceptress  reads  from  Judges,  chap- 
ter IV : 


251 


And  the  children  of  Israel  again  did  evil  in  the 
sight  of  the  Lord  when  Ehud  was  dead. 

And  the  Lord  sold  them  into  the  hand  of  Jabin, 
king  of  Canaan,  that  reigned  in  Hazor,  the  captain 
of  whose  host  was  Sisera,  which  dwelt  in  Harosheth, 
of  the  Gentiles. 

And  the  children  of  Israel  cried  unto  the  Lord ; 
for  he  had  nine  hundred  chariots  of  iron;  and 
twenty  years  he  mightily  oppressed  the  children  of 
Israel. 

And  Deborah,  a  prophetess,  the  wife  of  Lapidoth, 
she  judged  Israel  at  that  time. 

And  she  dwelt  under  the  palm  tree  of  Deborah, 
between  Ramah  and  Bethel,  in  Mount  Ephraim ;  and 
the  children  of  Israel  came  up  to  her  for  judgment. 

And  she  sent  and  called  Barak,  the  son  of  Abinoam, 
out  of  Kedesh-naphthali,  and  said  unto  him ;  Hath 
not  the  Lord  God  of  Israel  commanded,  saying: 
Go,  and  draw  toward  Mount  Tabor,  and  take  with 
thee  ten  thousand  meu  of  the  children  of  Naphthali, 
and  of  the  children  of  Zebulon? 

And  I  will  draw  unto  thee,  to  the  river  Kishon, 
Sisera,  the  captain  of  Jabin's  army,  with  his  chariots 
and  his  multitude,  and  I  will  deliver  him  into  thine 
hand. 

And  Barak  said  unto  her,  if  thou  wilt  go  with  me, 
then  I  will  go ;  but  if  thou  wilt  not  go  with  me, 
then  I  will'not  go. 

And  she  said,  I  will  surely  go  with  thee ;  notwith- 
standing the  journey  that  thou  takest  shall  not  be 
for  thine  honor;  for  the  Lord  shall  sell  Sisera  into 
the  hand  of  a  woman.  And  Deborah  arose,  and 
went  with  Barak  to  Kedesh. 


252 


And  Barak  called  Zebulon  and  Naphthali  to  Ke- 
desh ;  and  he  went  up  with  ten  thousand  men  at  his 
feet;  and  Deborah  went  up  with  him. 

Now  Heber,  the  Kenite,  which  was  of  the  children 
of  Hobab,  the  father-in-law  of  Moses,,  had  severed 
himself  from  the  Kenites,  and  pitched  his  tent  unto 
the  plain  of  Zaanannim,  which  is  by  Kedesh. 

And  they  shewed  Sisera  that  Barak,  the  son  of 
Abinoam,  was  gone  up  to  Mount  Tabor. 

And  Sisera  gathered  together  all  his  chariots, 
even  nine  hundred  chariots  of  iron,  and  all  the 
people  that  were  with  him,  from  Harosheth,  of  the 
Gentiles,  unto  the  river  of  Kishon. 

And  Deborah  said  unto  Barak:  Up,  for  this  is  the 
day  in  which  the  Lord  hath  delivered  Sisera  into 
thine  hand ;  is  not  the  Lord  gone  out  before  thee  ? 
So  Barak  went  down  from  Mount  Tabor,  and  ten 
thousand  men  after  him. 

And  the  Lord  discomfited  Sisera,  and  all  his 
chariots,  and  all  his  host,  with  the  edge  of  the 
sword  before  Barak ;  so  that  Sisera  lighted  down  off 
his  chariot,  and  fled  away  on  his  feet. 

But  Barak  pursued  after  the  chariots,  and  after 
the  host,  unto  Harosheth  of  the  Gentiles ;  and  all 
the  host  of  Sisera  fell  upon  the  edge  of  the  sword ; 
and  there  was  not  a  man  left. 

All  give  three  claps,  and  say,  **Well  Done!  Well 
Done!!  Well  Done!  !1 

The  C.  M.  says: — Attention,  Sir  Knights.  To 
the  Right  About  Face  I  Recover  Helmets !  To 
the  Left  About  Face  I  Recover  Swords  I  Present 
Swords  I  Return  Swords  I  Form  Procession  I 
March  Around  the  Hall,  Daughters  in  front! 


253 


They  march  around  the  hall  four  times  while  the 
band  renders  some  appropriate  music;  or,  in  lieu 
thereof,  the  following  hymn  may  be  sung  : 

I. 

The  spacious  earth  is  all  the  Lord's, 

The  Lord's  her  fulness  is ; 
The  world,  and  they  that  dwell  therein, 

By  sovereign  right  are  His. 

II. 

He  framed  and  fix'd  it  on  the  seas; 

And  His  almighty  hand 
Upon  inconstant  floods  has  made 

The  stable  fabric  stand. 

III. 
But  for  Himself  this  Lord  of  all 

One  chosen  seat  design'd ; 
Oh!  who  shall  to  that  sacred  hill 

Deserved  admittance  find? 

IV. 

The  man  whose  hands  and  heart  are  pure, 
Whose  thoughts  from  pride  are  free; 

Who  honest  poverty  prefers 
To  gainful  perjury. 

V. 

This,  this  is  he,  on  whom  the  Lord 

Shall  shower  His  blessings  down; 
Whom  God,  His  Savior,  shall  vouchsafe 

With  righteousness  to  crown. 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  three  raps,  and 
says : — Sir  Knights  and  Daughters,  please  form  a 
living  circle  around  the  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
Houses.  ( The  Dedicating  Officer,  C.  M. ,  and  C.  P. 
in  the  center.) 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  two  raps  on  the 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  Houses,  and  says: — In  the 
name  of  the  Lord  God   of  Heaven,  Earth  and  the 


254 


Universe,  in  whom  is  all  glory  and  power,  I  do 
solemnly  dedicate  this  hall  to  the  work  of  the 
Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor. 

All  give  one  clap,  and  pronounce:  May  He  bless 
the  work ! 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  fo«r  raps  on  the 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  Houses,  and  says : — In  the 
name  of  Barak,  the  son  of  Abinoam,  I  do  solemnly 
dedicate  this  hall  to  Charity  and  Friendship. 

All  give  two  claps,  and  pronounce :  May  we  hear 
and  obey! 

The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  six  raps  on  the 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  Houses,  and  says: — In  the 
name  of  Deborah,  the  prophetess,  I  do  solemnly 
dedicate  this  hall  to  Honor  and  Virtue. 

All  give  three  claps,  and  say :  May  we  remem- 
ber! All  join  hands,  and  the  C.  O.  offers  the  fol- 
lowing invocation : 

O,  Most  Glorious  Lord,  we  acknowledge  that  we 
are  not  worthy  to  offer  unto  Thee  anything  belong- 
ing unto  us;  yet  we  beseech  Thee,  in  Thy  great 
goodness,  graciously  to  accept  the  dedication  of  this 
place  to  Thy  service,  and  to  prosper  this,  our  under- 
taking. Receive  the  prayers  and  intercessions  of  all 
those  who  shall  call  upon  Thee  in  this  house,  and 
give  them  grace  to  prepare  their  hearts  to  serve 
Thee  with  reverence  and  godly  fear ;  affect  them 
with  an  awful  apprehension  of  Thy  divine  majesty, 
and  a  deep  sense  of  their  own  unworthiness;  that, 
so  approaching  Thy  sanctuary  with  lowliness  and 
devotion,  and  coming  before  Thee  with  clean 
thoughts  and  pure  hearts,  with  bodies  undefiled, 
and  minds  sanctified,  they  may  always  perform  a 


255 


service  acceptable  to  Thee,  through  Jesus  Christ, 
our  Lord.     Amen !     Amen ! !     Amen  ! ! ! 

Dedicating  Officer  gives  one  rap,   all  are  seated. 

Any  Chief   Preceptress    present  may  then  read 

the  following : 

I. 
Ye  boundless  realms  of  joy, 
Exalt  your  Maker's  fame; 
His  praise  your  song  employ 
Above  the  starry  frame : 
Your  voices  raise, 
Ye  Cherubim 
And  Seraphim, 
To  sing  His  praise. 
II. 
Thou  moon,  that  rul'st  the  night, 

And  sun  that  guid'st  the  day, 
Ye  glitfriug  stars  of  light, 
To  Him  your  homage  pay : 

His  praise  declare. 
Ye  heavens  above, 
And  clouds  that  move 
In  liquid  air. 
III. 
Let  them  adore  the  Lord, 

And  Praise  His  holy  name. 
By  whose  almighty  word 
They  all  from  nothing  came; 
And  all  shall  last, 
From  changes  free; 
His  firm  decree 
Stands  ever  fast. 

IV. 

Let  earth  her  tribute  pay : 

Praise  Him,  ye  dreadful  whales, 
And  fish  that  through  the  sea 
Glide  swift  with  glitt'ring  scales; 
Fire,  hail,  and  snow, 
And  misty  air. 
And  winds,  that  where 
He  bids  them  blow. 


256 


The  Dedicating  Officer  gives  four  raps,  and  all 
stand;  he  then  says: — The  dedicating  of  halls  is 
legally  set  apart  for  the  business  and  work  of  the 
Temples  of  Knights  of  Tabor,  Tabernacles  of 
Daughter  Priestesses  of  Tabor,  the  Royal  House  of 
Media,  and  Tents  of  Maids  and  Pages  of  Honor. 
May  success  attend  their  efforts.  (He  gives  one 
rap,  and  all  are  seated.) 

If  there  is  an  oration  to  be  delivered,  or  if  the 
Uniform  Rank  Knights  or  Palatine  Guards  desire  to 
drill,  now  is  the  time,  after  which  the  ceremony 
closes. 


'In  Solo  Deo  Salus!" 


SWO[[D  T/CTICS  jl!(D  ^li 


OF     THE 


NiFORM  Rank  Rights, 


AND 


PALATINE  GUARDS, 


ALSO     THE 


JAYELIN  DRILL  OF  TABORIAN  CADETS. 


(9— Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


257 


INSPECTION  DIAGRAM. 


258 


DIAGRAM  No.  2. 


CM 


Open  Order 


g 

Q 

0 


C.S.B. 


Cross 


CSB 



259 


DIAGRAM  No.   3. 


Perfect  Nninber 


u 


□ 


Perfect  Letter 


Open  wall 

1    1    1    1    1    1     1    1 

C.{$,B, 

- 

Triangle 


SWORD  TACTICS  AND  DRILL 

OF    THE 

UNIFORM  RANK  KNIGHTS, 

AND 

PAIvATTINK    OUARDS. 

.    :o: 

Command. 

1.  Cautionary,  which  is :  Attention,  Sir  Knights ! 

2.  The  preparatory,  which   indicates  the    move- 
ment. 

3.  The  command  of  execution,  which  causes  the 
movement. 

Position. 

1.  Heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  as  possible. 

2.  The  feet  turned  out  equally;  stand  easy. 

3.  The  knees  straight. 

4.  The  body  erect,  inclining  a  little  forward. 

5.  Shoulders  square,  and  falling  naturally. 

6.  The  arms  hanging,  with  elbows  near  the  body. 

7.  The  head  erect  and  to  the  front. 

8.  The  chin  drawn  in. 

9.  The  eyes  fixed  straight  to  the  front. 

10.  The  tallest  man  to  the  right  of  the  line. 

11.  The  smallest  man  to  extreme  left  of  the  line. 

12.  Sir  Knights  will  fall  in,  with  swords  in  scab- 
bard. 

261 


262 


To  Form  the  Lines. 
To  form  the  lines,  the  C.  D.-M.  will  command : — 

1.  Attention,  Sir  Knights.     Fallln  ! 

(The  Knights  will  form  in  one  rank,  face  to  the 
right.) 

2.  Front  Face! 

(Raise  the  right  foot  slightly  and  turn  on  the 
left  heel  half  around,  shoulders  slightly  touching.) 

3.  Right  Dress ! 

(Each  Knight  will  turn  his  head  to  the  right  and 
place  himself  on  a  line  with  the  Sir  Knight  next  to 
him  on  his  right.  The  '*left  dress"  is  executed  by 
the  same  movements  reversed.) 

4.  Front  I 

(The  head  will  resume  the  natural  position.) 

5.  From  the  Right,  Count  Twos  I 

(At  this  command  the  Sir  Knights  will  count 
from  right  to  left  in  a  distinct  voice,  *'One,  Two; 
One,  Two;"  until  through  the  ranks.) 

6.  Form  Divisions,  Right  Face! 

(The  Sir  Knights  will  all  face  to  the  right;  Divi- 
sion No.  2  will  place  itself  on  the  right  of  Division 
No.  1,  thus  forming  the  Sir  Knights  into  files  of 
two  abreast.  No.  1  constituting  the  first  Division 
and  No.  2  the  second.) 

7.  Officers  in  Ranks ! 

(At  this  command  the  V.-M.  will  take  his  place 
to  the  right  of  the  Second  Division,  the  C.  S.  to 
the  right  of  the  First  Division,  the  C.  S.  B  in  the 
center. ) 

8.  Form  Lines,  and  Receive  the   C.  M.    (or  P. 

p.)! 

The  V.-M.  will  command: — 


263 


9.  Second  Division,  By  File  Left,  March! 

(At  tliis  command  tlie  Second  Division  will  march 
promptly  to  the  left.) 

10.  By  File  Left,  March  ! 

(Until  they  arrive  opposite  the  First  Division, 
the  V.-M.  will  command.  After  placing  his  divi- 
sion exactly  opposite  the  First  Division  by  ''right  or 
left  dress,"  he  will  resume  his  place  to  the  right  of 
his  division.  While  this  movement  is  being  ex- 
ecuted, the  C.  S.  will  command  the  First  Division.) 

11.  (1)  Mark  Time!   (2)  Front! 

12.  First  Division,  Front !  Right  Dress!    Front! 
(The  Sir   Knights  will  thus  be  formed   in    two 

parallel  lines,  facing  inward.  The  C.  D.-M.  ad- 
vances to  the  C.  M.'s  station,  salutes,  and  says: 
Sir  Chief,  the  lines  are  now  ready  for  inspection.) 
The  C.  M.  takes  his  place  to  the  right  between 
the  two  divisions,  standing  firm.  The  C.  D.-M. 
then  commands: — 

13.  Attention,  Sir  Knights !  Handle  Swords  ! 
Draw  Swords!  Carry  Swords!  Salute  the  C.  M. 
(or  P.  P.)  !     Present  Swords! 

The  C.  M.  passes  down  through  the  lines,  then 
takes  his  place  on  the  extreme  left,  and  com- 
mands:— 

14.  Sir  Knights,  Carry  Swords! 

15.  Sir  Knights,  Form  Wall  of  Steel ! 

16.  Sir  Knights,  Take  Taborian  Position! 

17.  Sir  Knights,  Carry  Swords! 

18.  Sir  Knights,  Present  Swords  ! 

19.  Sir  Knights,  Guard  the  Head! 

20.  Sir  Knights,  Guard  the  Body  ! 

21.  Sir  Knights,  Form  Wall  of  Steel  I 


264 


22.  Sir  Knights,  Carry  Swords! 

23.  Sir  Knights,  Present  Swords  I 

24.  Sir  Knights,  Carry  Comrade! 

25.  Sir  Knights,  Give  the  Taborian  Rest! 

26.  Sir  Knights,  Salute! 

27.  Sir  Knights,  Carry  Swords! 
The  C.  D.-M.  commands: — 

28.  Sir  Knights,  Present  Swords! 

(The  C.  M.  passes  up  through  the  lines  and  takes 
his  seat. ) 

29.  Sir  Knights,  Return  Swords ! 

Marching  Drill. 

The  C.  D.-M.  commands: — 

30.  Second  Division,  Left  Face ! 

31.  First  Division,  Right  Face  ! 

32.  Second    Division,    By   File   Right,    March! 
(They  march  until  they  reach  the  proper  place  at 

the  right  of  the  First  Division.) 

33.  Second  Division,  Halt ! 

34.  Sir  Knights,  Mark  Time  ! 

(In  stepping  off,  always  begin  with  the  left 
foot.) 

35.  Sir  Knights,  By  File  Right,  March ! 

(At  each  turn  that  is  made,  repeat  command: 
By  File  Right ! ) 

36.  March  Down  the  Center  of  the  Hall! 

37.  First  Division,  File  Right;  Second  Division, 
File  Left,  March  ! 

(This  movement  separates  the  divisions — and 
unites  them — in  their  march  and  counter-march 
around  the  hall.) 

38.  First  Division,  By  File  Left,  March  I 


'265 

39.  Second  Division,  By  File  Right,  March! 
(As  they  march  around  the  hall   and  pass  each 

other,  they  present  swords.  ) 

40.  First  Division,  By  File  Right,  March ! 
(This  movement  places  the  First  Division  by  the 

side  of  the  Second  Division. ) 

41.  Form  Taborian  Cross ! 

(This  is  formed  by  the  odd  numbers  15,  17,  or 
21.  It  will  take  some  practice,  and  every  man  must 
know  his  place.  When  the  command  is  given,  ten 
Knights  in  the  Second  Division  form  across  the  hall, 
and  eleven  Knights  of  the  First  Division  march  in, 
thus  forming  the  Cross.     See  diagram. ) 

42.  Form  Taborian  T! 

(The  same  twenty-one  Knights  form  the  T — the 
Second  Division  horizontal,  and  the  First  Division 
perpendicular.     See  diagram.) 

43.  Form  Taborian  A ! 

(Nine  of  the  Second  Division  form  the  left  line, 
and  ten  of  the  First  Division  form  the  right  line, 
and  one  from  each  division  form  the  center.  They 
march  with  arms  folded.     See  diagram.) 

44.  Divisions,  Form  in  Open  Order! 
(See  diagram.) 

45.  Sir  Knights,  Form  in  Single  File ! 

(The  Second  Division  marches  around  and  falls 
in  the  rear  of  the  First  Division, — the  First  Divi- 
sion marking  time.) 

46.  Sir  Knights,  Halt!  Front  Face!  Right  Dress! 

To  Form  Three  Divisions. 

47.  Sir  Knights,  Count  by  Threes! 

(At  this  command,  the  Knights  will  count  from 


266 


right  to  left:  '*One,  Two,  Three;  One,  Two, 
Three" — thus  along  the  line.) 

The  C.  D.-M.  will  now  command: — 

48.  Sir  Knights,  Form  Divisions !  Right  Face  I 
(The  Sir  Knights  will  face  to  the  right,  and  No. 

2  will  take  position  to  the  right  of  No.  1,  and  No. 

3  will  take  position  to  the  right  of  No.  2.  Mark 
time.) 

49.  Forward,  March  I 

50.  Open  Order! 

(At  this  command  the  Knights  will  take  positions 
from  three  to  seven  feet  apart,  to  the  right  and 
left.) 

There  are  several  fancy  positions  which  may  be 
taken  by  these  divisions,  but  care  must  be  had  that 
each  Knight  knows  his  proper  place.  Do  not  at- 
tempt them  in  public,  until  you  can  go  through 
them  perfectly  in  the  hall. 

51.  Form  the  Perfect  Number — 777  ! 

(The  Three  Sevens  cannot  be  formed  with  less 
than  twenty-seven  Knights.  When  the  order  is 
given,  three  Knights  from  each  division,  by  one 
backward  step,  from  the  right  or  left,  take  position 
to  the  left.     See  diagram.  ) 

52.  Sir  Knights,  Resume  your  Place  in  Divisions  I 

53.  Sir  Knights,  Form  the  Perfect  Letter  N  ! 
(To  form  this  letter  properly,  the  divisions  must 

be  seven  feet  apart.  The  Second  Division  will  rest 
their  right  upon  the  right  of  the  First  Division, 
and  their  left  upon  the  left  of  the  Third  Division. 
See  diagram. ) 

54.  Sir  Knights,  Resume  Places  and  Close  Up 
Ranks  I 


267 


There  are  several  other  beautiful  positions  that 
can  be  taken  by  these  divisions  : 
The  Triangle— A . 
TheOpen  Wall— n. 
The  Letter  Z. 
(^8ee  diagram.) 

To  Form  Four  Divisions. 

55.  Attention,  Sir  Knights.     Fall  In! 
(Always  fall  in  with  face  to  the  right.) 
Th«  C.  D.-M.  commands : — 

56.  Front  Face ! 

57.  Right  Dress! 

58.  From  the  Eight,  Count  by  Fours! 

59.  Form  Divisions  I  Right  Face  I 

(No.  2  will  quickly  take  place  to  the  right  of  No. 
1;  No.  3  to  the  right  of  No.  2;  No.  4  to  the  right 
of  No.  3.) 

These  divisions  may  be  thrown  into  many  fancy 
positions,  and  the  C.  D.-M.  can  exercise  his  skill  in 
maneuvering  the  Sir  Knights.  (1)  Open  Columns; 
(2)  Two  Divisions;  (3)  Three  Divisions ;  (4)  Four 
Divisions ;  ( 5 )  The  Hollow  Square ;  ( 6)  The  Double 
Square  TL;  (7)  The  letter  **M,"  and  various 
other  fancy  positions. 

Notice. 

To  become  perfect  in  the  Tactics  and  Drill,  we 
must  practice  regularly,  and  all  must  attend  if  they 
would  perform  well.  One  balk  will  throw  the  entire 
divisions  into  confusion. 


268 


Sword  Exercise. 

60.  Draw  Swords ! 

(First  Motion. — At  the  word  *'draw/'  seize  the 
scabbard  with  the  left  hand  and  grasp  the  sword 
with  the  right  hand,  and  draw  it  out  two  inches. 

Second  Motion. — At  the  word  *'swords,"  draw 
the  sword  from  the  scabbard  and  extend  the  right 
hand  to  the  front,  and  drop  the  sword  in  the  hollow 
of  the  elbow. 

Third  Motion. — Bring  the  right  hand  to  the 
thigh,  the  elbow  a  little  bent,  holding  the  sword 
between  the  thumb  and  two  fingers,  the  blade  per- 
pendicular, being  position  of  **Carry  Swords.") 

61.  Present  Swords! 

(Raise  the  sword  perpendicularly,  the  flat  of  the 
blade  opposite  the  right  eye,  the  guard  at  the  height 
of  the  shoulder,  and  the  elbow  supported  on  the 
body.) 

62.  Carry  swords! 

(Extend  the  hand  to  the  front,  and  replace  the 
sword,  as  in  the  second  and  third  motions  of 
«*Draw  Swords.") 

63.  Taborian  Position !     , 

(First Motion. — Same  as  **Present  Swords!" 
Second  Motion. — Drop  the  point  of  the  sword 
by  extending  the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  will 
rest  on  the  right  side  of  the  thigh,  the  point  of  the 
sword  resting  on  the  floor  or  ground,  about  eighteen 
inches  from  the  right  foot;  the  Knight  to  your 
right  takes  position,  his  left  foot  touching  the 
sword. ) 

64.  Guard  the  Head ! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  ** Present  Swords.** 


269 

Second  Motion. — Hold  the  sword  in  a  horizontal 
position  above  the  head,  about  six  inches  in  front  of 
the  forehead.) 

65.  Guard  the  Body ! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  ''Present  Swords," 
except  in  this  case  the  blade  is  outward. 

Second  Motion. — Cut  downward,  and  bring  the 
sword  to  carry.) 

66.  Form  a  Wall  of  Steel ! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  "Present  Swords.'* 
Second  Motion. — Bring  your  sword   down  hori- 
zontally, the  right  hand  resting  on  the  center  of  the 
breast,  the  point  of  your  sword  resting  on  the  breast 
of  the  Knight  to  your  left. ) 

67.  Carry  Comrade ! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  "Present  Swords." 
Second   Motion. — Lay   you   sword   across    your 
shoulders  and  grasp  the  point  with  your  left  hand.) 

68.  Taborian  Rest! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  "Present  Swords." 
Second  Motion. — Rest   the  sword  in  the  hollow 

of  the  elbow  joint,  and  grasp  the  blade  near  the 

guard  with  the  left  hand.) 

69.  Salute! 

(First  Motion. — Same  as  "Present  Swords." 
Second  Motion. — Drop  the  point  of  the  sword  by 
extending  the  arm,  so  that  the  right  hand  may  be 
brought  to  the  side  of  the  right  thigh,  the  nails  up, 
the  elbow  well  back  from  the  body.  ) 

70.  Return  Swords ! 

(First  Motion. — Bring  the  sword  to  the  position 
of  "Present,"  and  seize  the  scabbard  with  the  left 
hand  near  its  mouth. 


270 


Second  Motion. — Drop  the  point;  turn  the  head 
to  the  left,  and  return  the  sword ;  bring  your  head 
to  front,  and  drop  the  hands  to  their  natural  posi- 
tion by  the  side.) 

71.    Sir  Knights,  Disperse!  Return  to  Quarters! 

The  Uniform  Rank  Knights  and  Palatine  Guards 
may  practice  all  the  various  sword  exercises,  maneu- 
vers and  drills. 

When  the  Palatine  Guards  drill,  instead  of  ad- 
dressing them  as  Sir  Knights,  say  Sir  Guards. 
The  Prince  Marshal  is  styled  Captain  Marshal. 


In  Solo  Deo  Salus!" 


JAVELIN  EXERCISES 


AND 


'^lDRII-1-4^ 


OF    THE 


TABORIAN  CADETS, 


2T1 


jAVELifi  Exercises  >nd  D[[ill 

OF   THE 

Taborian  Cadets. 

:o: 

The  javelins  are  made  about  five  feet  in  length, 
steel-pointed,  and  one  inch  in  diameter. 

The  ranks  are  formed  in  the  same  manner  as 
designated  in  the  Inspection  Diagram. 

Inspection. 

The  Chief  Tent  Marshal  addresses  the  Chief 
Mentor: — Sir  Chief,  the  Cadets  are  ready  for  in- 
spection. 

The  Chief  steps  to  the  right  front.  The  C.  T. 
M.  then  commands  : — 

1.  Attention,  Taborian  Cadets!     Form  Arch! 
(First  Motion. — Present  javelins,  holding  them 

about  one  foot  from  the  heel  of  the  javelin. 

Second  Motion. — Carry  the  right  foot  about 
eighteen  inches  to  the  front;  extend  the  javelin 
arm,  and  cross  the  head  of  the  javelin,  about  three 
inches  from  the  point,  with  that  of  the  Cadet 
opposite. ) 

The  C.  T.  M.  passes  down  through  the  ranks 
slowly.  On  arriving  at  the  extreme  left,  he  turns 
and  faces  to  the  right,  whereupon  he  commands: — 

2.  Cadets,  Ground  Javelins  I  / 
(First  Motion. — ^Present  javelins,  aod  bring  the 

feet  together. 

27^ 


273 


Second  Motion. — Let  the  javelin  slide  down  the 
right  side  until  the  heels  rest  on  the  ground  (or 
floor),  holding  it  between  the  thumb  and  two 
fingers ;  arm  extended  down,  javelin  resting  against 
the  right  shoulder. ) 

3.  Cadets,  Repel  «Tavelins  ! 

(First  Motion. — Grasp  the  javelin  about  the  cen- 
ter, and  present. 

Second  Motion. — Drop  the  javelin  hand  to  the 
right  hip,  and  let  it  firmly  rest  there,  the  point  of 
the  javelin  to  the  front,  and  the  heel  to  the  rear — 
the  point  about  one  foot  higher  than  the  heel.  Ad- 
vance the  left  foot  about  eighteen  inches.) 

4.  Carry  Javelins ! 

(First  Motion. — Present  javelins,  grasping  the 
javelin  about  one  foot  above  the  heel. 

Second  Motion. — Drop  the  hand  behind,  so  that 
it  will  rest  on  the  right  small  of  the  back,  nails  out ; 
arm  over  the  javelin  point,  above  the  head;  javelin 
near  the  right  side  of  the  face.) 

5.  Take  Position,  Right  and  Left ! 

(First  Motion. — Grasp  the  javelin  about  the 
center,  and  present. 

Second  Motion. — Bring  the  hand  to  the  breast, 
so  that  the  javelin  will  extend  horizontally  across 
the  breast.  The  First  Division  will  side-step  to  the 
right,  and  the  Second  Division  will  side-step  to  the 
left,  until  the  point  and  heel  just  touch  the  Cadets 
on  either  side.) 

6.  Poise  Javelins ! 

(First  Motion. — Present,  grasping  the  center  of 
the  javelin. 

Second  Motion. — Rest  the  javelin  in  the  hollow 
between  the  thumb  and  forefinger;  raise  the  hand 


274 


until  it  is  on  a  level  with  the  right  eye,  and  point 
front. ) 

7.  Ascend  Mount  Tabor ! 

(First  Motion. — Bring  the  javelin  into  a  position 
with  the  right  hand  about  eighteen  inches  from  its 
heel. 

Second  Motion. — -Gra^sp  the  javelin  with  the  left 
hand,  near  the  center,  and  let  the  right  hand  rest 
on  the  hip ;  elevate  the  point  about  one  foot.  Keep 
time,  or  imitate  walking.) 

8.  Division,  Rest! 

(First   Motion. — Bring  the  javelin  to  a  present. 
Second   Motion. — Rest  the  heel,   and   lean   the 

point,  on  the  right  shoulder,  and  grasp  the  javelin 

with  both  hands.) 

9.  Present  Javelins  I 

10.  Right  Face  I 

11.  Mount  Javelins ! 

(Throw  the  javelin  across  the  shoulders,  and 
grasp  it  with  both  hands.) 

12.  Present  Javelins  I 

13.  Front  Face  I 

14.  Right  About  Face  I 

15.  Repel  Javelins  I 

16.  Present  Javelins ! 

17.  Left  About  Face  I 

18.  Form  Arch  I 

The  C.  T.  M.  may  exercise  in  the  various  maneu^ 
vers,  and  marching  or  division  drills.  The  Taborian 
Cadets  shall  appear'  in  full  regulation  uniform  on 
all  public  occasions.  Due  respect  must  be  paid  to 
the  Queen  Mother  or  Grand  Officers,  by  opening 
ranks  to  receive  them. 


In  Solo  Deo  SalusI" 


GENERAL  RULES 


FOR    THE 


GOVERNMENT  OF  THE  BUSINESS 


OF     THE 


INTERNATIONAL 

ORDER  OF  TWELVE, 


275 


RULES  OI=  ORDER. 


:  o  :■ 


1.  The  Presiding  Officer,  at  the  proper  hour, 
takes  his  (or  her)  seat,  and  gives  one  rap;  the  offi- 
cers and  members  clotlie  themselves  in  proper 
regalia,  and  take  their  respective  seats.  The 
Temple,  Tabernacle  or  Palatium  is  then  opened  in 
regular  order. 

2.  The  regular  business  of  the  Order  shall  be 
attended  to  without  a  motion,  as  prescribed  in  the 
**Rules  of  Business." 

3.  During  the  reading  of  the  minutes,  communi- 
cations or  other  papers,  silence  shall  be  observed. 
After  the  minutes  are  read,  if  they  are  found  cor- 
rect, and  if  no  objections  are  interposed  as  to  their 
correctness,  they  shall  stand  approved;  if,  however, 
there  is  a  question  as  to  their  correctness,  the  mem- 
ber who  questions  their  correctness  shall  state  what 
is  not  correct,  and  move  that  the  correction  be  made. 

4.  Members  and  visitors  must  come  to  the  hall 
cleanly  dressed,  wearing  the  working  regalia,  and 
white  gloves. 

5.  A  member,  when  addressing  the  Temple, 
Tabernacle  or  Palatium,  shall  stand  and  address 
the  Presiding  Officer  (giving  title  of  office). 

6.  During  the  time  that  the  Temple,  Tabernacle 
or  Palatium  is  open  and  doing  business,  no  refresh- 

276 


277 


ments,   smoking  or  chewing  tobacco  will  be  per- 
mitted. 

7.  When  Grand  Officers  visit  a  Temple,  Taber- 
nacle or  Palatium,  they  must  be  received  standing. 

8.  All  officers  in  open  Session  shall  be  addressed 
by  the  title  of  their  office,  all  members  as  Daughter, 
or  Sir  Knight;  these  titles  are  to  be  used  only  in 
open  Temples,  Tabernacles  or  Palatiums,  or  w^hen 
on  duty  or  parade. 

9.  When  it  is  necessary  to  get  the  sense  of  the 
Session  on  any  question  or  resolution,  it  must  be 
done  by  motion,  duly  seconded,  stated  by  the  Presid- 
ing Officer,  and  decided  by  the  voting  sign. 

10.  When  an  office  is  made  vacant  by  death,  res- 
ignation or  for  any  other  cause,  the  Presiding 
Officer  shall  appoint  a  member  to  discharge  the 
dulies  until  the  next  regular  election. 

11.  The  Presiding  Officer  shall  control  the  busi- 
ness  of  the  Session,  and  determine  the  time  of  clos- 
ing without  a  motion. 

12.  The  regular  business  of  the  Session  shall  be 
transacted  according  to  the '''Rules  of  Business." 
(See  Constitution. ) 

13.  The  Presiding  Officer  shall  be  responsible  to 
the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  for  the  manner 
in  which  he  administers  the  laws  of  the  Order,  and 
he  shall  decide  all  doubtful  questions  of  Constitu- 
tion, regulations  and  order;  the  decisions  which  he 
renders  shall  be  final,  until  reversed  by  the  C.  G. 
M.,  or  the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

14.  No  member  shall  speak  more  than  once  on 
the  same  subject,  until  all  who  wish  to  speak  have 
spoken ;  nor  more  than  twice,  nor  longer  than  ten 


278 


minutes,    without   permission   from   the   Presiding 
Officer. 

15.  A  member  speaking  shall  stand  in  front  of 
either  the  Temple  or  Tabernacle  House  (as  the  case 
may  be),  and  address  the  Presiding  Officer,  confine 
himself  to  the  question  at  issue,  and  avoid  person- 
alities and  irrelevant  language. 

16.  A  member  shall  not  be  interrupted  while 
speaking,  except  to  explain. 

17.  A  motion  shall  not  be  in  order  until  it  is 
seconded,  and  stated  by  the  Presiding  Officer.  A 
motion  must  be  made  in  writing,  when  requested  by 
theC.  S.,  C.  R.  orR.  P. 

18.  A  motion  to  lie  on  the  table  shall  be  decided 
without  debate. 

19.  A  motion  to  postpone  carries  the  question 
over  to  the  next  meeting. 

20.  When  a  question  is  laid  on  the  table,  it  can- 
not be  taken  up  until  the  next  meeting,  and  then 
only  by  a  majority  vote. 

21.  A  motion  to  reconsider  can  be  acted  upon 
only  at  the  same  Session ;  it  must  be  made  by  a 
member  who  voted  in  the  majority. 

22.  The  first  named  on  all  special  committees 
shall  be  the  Chairman. 

23.  In  all  business  meetings,  they  shall  proceed 
according  to  the  Order  of  Business. 

24.  A  member  wishing  to  retire  from  the  Session 
dunng  the  evening,  must  come  before  the  Temple 
(or  Tabernacle)  House,  and  make  the  request  to  the 
Presiding  Officer.  He  announces  the  request,  and 
if  a  majority  are  in  favor  of  it,  it  is  granted. 


279 


25.  Members  wishing  to  retire  for  a  few  minutes, 
shall  rise  from  their  seats  and  stand,  and  give  the 
saluting  sign;  the  Presiding  Officer,  on  observing 
them,  returns  the  sign,  which  signifies  that  permis- 
sion is  granted. 

26.  A  member  crossing  the  hall  during  the  Ses- 
sion must  give  the  saluting  sign. 

27.  The  strictest  order  and  decorum  must  be  ob- 
served during  the  hours  of  the  Session. 

28.  Should  an  officer  be  absent  from  a  meeting, 
the  Presiding  Officer  shall  fill  the  seatpro-tein. 

29.  A  motion  for  indefinite  postponement,  if  de- 
cided in  the  affirmative,  quashes  the  proposition 
entirely,  and  is  not  debatable. 

30.  A  motion,  when  regularly  made  and  seconded, 
and  proposed  from  the  Chair,  cannot  be  withdrawn 
without  the  consent  of  the  Session. 

31.  Any  member  may  rise  to  a  point  of  order, 
whenever  the  speaker  does  not  confine  his  (or  her) 
remarks  to  the  question,  or  is  not  quoting  the  law 
properly. 

32.  The  previous  motion  cannot  be  entertained 
until  two  members  have  spoken  for  and  against  the 
subject  at  issue.  The  previous  question  is  not  de- 
batable. 

33.  A  new  motion  or  resolution  cannot  be  made 
until  the  one  under  consideration  is  disposed  of,  ex- 
cept a  motion  to  lay  on  the  table  or  previous 
question ;  these  are  not  debatable. 

34.  A  motion  to  postpone  to  a  certain  time,  or  a 
substitute,  or  an  amendment,  or  to  refer  to  a  com- 
mittee, is  in  order  when  a  motion  or  resolution  is 
pending. 


280 


35.  A  member,  when  speaking,  must  not  use 
personalities  or  discourteous  language.  Should  this 
occur,  however,  then  the  Presiding  Officers  shall 
call  the  speaker  to  order.  If  a  member  fails  to  come 
to  order  when  requested,  the  Presiding  Officer  shall 
fine  the  speaker,  and  he  must  remain  silent  until  the 
fine  is  paid,  or  remitted  by  the  Session  or  Presiding 
Officer. 

36.  A  motion  to  lay  an  amendment  on  the  table, 
if  it  is  carried,  removes  the  whole  question  from  the 
Session  for  the  time,  and  if  it  is  not  taken  from  the 
table,  it  is  indefinitely  postponed ;  but  it  can  be 
taken  up  for  further  consideration  at  any  future 
time. 

37.  Privileged  questions  are  in  order  at  any  time 
during  the  Session,  such  as :  first,  motion  for  the 
order  of  the  day;  second,  a  motion  relating  to  in- 
dividual members;  third,  questions  of  inquiry; 
fourth,  questions  of  the  rights  and  privileges  of  the 
Session;  fifth,  when  a  member  desires  to  be 
correctly  informed  on  any  matter  that  is  before  I  he 
Session;  and  sixth,  when  a  member  desires  to  ex- 
plain a  matter  wherein  he  has  been  misunderstood. 

38.  A  motion  to  adjourn  is  always  out  of  order, 
as  the  Session  fixes  the  hour  to  open  and  the  hour 
to  rest.  The  Presiding  Officer  is  goverened  by 
these  hours,  unless  a  motion  is  carried  to  extend  the 
time. 

39.  The  Presiding  Officer  shall  decide  all  points 
of  order,  without  debate. 

40.  All  motions  or  resolutions  must  be  submitted 
in  writing  and  laid  on  the  Secretary's  desk,  and 
must  be  read  when  a  member  desires  it. 


281 


41.  When  a  motion  or  resolution  is  made,  duly 
seconded,  and  stated  by  the  Presiding  Officer,  it 
becomes  .the  property  of  the  Session,  and  cannot 
be  withdrawn  without  the  consent  of  the  Presiding 
Officer,  or  a  majority  vote  of  the  Session. 

42.  When  a  committee  makes  a  report,  if  it  is  not 
satisfactory,  it  shall  be  referred  back  to  the  same  for 
correction,  with  instructions. 

43.  If  there  is  a  majority  and  a  minority  report 
of  a  committee,  the  minority  report  must  be  acted 
upon  first. 

44.  Members  cannot  vote,  unless  they  are  entitled 
to  a  vote,  or  are  present  in  open  Session. 

45.  All  amendments  to  motions  or  resolutions 
must  be  disposed  of  before  the  main  question  can  be 
acted  upon.  If  the  amendment  is  not  adopted,  the 
motion  or  resolution  is  put  to  a  vote  as  amended ; 
if  the  amendment  is  lost,'  the  vote  is  taken  on  the 
previous  question,  without  debate. 


GRKND   HONORS. 

:  O  : 

The  grand  honors  shown  to  an  International  or 
Past  International  Grand  Chief  are  given  as 
follows :  A  suitable  escort  is  sent  to  the  reception 
room  to  conduct  the  visitor  into  the  Session.  As 
he  enters,  the  Presiding  Officer  gives  four  raps, 
and  all  stand  with  their  hands  lifted  up  above  their 
heads.  When  he  arrives  at  tlie  Altar,  or  Temple 
or  Tabernacle  House,  he  stops,  and  all  give  claps — 
four  times  three — and  all  then  say :  We  Welcome  ! 
three  times.  He  is  then  escorted  to  the  Presiding 
Officer's  station,  and  introduced  by  the  Chief, 
whereupon  one  rap  is  given  and  all  are  seated.  On 
invitation  of  the  Chief,  he  may  deliver  an  address. 

An  International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress  or 
Past  International  Chief  Grand  Preceptress  is  re- 
ceived in  the  same  manner. 

A  Chief  Grand  Mentor,  or  Past  Chief  Grand 
Mentor,  is  conducted  into  the  Session  by  an  suitable 
escort.  When  he  enters,  the  Presiding  Officer 
gives  four  raps,  and  all  stand,  with  folded  arms, 
until  he  arrives  at  the  Altar,  or  Temple  or  Taber- 
nacle House,  then  all  give  seven  claps,  and  say: 
Wo  Welcome  I  three  times.  Ho  is  tlien  conducted 
to  the  Presiding  Officer's  station,  and  introduced 
by  the  Chief,  whereupora   one  rap  is  given  and  all 

282 


283 


are  seated.  On  invitation,  he  may  address  the 
members. 

A  Chief  Grand  Preceptress  or  Past  Chief  Grand 
Preceptress  is  receiv^ed  in  the  same  manner. 

All  other  Grand  Officers  and  Past  Grand  Officers 
are  received  into  Subordinate  Temples,  Tabernacles, 
Palatiums  and  Tents  with  the  standing  honors. 
When  they  arrive  at  the  Altar,  Temple  or  Taber- 
nacle House,  they  are  introduced  by  the  Chief,  and 
seated. 

The  grand  honors  shall  only  be  conferred  upon 
International  or  Past  International  Grand  Chiefs 
and  International  and  Past  International  Grand 
Preceptresses,  Chief  Grand  Mentors  and  Past  Chief 
Grand  Mentors,  and  Chief  Grand  Preceptresses  and 
Past  Chief  Grand  Preceptresses,  when  received  into 
a  Triennial  Grand  Session  or  a  Grand  Session.  The 
same  grand  honors  are  given  to  the  above  Officers 
and  Past  Officers  when  they  visit  a  Temple,  Taber- 
nacle, Palatium  or  Tent. 


RULES  OF  BUSINESS 

GOVERNING   THE 

TRIENNIAL  GRAND  SESSIONS. 

:  o: 

1. — On  the  day  and  hour  fixed  by  the  Constitu- 
tion the  members  assemble.  The  I.  C.  G.  M.  takes 
his  seat  and  gives  three  distinct  sounds  with  the 
Taborian  bell — this  calls  the  Session  to  order. 

2. — After  being  satisfied  that  all  present  are 
members,  he  orders  the  I.  C.  G.  St.  and  I.  I.  G.  St. 
to  their  posts  (with  instructions). 

3.— The  I.  C.  G.  S.  calls  the  roll  of  Grand 
Temples  and  Tabernacles.  If  the  Representatives 
of  ^ve  of  them  are  present,  he  shall  proceed  to 
open  the  Triennial  Session  in  the  Saba  Meroe  De- 
gree. 

4._The  I.  C.  G.  S.  calls  the  roll  of  Grand 
Officers,  and  they  are  seated  in  their  stations.  If 
an  Officer  is  absent,  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  fill  the 
vacancy  pro-tern » 

5. — If  the  hall  has  not  been  dedicated  to  the  Ta- 
borian work,  it  is  now  attended  to. 

6. — The  Committee  on  Credentials  is  appointed 
by  the  I.  C.  G.  M. 

7. — Report  of  Committee  on  Credentials. 
284 


285 


8. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  appoints  all  the  committees, 
as  prescribed  by  the  Constitution. 

9. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  reads  his  message,  and  it 
is  referred  to  the  proper  committee.  The  I.  C.  G. 
P.  reads  her  report,  and  it  is  referred.  The  I.  G. 
Q.  M.  reads  her  report,  and  it  is  refered. 

10. — The  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  make 
their  reports  through  the  C.  G.  M.s  or  C.  G.  P.s 

11. — The  International  Districts  make  their  re- 
ports through  their  D.  G.  M.s 

12. — At  the  opening  of  the  Sessions,  the  I.  C. 
G.  R.  reads  the  proceedings  of  the  previous  Session, 
unless  otherwise  ordered. 

13 — Immediately  after  the  proceedings  are  read 
and  disposed  of,  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  calls  for  the  re- 
ports of  the  various  committees,  in  their  regular 
order. 

14. — Motions,  resolutions,  and  new  business. 

15. — Election  of  International  Grand  Officers. 

16. — Installation  of  Grand  Officers. 

17. — The  I.  C.  G.  M.  declares  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  at  rest. 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  shall  make  their 
own  Rules  of  Business,  as  well  as  those  governing 
the  business  of  their  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Pala- 
tiums  and  Tents. 


FORM  OP  REPORT 

FROM 

GRAp  TEMPLES  AND  TjlBEpCLES 

TO    THE 

Triennial  Grand  Session. 


:o:- 


1. — Number  of  Temples,         _        -        .        - 
2. — Increase   of  Temples   since   last    Triennial 

Grand   Session,         -        -         -        - 
3. — Number   of  Tabernacles,  -         - 

4. — Increase  of  Tabernacles  since  last  Triennial 

Grand  Session,  -        -        -        - 

5. — Number  of  Palatiums,      -        -        -        - 
6. — Increase  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
7. — Number  of  Tents,  -        .        -        - 

8. — Increase  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
9. — Number  of  Knights  of  Tabor,  -         -         - 
10. — Increase  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
11. — Number  of  Daughters  of  Tabor,  - 
12. — Increase  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
13. — Number  of  members  in  the  Palatiums, 
14. — Number  of  Palatine  Guards  and  how  many- 
Companies,       -        -        -        -        - 
15. — Number  of  Maids  and  Pages,  -        -        - 
16. — Increase  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
17. — ^Names  of  the  members  of  the  International 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  that  have 
died  since  last  Triennial  Grand  Session, 
18. — Number  of   Knights  and  Daughters  in  the 

State  and  Jurisdiction,  «         -         - 

19. — Amount  of  International  Grand  Dues: 

First  yeUr,   -----  $ 


Second  year. 
Third  year, 


Total  Grand  Dues, 

286 


287 


20. — Palatium   Grand    Dues,  at   one    dollar  per 
year  for  each  Palatium, : 
First  year,  -         -         -         -         -  $ . 

Second  year,    -         -         -         -      *  - 
Third  year,  --_-.. 

Total  Grand  Dues,     $. 

21. — Tent  Grand  Dues,  at  one  dollar  per  year  for 

each  Tent: 

First  year, $ 

*^  Second  year,     -         -         -         -         - 

Third  year,  -         -  .     - 

Total  Grand  Dues,  -     % 
22.— Grand  Total, % 

I  hereby  certify  that  this  is  a  true  and  correct  report 

for  the  three  years  ending  the  ....   day  of   ,  a. 

D.  18. .,  A.  O.  T. . .,  for  the  Grand  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle for  the  State  of and  its  Jurisdiction. 

C.  G.  M. 

I  hereby  attest  this  report  to  be  correct  and  confirm 
the  same.     Witness  my  hand  and  seal. 

[seal.] C.  G.  S. 

The  I.  C.  G.  S.  is  hereby  authorized  to  collect  the  In- 
ternational Grand  Dues  from  the  Grand  Sessions  of  each 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  annually,  and  give  his  re- 
ceipt for  the  amount. 


288 

RERORT 

FROM 

INTERNATIONAL  DISTRICTS 

TO    THE 

TRIENNIAL  GRAND  SESSION. 

:o: 

1. — Number  of  Temples,         .        _        -        - 
2. — Number  of  memb'ers,    -         -         -         - 
3. — Number  of  Tabernacles,  -         -         -         - 
4. — Number  of  members,    -         -         -         . 
5. — Number  of  Palatiums,       -         -         -         - 
6. — Number  of  members,     -         -        -         - 
7. — Number  of  Tents,     -         -         -         -         - 
8. — Number  of  members,    -         -         -         - 
9. — The  amount  of  Grand  Dues  paid  : 

First  year, $ 

Second  year,    -         -         -         -         - 
Third  year,  _        -        -        -        - 

Total  Grand  Dues,     $ 
10. — The  amount  of  expenses: 

First  year, $ 

Second  year, 

Third  year, 


Total   Grand  Dues,     $ 

11. — Clear  balance, $ 

I  hereby  certify  that  this  is  a  true  report  of  Interna- 
tional District,  No D    C    M 

The  I.  C.  G.  S.  is  hereby  authorized  to  collect  the 
Grand  Dues  from  the  Districts  annually,  and  give  his  re- 
ceipts to  the  D.  G.  M.  for  the  amount  received. 


In  Solo  Deo  Salus!" 


S^MOF^SfS 


OF 


OFFICIAL  FORMS, 


USED    BY    THE 


INTERNATIONAL 

ORDER  OF  TWELVE, 


(10 — Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


TKBORIKN   FORTV^S. 


777— INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELVE.-333. 


PETITION. 

To  the  Members  of Temple^  No 

Your  petitioner  has  formed  a  good  opinion  of  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve,  and  desires  to  be  made  a  mem- 
ber of  your  Temple.  If  admitted,  I  promise  to  obey  tlie 
Laws  and  Regulations  of  the  Order. 

Age ,  Residence ,  Recommended  by 

Signed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d.  18 . . . 

Enclosed  Fee,  $ 


333— INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELVE.— 333. 


PETITION. 

To  the  Members  of Tabernacle^  No 

Your  petitioner  has  formed  a  favorable  opinion  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve.  I  desire  to  be  made  a 
member  of  your  Tabernacle.  If  I  am  admitted  a  mem- 
ber, I  promise  to  obey  the  Laws  and  Regulations  of  the 
Order. 

Age ,  Residence ,  Recommended  by 

Signed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d.  18 . . . 

Enclosed  Fee,  $ 


INTERNATIONAL   ORDER   OF    TWELVE. 

PETITION. 

To  the  Members  of Palatium,  No 

Your  petitioner  has  been  a  member  of  tiie  International 

Order  of  Twelve  for I  am  now  in  good 

standing  in Temple,  (or  Tabernacle.)  No.. . . 

290 


291 

I  desire  to  be  enrolled  a  member  of  the  Royal  House  of 
Media,  if  found  worthy. 

Residence ,  Recommended  by 

Signed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d.  18. . . 

Enclosed  Fee,  $ 


777— INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELTE.-333. 


GRAND    TEMPLE    AND    TABERNACLE    TRANSFER. 

To  All  Whom  These  May  Co7icern^  Greeting: 
After   careful    examination,  I   am   satisfied   that   the 

bearer is  a  member  of  the  International 

Order  of  Twelve,  and  is  worthy.  By  virtue  of  the  author- 
ity he  (or  slie)  is  hereby  transferred  to  any  Temple 
of  the  Knights  of  Tabor  (or  Tabernacle)  that  elects  him 
(or  her)  a  member,  upon  payment  of  one  dollar. 

Signed  and  sealed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d. 

18...,  A.  O.  T 

[seal.]  C.  G.  M. 

For and  Jurisdiction. 


777-INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELVE.— 999. 


TRANSFER. 

This  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer.  Sir , 

was  a  member  in  good  standing  when  the  transfer  was 

granted,  in Temple,  No. . .     He  is  hereby 

transferred  to  any  Temple  working  under  the  Interna 
tional  Order  of  Twelve ;  provided,  he  is  elected  by  a  ma- 
jority vote  of  the  members  present  at  any  Regular  Ses- 
sion, and  upon  payment  of  one  dollar.     This  transfer  is 
good  for  sixty  days  from  date  only. 

Witness   our   hands   and    seals  this  the day 

of ,A.  D.  18...,  A.  O.  T 

r  -,  C.  M. 

t^"""-^  C.  S. 

The  Temple  granting  this  transfer  is  authorized  to  charge 
one  dollar  for  it.  No  transfer  can  be  granted,  unless  all  dues 
and  fines  are  paid. 


292 
INTERXATIOXAL  ORDER  OF  TWELYE. 


R.  M. — TRANSFER. P.  M. 

This  is  to  certify,  that  Prince  (or  Princess)  was  a  mem- 
ber  in   good   standing   at   the   time   this   transfer   was 

granted,  of Palatium,  No. . .     He  (or  she) 

is  hereby  transferred  to  any  Palatium  that  is  working 
under  the  International  Order  of  Twelve ;  provided^  he 
(or  she)  is  elected  by  a  majority  of  the  members  present, 
and  upon  payment  of  one  dollar. 

Witness  our  hands   and   seals   this    the day 

of ,  A.  D.  18...,  A.  O.  T 

r  -,  P.  P. 

f^"^^-]  R.P. 

The  members  who  receive  a  transfer  shall  pay  one  dollar 
for  it. 


333— INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELVE.-333. 


TRANSFER. 

TJiis  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer,  Daughter  Priestess 

,was  a  member  in  good  standing  when 

this  transfer  was  granted,  of Tabernacle, 

No...  She  is  hereby  transferred  to  any  Tabernacle 
working  under  the  International  Order  of  Twelve ;  pro- 
vided, she  is  elected  by  a  majority  vote  of  the  members 
present  at  a  Regular  Session,  and  upon  payment  of  one 
dollar.  This  transfer  is  good  for  sixty  days  from  date 
only. 

Witness  our  hands  and  seals   this  the day 

of ,  A.  D.  18...,  A.  O.  T 

r  -,  C.  P. 

f^""^^  C.R. 

The  Tabernacle    granting    this  transfer   is   authorized   to 
charge  one  dollar  for  it. 


293 
INTERNATIONAL    ORDER    OF    TITELTE. 

TRANSFER. 

This  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer  was  a  member  in  good 

standing  of Tent,  No . . . ,  at  the  time  this 

transfer  was  granted.  He  (or  she)  is  hereby  trans- 
ferred to  any  Tent  of  Maids  and  Pages  working  under 
the  International  Order  of  Twelve. 

Signed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d.  18 

Q.  M. 

[seal.]  ^^  j^^  j^^ 


777— INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELVE.— 333. 

TRAVELING   CERTIFICATE. 

To  All  Whom  These  May  Come,  Greeting: 

This  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer  is  a  member  in  good 

standing  in Temple,  No. . . ,  situated  in  the 

City  of ,  State  of 

This  certificate  is  granted  to  Sir for  the 

term  of months.     His  monthly  card  will  show 

that  he  is  clear  with  the  Chief  Scribe's  books,  and  he  will 
give  the  Quarterly  Pass  that  was  used  at  the  date  of  this 
certificate.  Chief  Mentors  are  requested  to  give  and 
impart  to  him  the  Quarterly  Pass  whenever  it  is  changed. 

Members  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve,  every- 
where, are  requested  to  receive  Sir as  a  true 

and  loyal  member  of  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Ta- 
bor, of  the  Uniform  Rank. 

Signed  this  the day  of ,  a.  d.  18 ... , 

A.  O.  T 

C.  M. 

Attested  by  the  seal  of  the  Temple,  and  sig- 

[SEAL.]    nature  of  the  Chief  Scribe. 

C.  S. 

This  certificate  is  good  only  for  the  time  for  which  it  is 
granted. 


294 
777-INTERNATIONAL  ORDER  OF  TWELYE. 


TRAVELING    CERTIFICATE. 

To  All  Whom  These  Come,  Greeting: 

This  is  to  certify,  that  the  bearer  is  a  member  in  good 

standing  in Tabernacle,  No. . . ,  situated  in  the 

City  of ,  State  of 

This  certificate  is  granted  to  Daughter  Priestess 

,  f or  the  term  of .months.     Her  monthly 

card  will  show  that  she  is  clear  with  the  Chief  Recorder's 
books,  and  she  will  give  the  Quarterly  Pass  which  was 
used  at  the  date  of  this  certificate.  The  High  Priest- 
esses are  requested  to  give  and  impart  to  her  the  Quar- 
terly Pass  whenever  it  is  changed. 

Members  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve,  every- 
where, are  requested  to  receive  Daughter  Priestess 

as  a  true  and  loyal  member  of  the  Knights 

and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  and  Priestess  of  Saba  Meroe. 

Signed  this  the ...  .....  day  of ,  a.  d.  18 ... , 

A.  O.  T 

C.  P. 

Attested  by  the  seal  of  the  Tabernacle  and 
[seal.]       signature  of  the  Chief  Recorder. 

C.  R. 

This  certificate  is  good  only  for  the  time  for  which  it  is 
granted. 


295 

QUARTERLY  REPORT.-FORM  1. 


1. — Number  of  members,     -         -         -         - 

2. — Number  suspended  for  dues,    -         -         -      

3. — Number  expelled,  -         -•         -         -         ...... 

4. — Amount  of  sick  dues  paid  this  quarter,     -     

5. — Died  this  quarter,  -         -         -         -         

6. — The  amount  of  dues  received  this  quarter,      

7. — Number  of  new  members  received  this  quar- 
ter,  

8. — The  amount  received  for  fees,       

9. — Total  amount  received  from  all  sources,    -     ...... 

10. — Amount  paid  out  for  regular  expenses,  - 

11. — Amount  paid  out  for  funeral  expenses  this 

quarter 

12. — Amount    given    to    distressed    Knights    or 

Daughters,         -         -         -         -         -         

13. — Amount  paid  for  C.  G.  P.  or  C.  G.  M.  visits, 

14. — Total  amount  paid  out  during  the  quarter,     

15. — Balance  in  the  treasury  and  bank,     -         -     

16. — Do  you  own  a  hall?       -         -         -         -         

17. — Do  you  hold  5^our  regular  sessions?  -         -     

18. — Are  your  sessions  pleasant  and  instructive? 

I  hereby  certify  this  to  be  a  correct  report  of 

[seal.]         the  condition  of Temple, 

No ....  (or  Tabernacle,  No . . . . ) 

C.  M.  (orC.  P.) 

Attested  and  sealed  this  the day  of , 

A.  D.  18...,  A.  O.  T 

C.  S.  (or  C.  R.) 

All  Temples  and  Tabernacles  must  report  to  the  Chief 
Grand  Mentor  the  first  week  in  March,  June,  September 
and  December.  A  Temple  or  Tabernacle  that  fails  to 
report  quarterly,  will   be   considered  in  bad  condition. 

The  address  of  the  C.  M.  or  C.  P.  is Street, 

City  of State  of 


296 
QUARTERLY  REPORT.-FORM  2. 


1. — Number  of  members,     -         - 
2. — How  many  boys?      -         -         - 
3. — How  many  girls?  -         -         -         _ 

4. — How  many  boys  transferred  to  the  Temple? 
5. — How   many  girls  transferred  to  the  Taber- 
nacle? ------ 

6. — What  is  the  amount  of  dues  received  this 
quarter?    ------ 

7. — What  amount  of  fees  received  this  quarter? 
8. — Total  amount  received  from  all  sources,   - 
9. — How  much  paid  out  for  regular  expenses? 
10. — The  amount  paid  to  sick  members, 
11. — The  amount  paid  on  funerals  this  quarter, 
12. — The  amount  paid  on  other  expenses, 
13. — Balance  in  treasury       _         -         -         - 
14. — Do  you  hold  your  sessions  regularly? 

I  certify  the  above  to  be  a  true  report  of 

Tent,  No 

Q.  M 

(Attested.  ) C.  R.  K 

All  Tents  must  make  a  report  to  the  Grand  Queen 
Mother  the  first  week  in  March,  June,  September  and 
December, 

The  address  of  the  Queen  Mother  is 

Street,  City  of ,  State  of 


297 
THE  QUARTERLY  PASS. 


The  Quarterly  Pass  is  issued  to  all  Temples  and  Tab- 
ernacles every  three  months.  When  it  is  received  by  the 
C.  M.  or  C.  P.  they  impart  it  to  their  members  at  the  first 
Regular  Session  after  it  is  received.  If  members  are  not 
at  the  Session,  they  cannot  receive  it  until  the  next  Ses- 
sion, as  it  is  not  to  be  given  outside  of  a  Session,  and  then 
only  by  the  Presiding  Officer.  C.  M.  and  C.  P.  are  not 
permitted  to  give  it  to  any  but  their  members,  except  to 
one  having  a  traveling  certificate  from  some  other  Tem- 
ple or  Tabernacle.  The  Quarterly  Pass  is  a  safe-guard 
against  imposition.  C.  M.s  and  C.  P.s  must  carefully 
follow  these  rules,  and  instruct  their  members  not  to 
give  it  to  any  one,  not  even  to  a  member  of  their  own 
Temple  or  Tabernacle,  who  have  not  received  it. 
:o: 

REGULAR  SESSION. 


Temples  and  Tabernacles  must  hold  at  least  one  Session 
in  each  month,  if  they  fail  to  meet,  they  forfeit  their 
charter  or  warrant.  If  for  reasons  which  make  it  impos- 
sible for  the  Temple  or  Tabernacle  to  have  their  Regular 
Session,  the  C.  M.  orC.  P.  must  write  immediately  to  the 
C.  G.  M.  and  give  him  the  reason,  and  get  his  dispensa- 
tion. Unless  this  is  done  the  charter  or  warrant  will  be 
forfeited  just  as  soon  as  the  C.  G.  M.  is  notified. 


298 

International  Order  of  Twelve 

OF 

Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor. 

ITS    motto: 

"In  Solo  Deo  Salus!" 

:o: 

WORK  AND  BUSINESS  OF  MEMBERS. 


This  Order  was  organized  for  the  benefit  of  its  mem- 
bers, and  the  people  among  whom  Temples,  Tabernacles, 
Palatiums  and  Tents  are  organized.  It  is  the  duty  of 
the  Order, 

First,  to  take  care  of  its  sick^and  distressed  members, 
to  relieve  its  poor  and  helpless  members,  and  to  sustain 
the  widows  and  orphans. 

Second,  to  advance  the  standard  of  virtue  and  moral- 
ity, encourage  and  aid  in  multiplying  schools  and  insti- 
tutions of  learning,  and  to  impress  upon  its  members  the 
necessity  of  investing  in  real  estate,  and  acquiring  home- 
steads. 

Third,  to  impress  upon  its  members  that  they  shall  be 
loyal  to  the  Government  in  which  they  live,  and  to  be 
temperate,  law  abiding  and  trustworthy. 

Fourth,  our  Order  is  non-sectarian  and  non-political, 
therefore  no  denominational  or  political  discussions  shall 
be  permitted  in  our  Temples,  Tabernacles  or  Palatiums. 

Fifth,  when  a  member  in  good  standing  dies,  it  is  the 
duty  of  the  Temple  or  Tabernacle  and  Palatium  to  have 
the  member  respectably  interred. 


299 


Rights  of  Chief  Mentors. 

A  Chief  Mentor  is  responsible  to  the  Grand  Tem- 
ple and  Tabernacle  for  the  manner  in  which  he 
conducts  the  business  of  his  Temple.  It  is  his  bus- 
iness to  enforce  the  Laws  of  the  Order,  and  the 
Edicts  of  the  C.  G.  M.  He  must  have  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  all  the  Laws  and  Rules  of  the  Order. 
He  must  not  permit  any  one  to  assume  control  of 
his  Temple.  His  decisions  are  final,  until  reversed 
by  the  C.  G.  M. 

Rights  of  High  Priestess.    (C.  P.) 

A  High  Priestess  is  responsible  to  the  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle  for  the  manner  in  which 
she  conducts  the  business  of  her  Tabernacle.  She 
must  enforce  the  Laws  of  the  Order,  and  the 
Edicts  of  the  C.  G.  M.  She  must  have  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  the  Laws  and  Rules  of  the  Order.  She 
must  not  permit  any  one  to  assume  control  of  her 
Tabernacle.  Her  decisions  are  final,  until  re- 
versed by  the  Chief  Grand  Mentor  or  Chief  Grand 
Preceptress. 

Rights  of  Members. 

Members  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
are  obligated  to  obey  all  the  Laws,  Rules  and 
Edicts.  It  is  the  right  of  members  in  good  stand- 
ing to  receive  the  weekly  benefit  when  sick  or  dis- 
abled, and  to  receive  aid  when  in  distress.  It  is 
their  right  to  demand  and  receive  a  traveling  certifi- 
cate upon  their  compliance  with  the  Laws.  It  is  their 
right  to  receive  a  transfer,  when  they  have  paid  all 
their  dues  and  taxes.     There  is  no  power  that  can 


300 


suspend  or  expel  a  member  without  a  trial,  by  due 
process  of  the  Laws  of  the  Order.  The  right  of 
appeal,  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of  appeals, 
must  not  be  denied  to  a  member.  A  Knight  of 
Tabor,  in  good  standing,  has  the  right  to  visit  any 
Temple  or  Tabernacle,  by  producing  proof  that  he 
is  in  good  standing  in  the  Temple  that  he  is  a 
member  of.  A  Daughter  of  Tabor  has  the  right 
to  visit  any  Tabernacle,  by  producing  proof  that 
she  is  in  good  standing  in  the  Tabernacle  that  she 
is  a  member  of.  It  is  the  right  of  members,  who 
die  in  good  standing,  to  receive  a  respectable  burial, 
in  accordance  with  the  Laws  of  the  Order. 

Eights  of  Queen  Mothers. 

A  Queen  Mother  has  full  control  of  her  Tent, 
and  must  administer  the  Laws  governing  the  Tents, 
and  the  Edicts  of  the  C.  G.  M.  She  is  to  open 
and  close  her  Tent  without  a  motion,  in  accordance 
with  the  By-Laws  of  her  Tent.  She  must  have  a 
thorouo:h  knowledije  of  the  Laws  of  the  Order. 
Her  decisions  are  final,  until  they  are  reversed  by 
the  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

Rights  of  Presiding  Princes. 

A  Presiding  Prince  has  full  control  of  his  Pala- 
tium,  and  must  administer  the  Laws  that  govern 
Palatiums,  and  the  Edicts  of  the  C.  G.  M.  He  is 
to  open  and  close  the  Palatium  without  a  motion, 
in  accordance  with  the  By-Laws.  He  must  li^ve  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  the  Laws  of  the  Order. 
His  decisions  are  final,  until  they  are  reversed  by 
the  C.  G.  M. 


301 


A  Recommendation. 
It  is  recommended  that  the  Daughters'  Taber- 
nacles hold  their  Sessions  during  the  hours  of  the 
day.  If  this  is  done,  they  will  avoid  being  out  late 
at  night,  and  will  save  themselves  great  inconveni- 
ence, and  for  many  other  reasons  not  necessary  to 
mention.  It  will  surely  be  for  the  best  interests  of 
our  Daughters  to  meet  during  the  day. 

The  Degrees. 
The  degfrees  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
must  be  given  according  to  the  form  as  laid  down 
in  the  Rituals,  and  care  must  be  taken  to  give  the 
candidate  full  and  perfect  instructions.  No  part  of 
the  ceremony  must  be  omitted.  One  or  two  de- 
grees should  only  be  conferred  at  any  one  Session; 
in  fact,  it  is  best  to  confer  but  one  degree  on  the 
candidate  at  each  Session.  This  will  give  the  candi- 
date a  better  idea  of  the  different  degrees.  This 
law  applies  only  to  chartered  and  warranted  organi- 
•zations,  and  not  to  the  setting  up  of  Clubs. 

International  Districts. 
The  I.  C.  G.  M.  may  organize  Districts  in  any 
State,  Territory  or  country,  where  there  is  no 
Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.  These  Districts  are 
to  remain  under  the  Government  of  the  Interna- 
tional Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle,  until  they  are 
organized  into  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles. 
The  I.  C.  G.  M.  shall  appoint  a  District  Mentor 
and  District  Preceptress.  A  District  must  hold  an 
Annual  Session,  to  be  presided  over  by  the  I.  C.  G. 
M.  or  District  Mentor.  The  District  must  be  com- 
posed of  all  the  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 


302 


and  Tents,   in  one,   two   or  more  States  or  Terri- 
tories. 

Duties  of  the  District  Mentor. 

It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  District  Mentor  to 
make  organizations  in  all  parts  of  the  District  he 
shall  visit,  and  instruct  Temples,  Tabernacles, 
Palatiums  and  Tents,  when  they  request  his  pres- 
ence. When  he  visits,  his  traveling  expenses  and 
per  diem  must  be  paid  by  the  Temple,  Tabernacle, 
Palatium  or  Tent  which  invites  him.  He  must,  when 
ordered  by  the  I.  C.  G.  M.,  visit  any  part  of  the 
District  on  special  business  for  the  Order.  His- ex- 
penses must  be  paid  out  of  the  International  Grand 
Treasury.  He  is  to  represent  his  District  in  the 
Triennial  Grand  Session,  and  the  Temples,  Taber- 
nacles, Palatiums  and  Tents  in  the  District  will  be 
assessed  j9?'o  rata  to  pay  his  traveling  expenses  and 
per  diem.  He  is  to  keep  a  list  of  all  organizations» 
and  report  to  the  I.  C.  G.  M.  their  condition  from 
time  to  time.  C.  M.s  and  C.  P.s  will  make  their 
quarterly  reports  to  him,  and  he  will  furnish  them 
with  the  Quarterly  Pass.  His  office  expenses  will 
be  paid  out  of  the  funds  of  the  District  Session, 
that  is,  for  his  stationery  and  postage  stamps. 

Duties  of  the  District  Preceptress. 

It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  District  Preceptress 
to  visit  all  Tabernacles  and  Tents,  when  invited 
by  the  C.  P.  or  Q.  M.  Her  expenses  are  to  be 
paid  by  the  Tabernacle  or  Tent  that  she  visits.  She 
is  authorized  to  organize  Tabernacles,  Palatiums 
and  Tents  in  all  parts  of  her  District.  She  is  the 
Representative  of  the  District  in  the  Triennial  Grand 


303 


Session,  and  the  organizations  in  the  District  will  be 
assessed  pro  rata  to  pay  her  expenses. 

Grand  Dues. 
The  amount  which  each  Temple,  Tabel-nacle,  Pala- 
tium  and  Tent  shall  pay  for  each  member,  will  be 
named  from  year  to  year,  and  collected  at  the  Dis- 
trict Session.  Any  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium 
and  Tent,  which  fails  to  pay  Grand  Dues  every  year, 
shall  pay  the  penalty  awarded  by  the  District  Ses- 
sion. 

District  Sessions. 

The  C.  M.  must  represent  his  Temple  either  in 
person  or  by  his  Vice. 

The  C.  P.  must  represent  her  Tabernacle  either 
in  person  or  by  her  Vice. 

The  P.  P.  or  V.-P.  must*  represent  the  Palatium. 

The  Queen  Mother  must  represent  her  Tent  in 
person  or  by  her  Vice. 

Each  of  the   above  organizations   must  pay  the 
traveling  expenses  and  per  diem  of  their  Represen- 
tatives. , 
Time. 

The  time  and  month  for  holding  the  District 
Sessions,  shall  be  fixed  by  the  International  Chief 
Grand  Mentor. 

Regalia. 

The  full  dress  of  the  Uniform  Knights  of  Tabor 
shall  be  as  follows : 

A  black  coat,  single-breasted,  buttoned  up  to  the 
neck  in  military  style,  yellow  metal  buttons,  with 
letters  *'U.  K.  T.;"  black  pants;  helmet,  trimmed 
with  gold  lace;  a  shield,  with  the  letters  *'U.  K. 


304 

T.,'*  ornamented  with  a  scarlet  feather;  a  baldric, 
four  inches  wide,  colors  black  in  the  center  and 
scarlet  on  each  side,  trimmed  with  half  inch  gold 
l-ace;  on  left  breast  the  letters  '*\j.  K.  T.,"  made  of 
yellow  metal ;  a  twelve-pointed  btar  on  the  shoulder, 
with  the  figures  *«777"  in  the  center;  guantlets  of 
same  colors  as  the  baldric,  made  to  reach  half  way 
to  the  elbow,  ornamented  with  letters  "U.  K.  T. ;" 
gloves  buck-skin  or  lisle-thread,  color  light  yellow; 
regulation  sword,  silver  scabbard  with  shield  letters 
**U.  K.  T. ;"  sih^er  chains,  scarlet  belt,  with  hooks 
for  cap  and  cup,  on  sword  blade  the  words  Uniform 
Eank  of  Tabor;  black  navy  cap, trimmed  with  silver 
lace,  letters  **U.  K.  T." 

Undress  Uniform. 
When  giving  the  degrees  or  on  fatigue  duty  the 
uniform  is  the  cap,  sword,  belt,  gloves  and  badge. 
The  badge  is  a  ten-pointed  star,  made  of  white 
metal,  with  *'777"  in  the  center,  scarlet  ribbon, 
with  letters  International  Order  of  Twelve  printed 
thereon.  The  badge  is  attached  to  the  left  breast 
by  bar  and  pin. 

C.  M.S  AND  P.  C.  M.s 
Colors   are  emerald    green,    and   gold;    baldric, 
green  and    black;    helmet,  green    feather;    sword, 
yellow  metal  scabbard  and  chains;  cap,  gold  lace; 
badge  or  jewel,  yellow  metal. 

Saba  Merges  Regalia, 
full  dress. 
The  High  Priestess,  Tharbis,  white  dress,  a  royal 
purple  robe  entrail,  spangled  with  small  gold  stars 


305 


fastened  at  the  shoulders  with  **333*'  golden  pins. 
The  jewel  of  office  is  pinned  to  left  breast.  The 
staff  in  her  right  hand.  An  emerald  green  belt, 
gold  clasp  *'333,"  gloves  long,  pink  silk  or  lisle- 
thread.  A  golden  coronet,  ornamented  with 
different  colored  stones.  A  Maid  and  Page  accom- 
pany her  on  all  public  occasions. 

The  Dress  of  Other  Officers. 

Amisis,  Scsotheni,  Seraphis,  Hyerego,  Abassine, 
Lybenus,  three  Hespers,  three  Gyrenes,  white 
dress,  sky  blue  robe  entrail,  spangled  with  small 
silver  stars;  sky  blue  belt;  silver  clasp  **333;"  pink 
silk  or  lisle-thread  gloves ;  a  golden  coronet,  orna- 
mented with  white  stones. 

♦      Dress  Regalia. 

The  C.  P.s  and  P.  C.  P.s  will  wear  the  following : 
A  collar,  emerald  green,  ornamented  with  twelve 
golden  stars;  pink  gloves;  staff;  coronet;  emerald 
green  sash  or  belt;  jewel  of  office;  yellow  metal 
star,  resting  on  a  ring;  lettered  in  center,  C.  P.  or 
P.  C.  P.  and  emerald  green  ribbon  on  which  is 
printed,  "International  Order  of  Twelve"  (with  bar 
and  pin). 

Other  Officers. 

V.-P.,  C.  R.,  C.  T.,  C.  Ps.,  I.  St.,  O.  St.,  B. 
Ys.  and  B.  Es.,  emerald  green  collar,  trimmed  with 
twelve  silver  stars,  pink  gloves,  emerald  green  sash 
or  belt  (333),  coronet,  jewel  of  office,  white  metal 
star  resting  on  a  ring,  with  initials  office  in  the 
center;  sky-blue  ribbon  on  which  is  printed  "Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve"  (with  bar  and  pin). 


306 


Other  Members. 

Emerald  green  collar,  ornamented  with  twelve 
silver  stars,  buff  colored  gloves,  emerald  green 
sash  or  belt  (*'333"),  a  silver  coronet  or  wreath  of 
flowers.  The  Badge — a  white  metal  star  resting 
on  a  ring  (''333")  in  the  center.  Sky-blue  ribbon 
on  which  is  printed,  "International  Order  of 
Twelve"  (with  bar  and  pin). 

All  regalia  may  be  ornamented  with  either  gold 
or  silver  lace  or  fringe  to  match  the  color  of  the 
stars  worn  by  the  member. 

Undress  of  Daughters. 

The  undress  of  the  Daughters  is  the  Jewel  or 
Badge,  which  must  be  worn  at  all  Sessions  when 
the  full  regalia  is  not  required,  as  also  gloves.  The 
Jewel  or  Badge  can  be  worn  at  any  time  to  desig- 
nate that  you  are  a  member  of  the  Order  on  any 
public  occasion,  when  the  full  regalia  is  not  needed. 
Mourning   Badge. 

The  Mourning  Badge  is  a  small  rosette  made  of 
crape,  with  an  emerald  green  center.  This  must 
be  worn  for  the  time  set  by  the  Temple  or  Taber- 
nacle after  the  death  of  a  member,  not  less  than 
thirty  nor  more  than  sixty  days. 

Staffs  and  Kods. 

The  C.  P.'s  staff  is  about  three  feet  long,  one 
inch  in  diameter,  surmounted  with  a  golden  ball ; 
color  of  staff,  emerald  green. 

Inner  and  Outer  Sentinels'  rods  are  seven  feet 
long,  one  inch  in  diameter;  color,  emerald  green, 
surmounted  with  spear  and  golden  ball. 

The  C.  Ps.*  rod  is  seven  feet  long,  one   inch  in 


307 


diameter;  color,  emerald  green,  surmounted  with 
a  golden  crook. 

Form  of  Tabernacle  House. 

The  House  shall  be  three  stories  high.  First 
story,  fifteen  inches  square,  twelve  inches  high; 
second  story,  ten  inches  square,  twelve  inches 
high ;  third  story,  open  on  four  columns,  fifteen 
inches  high.  Color:  First  story,  pink;  second 
story,  pea-green;  third  story,  white. 

Rings  for  carrying;  two  pink  poles. 

The  moulding  of  the  Tabernacle  may  be  gilded 
and  ornamented  to  suit  the  taste. 

Lettering  on  first  story,  first  side,  the  name  and 
number;  second  side,  the  date  of  ^v'arrant;  third 
side,  **Daughters  of  the  Tabernacle;"  fourth  side, 
the  name  of  city  and  State. 

Second  story,  first  side,  333;  second  side,  the 
Bible;  third  side,  the  cups;  fourth  side,,  the  gol- 
den shoes. 

Form  of  Temple  House. 

The  Temple  House  shall  be  three  stories  high. 
First  story,  eighteen  inches  square  and  one  foot 
deep  ;  second  story,  fifteen  inches  square  and  one 
foot  deep;  third  story,  ten  inches  square  and  one 
foot  deep,  made  to  open  in  each  story.  Color: 
First  story,  light  scarlet;  second  story,  pea-green; 
third  story,  white;  moulding  gilded.  Lettering: 
First  story — On  one  side,  the  name  of  the  Temple 
and  number;  next  side,  the  dale  of  its  organiza- 
tion; third  side,  the  city  and  State;  fourth  side, 
**Knights  of  Tabor."  Second  story— First,  777; 
second,    999;     third,    444;     fourth,    333.     Third 


308 

story — First,  the  eye ;  second,  the  clasped  hands ; 
third,  the  ear;  fourth,  the  emblematic  star;  rings 
and  pole  for  carrying. 

Temple  Furniture. 
The  Holy  Bible,  two  cups,  gavel,  three  pitchers, 
sword,    girdle,    star,    shield,     key,   Manual,    three 
candle-sticks,  and  staff. 

Tabernacle  Furniture. 
Holy  Bible,  two  golden  shoes,  roll. of  flax,  two 
cups,  ball  of  wool,  curious  girdle,  five  candle-sticks, 
coronet,  robes,  bells,  door,  chariot  and  chair,  and 
faces. 

Altar. 

The  altar  is  two  feet  six  inches  in  height,  one 
foot  six  inches  w^ide,  and  one  foot  deep,  painted 
emerald  green  on  one  side,  on  one  side  scarlet,  on 
one  side  blue,  and  on  one  side  black,  with  figures 
''777,"  ''333,"  "444,"  "999"  (one  set  of  figures 
on  each  side),  the  top  white. 

Governing  Departments 
1  .—Temples  of  the  Knights  of  Tabor. 
2. —  Tabernacles     of    Daughter  '  Priestesses    of 
Tabor, 
3. — Palatiums  of  the  Royal  lloiise  of  Media. 
4. — Tents  of  Maids  and  Pages  of  Honor, 
5. — Grand  Temples  and  Tabern'ides. 
6. — International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

Sickness. 
One  of  the  fundamental  principles,    as  *vell  as 
most    important,    of   the   International   Order    of 
Twelve,  is  the  care  of  its  sick,  disabled  or  distressed 


309 


members.     An   order   or   society   which   does   not 
make  provision  for  its  sick,  has  no  right  to  exist. 

The  Temple  or  Tabernacle  that  does  not  amply 
provide  for  its  sick,  disabled  or  distressed  mem- 
bers, ought  to  and  should  close  up,  for  they  are  a 
disgrace  to  the  Order.  Each  Temple  and  Taber- 
nacle must  pay  a  weekly  benefit,  and  if  the  sick 
members  need  more,  arrangements  may  be  matie  to 
meet  the  expenses;  make  your  monthly  dues  on 
each  member  sufficient  to  keep  money  in  your 
treasury  to  meet  expenses.  Members,  who  know 
that  they  will  be  cared  for  when  sick,  will  not  ob- 
ject to  paying  the  monthly  dues. 

District  Grand  Mentors. 

Under  the  authority  of  Grand  Temples  and  Tab- 
ernacles, the  appointing  of  D.  G.  M.s  and  arrang- 
ing their  Districts,  is  entirely  the  business  of  the 
Chief  Grand  Mentors.  He  alone  has  the  authority 
to  appoint.  He  is  a  Special  Deputy  of  the  C.  G. 
M.,  and  the  limits  of  his  District  are  fixed  by  the 
C.  G.  M.'s  commission.  The  duties  of  the  D.  G. 
M.  must  be  named  in  his  commission.  If  he  is 
ordered  to  visit  a  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or 
Tent  by  the  C.  G.  M.,  he  must  be  paid  out  of  the 
Grand  Treasury  for  his  time,  traveling  expenses 
and  per  diem.  He  cannot  be  received  into  an  open 
Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  or  Tent  on  official 
business,  without  showing  his  authority  from  the 
Chief  Grand  Mentor.  The  D.  G.  M.  is  not  permitted 
to  control  the  business  of  Temples,  Tabernacles 
Palatiums  or  Tents,  nor  can  he  preside  in  the  elec- 
tion of  officers  in  any  of  the  departments. 


310 


Supplies. 

The  supplies  which  must  be  furnished,  with  the 
charter,  to  new  Temples,  are  as  follows: — 

6  Constitutions,  2  Complete  Rituals,  6  Blank 
Transfers,  6  Blank  Traveling  Certificates,  25 
Monthly  Cards,  12  Blank  Petitions,  4  Blank  Quar- 
terly Reports,  the  Quarterly  Pass  and  Key. 

New  Tabernacles,  with  the  warrant: — 6  Consti- 
tutions, 2  Third  Degree  Rituals,  and  2  Fourth 
Degree  Rituals,  25  Monthly  Cards,  6  Blank  Trans- 
fers, 6  Blank  Traveling  Certificates,  12  Blank  Pe- 
titions, 4  Blank  Quarterly  Reports,  the  Quarterly 
Pass  and  Key. 

New  Palatiums,  with  the  charter,  12  Rituals  and 
1  Manual.  Palatiums  make  their  own  Constitution 
and  By-Laws,  but  they  shall  not  conflict  with  the 
General  Laws  and  Constitution  of  Grand  Temples 
and  Tabernacles. 

New  Tents,  with  charter,  25  Monthly  Cards  and 
12  Constitutions. 

Every  Temple,  Tabernacle,  Palatium  and  Tent 
must  have  and  own  a  Manual  within  three  months 
after  having  been  organized  and  set  up. 

Incorporation. 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  are  a  part  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve,  yet  they  are  set 
apart  as  a  Governing  Power  under  the  General 
Laws  in  their  States,  Territories  or  Provinces.  For 
the  purpose  of  legalizing  these  organizations  and 
their  departments,  they  must  be  incorporated. 
The  Board  of  Grand  Curators  shall  be  th^  incor- 
porators. 


311 


Eeal  Estate. 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  should  secure 
Real  Estate,  by  having  it  deeded  to  the  Board  of 
Grand  Curators  and  their  successors  in  office,  the 
ownership  to  be  vested  in  the  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle  of  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  for 
the  State  of . 

A  Temple  or  Tabernacle  which  is  making  prep- 
arations to  build  a  hall,  or  is  about  to  buy  a  lot  or 
building,  may  secure  the  same  as  follows : 

First,  call  a  meeting  and  elect  Trustees.  A  deed 
can  be  made  to  these  Trustees  and  their  succes- 
sors   in    office,    the    ownership    to    be    vested   in 

Temple,  No.  — ,  of  Knights  of  Tabor.     (If 

a  Tabernacle,    in    Tabernacle,  No.   — ,   of 

Daughters  of  Tabor),  name  town  or  city,  county 
and  State. 

When  a  Temple  and  Tabernacle  unite  to  pur- 
chase, they  call  a  joint  meeting  and  elect  Trus- 
tees. The  property  is  deeded  to  these  Trustees 
and  their  successors.     The  ownership  is  vested  in 

Temple,  No.   — ,   and  Tabernncle, 

No.  — ,  of  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor.  Name 
town  or  city,  county  and  State. 

In  cities  where  there  are  a  number  of  Temples 
and  Tabernacles,  a  joint  meeting  is  called  of  all 
the  numbers,  and  Trustees  are  elected.  A  deed  is 
made  to  these  Trustees  and  their  successors  in 
office.  The  ownership  is  vested  in  (the  name  and 
number  of  each  Temple  and  Tabernacle  is  given  in 
the  deed  to  the  Knights  and  Daughters  of  Tabor, 
also  name  of  city,  county  and  State.) 


al^ 


The  Number  of  Trustees. 

There  may  be  three,  five,  seven  or  nine  Trus- 
tees. In  some  States  they  must  all  be  males,  in 
others  a  woman  may  be  a  Trustee.  Whatever  the 
law  is,  comply  with  it. 

Election. 

The  Trustees  are  elected  annually,  at  a  meeting 
called  for  that  purpose.  Thirty  dayS'  notice  must 
be  given,  or  the  day  and  date  fixed  in  the  By-Laws. 

Stocks  and  Shares. 

When  one  Temple  or  Tabernacle  buys  real  estate, 
it  is  not  necessary  to  form  a  joint-stock  company, 
but  when  two  or  more  join  together,  the  amount  of 
stock  should  be  fixed  and  that  divided  into  shares. 
Temples  and  Tabernacles  may  take  shares,  or  it 
can  be  made  so  that  the  individual  members  can  be 
shareholders.  None  but  members  of  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve,  however,  shall  be  share- 
holders. 

Incorporation. 

Real  estate,  upon  which  halls  are  built,  or  to  be 
built,  must  be  incorporated  in  accordance  with  the 
form  of  the  law  of  the  State  in  which  the  real 
estate  is  situated. 

Palatium  Regalia. 

The  Regalia  of  a  Palatine  Guard  shall  be  as 
follows : 

Baldric,  made  of  leather,  four  inches  wide,  length 
to  suit  the  height  of  the  person.  The  center 
emerald  green,  on  each  side  of  the  green   scarlet, 


313 


trimmed  with  gold  lace.  A  yellow  metal  star,  with 
seven  points,  on  the  shoulder;  letters  on  the  breast 
*'P.  C.  ;"  epaulet  on  left  shoulder,  ornamented  with 
green  and  gold.  Regular  Palatium  Badge.  A 
black  chapeau;  a  yellow  metal  star  with  seven 
points,  lettered  '*P.  C."  in  the  center.  Green  and 
white  feathers ;  chapeau  ornamented  with  gold  lace. 
Guantlets  or  gloves  of  brown  leather;  guantlets 
ornamented  with  ««777"  on  yellow  metal.  Dress 
black  military  suit,  with  double  row  of  yellow  metal 
buttons,  lettered  "P.  C." 

Undress  Uniform. 

Black  skull-cap,  with  gold  lace  band,  lettered 
**P.  C. ; "  sword  and  belt;  brown  lisle-thread  gloves ; 
and  regulation  badge,  of  yellow  metal. 

Regalia  of  a  Princess  of  Media. 

Light  buff  dress,  sash  six  inches  wide,  colors 
emerald  green  and  dark  pink,  three  inches  of  each 
color.  The  sash  to  hang  from  the  left  shoulder. 
A  seven-pointed  star  of  yellow  metal,  lettered  **P. 
M."  The  star  on  the  shoulder.  The  sash  is  made 
to  suit  the  height  of  the  person.  The  belt  dark 
pink,  with  a  five-pointed  star  made  of  yellow  metal, 
used  as  a  clasp,  and  lettered  **P.  M. "  Gauntlets 
and  gloves  dark  pink,  letters  on  guantlets  **P.  M. ;'' 
a  poniard  suspended  by  a  gilded  chain  near  the  left 
side ;  a  silver  cup  attached  to  the  belt,  and  a  mural 
crown,  ornamented  with  a  variety  of  colored  stones. 

The  regalia  may  be  ornamented  with  gold  lace 
and  fringe,  to  suit  the  taste. 


314 


Undress  Regalia  of  Princess  of  Media. 

Any  colored  dress  may  be  worn ;  the  regulation 
badge,  color  emerald  green  and  dark  pink;  Pala- 
tium  Badge,  attached  to  left  breast  by  a  bar  and 
pin;    also  dark  pink  gloves. 

The  flag  of  the  United  States — the  '*Star  Spangled 
Banner" — with  flags  of  other  nations  (if  thought 
proper),  shall  be  displayed  by  the  Uniform  Rank 
Knights  and  Palatine  Guards  at  all  public  parades. 

Temple — Plateau. 

Knights  of  Tabor  may  call  their  place  of  meeting 
or  hall  either  a  Temple  or  Plateau. 

Chief  Preceptress — High  Priestess. 

The  Presiding  Officer  of  a  Tabernacle  may  be 
called  either  C.  P.  or  H.  P. 


REGKLIK   B7XDGES. 


In  Solo  Deo  Salus! 


COMPLETE  LEXICON 


OF 


ABBREVIATIONS  AND  TERMS 


USED    IN   THE 


INTERNATIONAL 

ORDER  OF  TWELVE. 


318 


TABORIAN  LEXICON. 


:  o  :■ 


Abbreviations — The  abbreviations  which  are 
used  in  the  Order  are  fully  explained  for  the  bene- 
fit of  the  member!',  as  follows: 

A.  D. — An7io  Domini — in  the  year  of  the  Lord, 
dating  from  the  birth  of  Christ  up  to  the  present 
time. 

A.  M. — Anyio  Mundi — the  year  of  the  world,  the 
age  of  the  world. 

A.  O.  T.— Age  of  Taborians. 

I.  S.  D.  S.—'^In  Solo  Deo  Scdus''—^'ln  God 
Alone  is  Safety" — The  motto  of  the  Order. 

K.  O.  T.— Knights  of  Tabor. 

U.  R.  T.— Uniform  Rank  of  Tabor. 

D.  T.— Daughter  of  Tabor. 

D.  P. — Daughter  Priestess. 

Q.  M. — Queen  Mother. 

M.  A.  P.— Maids  and  Pages. 

T.  C. — Taborian  Cadets. 

P.  P. — Presiding  Prince  of  the  Palatium. 

V.-Ps. — Yice-Princess  of  the  Palatium. 

P.  R.  M. — Prince  of  the  Royal  House  of  Media. 

P.  O.  M.— Princess  of  Media. 

P.  P.  P.— P.ist  Presidinir  Prince. 

p.  y.-Ps.—Past  Vice-Princess. 
317 


318 


C.  M.— Chief  Mentor— the  Presiding  Officer  of 
the  Temple. 

p.  C.  M.— Past  Chief  Mentor. 

C.  P. — Chief  Preceptress — The  Presiding  Officer 
of  the  Tabernacle. 

P.  C.  P.— Pasi  Chief  Preceptress. 

H.  P. — High  Priestess — Presiding  Officer  in  the 
Ancient  Tabernacle. 

C.  S.— Chief  Scribe  of  Temple. 

C.  T. — Chief  Treasurer  of  Temple. 

C.  O.— Chief  Orator  of  Temple. 

C.  C.  B— Chief  Color  Bearer  of  Temple. 

C.  D.-M.— Chief  Drill-Master  of  Temple. 

C.  G.— Chief  Guard  of  Temple. 

C.  St.— Chief  Sentinel  of  Temple. 

y.-P. — Vice-Preceptress     or     Vice-Priestess    of 
Tabernacle. 

C.  R. — Chief  Recorder  of  Tabernacle. 

C.  Tr. — Chief  Treasurer  of  Tabernacle. 

C.  Ps. — Chief  Priestess  of  Tabernacle. 

C.  T.— Chief  Tribune  of  Tabernacle. 

I.  St. — Inner  Sentinel  of  Tabernacle. 
Titles. 

Temple— C.  M.  or  Sir  Chief. 

Tabernacle,  in   the    Fourth   Degree,    H.    P.    or 
Tharbis. 

Palatium — P.  P.  or  Sir  Prince. 

Tents— C.  M.  P.  or  Chief  Maid. 

Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. — C.    G.    M.    or 
Grand  Chief. 

International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. — I. 
C.  G.  M.  or  International  Grand  Chief. 

I.  O.  T. — International  Order  of  Twelve, 


319 


C.  M.  P.— Chief  Maid— the  Presiding  Officer  of 
the  Tent. 

C.  G.  M. — Chief  Grand  Mentor— the  Presiding 
Grand  Officer  of  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

P.  C.  G.  M.— Past  Chief  Grand  Mentor. 

C.  G.  P. — Chief  Grand  Preceptress. 

P.  C.  G.  P.— Past  Chief  Grand  Preceptress. 

G.  Q.  M. — Grand  Queen  Mother. 

P.  G.  Q.  M.— Past  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

D.  G.  M. — Deputy  Grand  Mentor,  or  District 
Grand  Mentor. 

D.  G.  P. — Deputy  Grand  Preceptress. 

G.  T.  T.— Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

I.  C.  G.  M. — International  Chief  Grand  Mentor 
— the  Presiding  Officer  of  the  International  Grand 
Temple  and  Tabernacle. 

P.  I.  C.  G.  M.— Past  International  Chief  Grand 
Mentor. 

I.  C.  G.  P. — International  Chief  Grand  Precep- 
tress. 

P.  I.  C.  G.  P.— Past  International  Chief  Grand 
Preceptress. 

I.  G.  Q.  M. — International  Grand  Queen  Mother. 

P.  I.  G.  Q.  M. — Past  International  Grand  Queen 
Mother. 

I.  D.  G.  M. — International  Deputy  Grand  Men- 
tor. 

I.  G.  D. — International  Grand  Deputy  (a 
Daughter). 

I.  G.  T.  T. — International  Grand  Temple  and 
Tabernacle. 


320 


A. 

Agla — One  of  the  twelve  cabalistic  names 
which  the  ancient  Magies  of  Persia  and  other  mystic 
workers  used  to  express  the  incommunicable  name 
of  the  Deity — the  names  given  are  as  follows : 

Ehi,  Azazel,  Eloho,  El-Gibbor,  Eloah,  Sabaoth, 
Tseboath,  Shaddai,  Adonai,  Makom  and  Agla. 
The  followers  of  Mithra,  in  practicing  their  mystic 
rites,  worshipped  God  under  the  name  of  Agla. 

Amath — A  noted  Prince  of  the  Tribe  of  Ben- 
jamin. He  was  a  giant  in  strength,  and  one  of 
Israel's  mightiest  warriors,  a  cotemporary  with 
Barak  and  Deborah ;  and  history  tells  us  that  he 
was  one  of  the  leaders,  with  ten  thousand  warriors, 
who  conquered  Sisera  and  his  army  in  a  battle  near 
Mount  Tabor,  b.  c.  1336. 

Adotiia — The  Jews  did  not  believe  it  right  to 
pronounce  the  true  name  of  God.  Joseph  us,  the 
Jewish  historian,  said  it  was  not  lawful  to  pro- 
nounce His  holy  name.  In  re^wiing,  whenever  the 
word  Jehovah  occurred,  tiiey  abstained  from  pro- 
nouncing it,  and  used  the  word  Adonia  instead. 
The  definition  of  this  word  is  Lord  or  Master.  It 
is  one  of  the  twelve  cabalistic  names  of  God.  The 
number  *M2"  is  a  perfect  number,  and  a  symbol  of 
purity. 

A7ja — In  the  mysteries  of  Ethiopia  we  find  the 
name  Aya  used  to  express  the  Goddess  of  Thun- 
der, the  wife  of  the  River  Nile.  Si»e  was  supposed 
by  the  ancient  Ethiopians  to  have  full  comnuind  of 
the  rise  and  fall  of  the  Nile.  When  it  thundereif, 
it  was  Aya  speaking.  She  was  supposed  to  be 
seated  at  the  entrance  of  the  ancient  Tabernacle  of 


321 


Saba  Meroe,  guarded  by  a  great  serpent.     The  pre- 
cepts of  her  thunder-bolts  were  light  from  Heaven. 

Arcanum — A  mystery,  a  hidden  secret.  In 
Lai  in,  Arcanus,  a  closed  secret,  a  chest  or  box,  or  a 
secret  repository.  The  Past  Arcanum  is  the 
Twelfth  Degree  in  the  International  Order  of 
Twelve,  and  is  the  Presiding  and  Past  Presiding 
Officers'  Degree.  The  members  are  regularly  or- 
ganized, and  have  monthly  sessions.  They  rep- 
resent their  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and 
Tents. 

Adoption — The  title  of  the  First  Degree  in  the 
Tabernacle.  When  a  Daughter  takes  this  degree, 
she  is  adopted  a  Daughter  of  Tabor,  and  her  name 
is  enrolled  on  the  C.  R.'s  roll-book. 

Advance — The  title  of  the  Second  Degree  in  the 
Tabernacle.  When  the  adopted  Daughter  has 
served  her  full  time,  she  is  prepared  to  advance  to 
the  more  serious  and  trustworthy  dignity  of  a 
Daughter  of  Tabor. 

Altar — Just  after  the  dawn  and  sun-rise  of  crea- 
tion, very  early  in  the  history  of  the  world.  Altars 
were  erected,  and  sacrificial  offerings  were  made 
upon  them  in  honor  of  and  thanksgivings  to  God. 
The  first  Altar  that  history  gives  an  account  of  was 
built  by  Cain  and  Abel,  sons  of  Adam  and  Eve. 
Through  the  pages  of  history,  for  four  thousand 
years,  we  read  of  Altars  having  been  erected  for 
sacrificial  offerings  and  praises  to  God. 

In  tlie  Uniform  Rank,  or  Fourth  Degree  of  the 
Knights  of  Tabor,  the  Altar  takes  a  very  prominent 
part.     In  the  Saba  Meroe,  or  Fourth  Degree  of  the 
(11 — Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


322 


Daughters  of  TMbor,  the  burning  Altar  is  a  very 
interesting  part  of  the  ceremonies.  The  Presiding 
Officer  of  the  Temple  and  of  the  Tabernacle  is 
seated  South  of  the  Altar,  the  Vice  in  the  North, 
the  C.  R.  in  the  East  and  the  Chief  Treasurer  in 
the  West. 

Ammon — (See  Jupiter  Ammon). 

Amen — An  expression  used  at  the  closing  of 
prayer,  and  signifies  **So  be  it."  When  it  is  used 
in  a  declaration,  it  means  **Truly,  faithfuly  ful- 
filled." 

Ahassine — The  name  of  the  Inner  Sentinel  of  the 
Ancient  Tabernacle  of  Saba  Moroe.  Abyssinia,  a 
country  in  Africa,  situated  South  of  Nubia  and 
West  of  the  Red  Sea,  once  was  a  powerful  ancient 
government,  but  with  the  fall  of  Ethiopia,  Abyssinia 
gradually  lost  its  civilization  and  internal  wars 
debased  the  people  to  barbarism.  The  Abyssinians 
embraced  Christianity  under  the  reign  of  Constan- 
tine  the  Great,  and  for  a  time  these  people  lived  a 
peaceful  life,  and  the  prospects  were  that  they  would 
return  to  their  ancient  greatness,  but  internal  strife 
again  reduced  this  favored  country  to  its  savage  prac- 
tices. The  population  at  this  date  is  about  3,000,- 
000,  divided  into  many  distinct  tribes,  most  of  whom 
are  in  a  barbarous  condition.  Abassine,  the  guard- 
ian of  the  inner  entrance  of  the  ancient  Tabernacle 
was  a  native  of  that  country. 

Amisis — The  name  of  the  Priestess  of  the  Temple 
which  was  situated  in  ancient  Nubia,  in  the  famous 
city  of  Beyt-El-\Velee.  A  drawing  taken  from 
ancient  sculpture  found  in  Nubia,  represents  Amisis 
seated  in  the  northern  part  of  the  ancient  Taber- 


323 

nacle,  on  a  throne  representing  the  Moon.     She  is 

receiving  a  delegation  of  rank  which  has  come  to 

consult  Isis,  by  order  of  Ramesis  the  II,  about  the 

conducting  and  management  of  victory.     The  name 

Am  isis  is  purely   Ethiopian,    and   means    that  the 

bearer  is  a  representative  of   the  universal   power 

of  the  Supreme  Ruler  of  the  World,  or  one  able  to 

fortell  future  events. 

B. 

JBible^The  Book  of  Books,  the  Sacred  Word  of 
God,  in  which  are  contained  the  revelations  of 
the  Supreme  Being.  The  Old  and  New  Testament. 
The  rules  and  principles  of  Christian  faith  and 
practice.  It  is  humanity's  sacred  treasure.  The 
revealed  will  of  God  to  mankind.  No  person  can 
become  a  member  of  the  International  Order  of 
Twelve,  unless  a  firm  believer  in  the  teachings  of 
the  Holy  Volume. 

Barak — Al)out  the  year  1336,  b.  c.  ,  the  children 
of  Isreal  were  held  captives  by  the  Canaanites. 
They  prayed  unto  God  to  deliver  them.  He  heard 
their  petition,  and  sent  Deborah,  a  prophetess,  who 
was  Judge  of  Israel  at  that  time,  to  call  Barak,  a 
son  of  Abinoam,  of  Kedesh-Naphthali,  to  go  to 
Mount  Tabor,  and  take  with  him  ten  thousand  men 
of  the  tribes  of  Naphthali  and  Zebulon,  Barak  and 
Deborah  gathered  ten  thousand  men,  fully  armed  and 
equipped,  on  the  Phiteauof  Mount  Tabor,  and  gave 
battle  to  the  immense  hosts  of  Canaanites,  who  were 
under  the  command  of  Sisera,  and  by  the  help  of 
God  secured  a  great  victory,  and  freed  the  captive 
Isaraelites.  Knio^hts  of  Tabor  will  not  foro^et  the 
inner  history  which  secured  to  Barak  this  extra- 
ordinary victorv. 


324 


Book  of  Laws — Law  is  that  which  is  set  and 
fixed  by  statute,  an  edict,  a  rule  of  government,  an 
expressed  degree,  a  command,  an  enactment.  No 
government  could  exist  for  any  length  of  time  with- 
out a  cole  of  laws  founded  upon  the  principles  of 
justice  and  right.  All  who  are  enrolled  members 
of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve  are  presented 
with  a  book  of  laws — the  Manual  and  the  Constitu- 
tions. The  unwritten  law  is  impressed  upon  their 
memory  in  such  a  manner  that  it  cannot  be  for- 
gotton. 

Ballot — It  is  the  lawful  duty  of  the  members  of 
a  Temple  and  Tabernacle  to  ballot  on  every  candi- 
date. The  balls  are  white  and  black.  All  mem- 
bers present  at  the  Session  must  vote.  If  a  candi- 
date is  reported  on  favorably  by  the  Committee,  the 
ballot  box  is  prepared  by  one  of  the  Chief  Guards 
or  Chief  Tribunes,  who  puts  all  the  balls  into  one 
apartment  of  the  box  and  then  places  it  on  the 
altar.  The  C.  S.  or  C.  R.  calls  the  roll.  As  each 
member's  name  is  called,  the  vote  is  cast;  when  the 
roll  is  finished,  the  Guard  or  Tribune  takes  the  box 
to  the  V.-M.  or  V.-P.  who  examines  the  balls,  but 
does  not  announce.'  The  box  is  then  placed  before 
the  C.  M.  or  C.  P.,  and  is  examined,  and  the  result 
announced.  If  four  black  balls  are  found,  the 
candidate  is  rejected.  If  the  C.  M.  or  C.  P.  thinks 
a  mistake  has  been  made  by  some  member  voting  a 
black  ball,  another  ballot  is  ordered. 

Blue — One  of  the  appropriate  colors  found  in  the 
Second  Degree  in  the  Tabernacle.  It  is  an  emblem 
of  universal  love,  and  of  that  charity  which  is  as 


325 

broad  as  creation.  It  is  emblematic  of  true  friend- 
ship and  constant  benevolence. 

Banner — In  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
four  different  banners  are  used.  The  Temple 
Banner  is  made  of  heavy  silk;  colors,  one  side, 
emerald  green ;  on  the  other  side  scarlet.  The 
trimming  is  gold  ;  the  lettering  on  the  green  side  is 
^'In  /Solo  Deo  /Sahis,^^  sl  twelve-pointed  star  in  the 
center,  with  figures  ''111,''  <'999,"  and  at  the  bot- 
tom **U.  R.  of  K.  of  T;"  on  the  scarlet  side  the 
name  and  number  of  the  Temple  is  given,  a  seven- 
pointed  star,  and  the  name  of  the  city  and  State  or 
country. 

The  Tabernacle  Banner  is  made  of  heavy  silk,  one 
side  emerald  green,  the  other  side  light  pink.  Let- 
tering: on  the  green  side  is  **Saba  Meroe/'  A  shield 
with  the  following  colors:  gold,  blue,  purple,  scar- 
let and  white,  with  **333"  in  the  center  of  the 
shield. 

The  Banner  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
is  trimmed  with  gold  lace  and  fringe ;  on  the  pink 
side  the  name  and  number  of  the  Tabernacle  and 
the  name  of  the  city  and  State  and  country. 

The  Palatium  Banner  is  made  of  heavy  silk 
or  satin,  trimmed  with  gold.  The  four  colors  are 
green,  scarlet,  purple  and  white,  arranged  to  suit 
the  taste.  The  lettering  on  one  side  is  '*Royal  House 
of  Media,"  and  a  blazing  star  with  twelve  points. 
* 'International  Order  of  Twelve"  on  the  other  side. 
The  name  and  number  of  the  Palatium,  a  globe,  the 
name  of  city  and  State  and  country. 

The  Tent  Banner  is  made  of  silk  or  linen, 
trimmed  with  silver  lace  and  fringe.     The  colors 


32(3 


are  piuk  and  scarlet ;  on  one  side  a  bee-hive :  *'The 
Children  of  Mount  Tabor;"  on  the  other  side  the 
name  and  number  of  the  Tent,  and  city  and  State 
and  country.  The  Taborian  Cadets  carry  a  United 
States  flag  also. 

The  flag  of  the  United  States  of  North  America 
must  be  carried  in  all  public  processions,  and  also 
the  flag  of  other  nations  wherein  the  Order  is  es- 
tablished. 

Badges — A  badge  is  a  mark  of  distinction ;  it  is 
worn  by  Orders  and  Societies  to  designate  to  which 
Order  or  Society  the  wearer  belongs.  They  that 
wear  a  badge,  ought  to  be  prepared  to  prove  their 
right  to  display  it.  The  various  badges  worn  by 
the  members  of  the  International  Order  of  Twelve 
are  hereby  fully  explained. 

The  Badge  of  a  Knight  of  Tabor  is  a  ten-pointed 
star,  made  of  silver  or  white  metal,  with  figures 
**777'*  in  the  center;  a  scarlet  ribbon,  with  the 
Avords  * 'International  Order  of  Twelve"  printed 
thereon.  The  fastening  is  a  bar  and  pin,  worn  on 
left  breast.  The  Badge  of  a  Chief  Mentor  and  Past 
C.  M.  is  gold  or  yellow  metal,  with  an  emerald 
green  ribbon. 

The  Badtre  of  the  Dausrhter  of  the  Tabernacle  is 
a  five-pointed  star  on  a  ring  of  silver  or  white  metal, 
with  fiijures  **333"  in  the  center;  a  skv-blue  rib- 
bon,  with  the  words ''International  Order  of  Twelve" 
printed  thereon.  The  fastening  is  a  bar  and  pin, 
worn  on  the  left  breast.  This  is  the  Saba  Meroe 
Badge.  The  Badge  of  a  C.  P.  or  H.  P.  is  either 
gold  or  yellow  metal;  the  ribbon  is  emerald  green. 
The  Past  C.  P.  or  Past  II.  P.  wear  the  same. 


327 


The  Badge  of  the  Eoval  House  of  Media  is  a  ten 
pointed  siar  within  a  ring,  made  of  gold  or  yellow 
metal,  lettered  "R.  M."  in  the  center  of  the  star, 
with  fastening  bar  and  pin. 

The  Badge  of  Maids  and  Pages  is  a  white  metal 
or  silver  star,  on  the  face  of  which  are  crossed  jav- 
elins, with  letters  ''T.  T.,"  and  fastening  bar  and 

pin. 

C. 

Candace — History  informs  us  that  for  two  or 
three  centuries  the  reigning  Queens  of  Ethiopia 
were  called  Candace.  Ethiopia,  at  the  time  that 
our  Savior  was  on  earth,  was  not  the  brilliant 
government  that  it  was  when  Queen  Nicaule  visited 
Solomon,  yet  it  was  one  of  the  recognized  nations, 
under  its  own  monarchs.  Candace,  Queen  of  Ethi- 
opia, was  enrolled  among  the  sovereigns  of  the  earth. 
One  of  her  cabinet  officers  visited  Jerusalem  about 
the  time  that  Jesus  was  crucified,  and  on  his  way 
home  he  had  the  Scriptures  expounded  to  him  by 
Phillip,  an  apostle;  he  believed  and  was  baptized. 
This  Eunuch  was  a  man  of  authority  under  Queen 
Candace,  and  no  doubt  taught  the  Christian  doctrine 
in  Ethiopia.  The  name  of  Candace,  Queen  of 
Ethiopia,  will  be  perpetuated  in  the  Saba  Meroe. 

Cabalistic — The  ancient  traditions  or  a  mysterious 
science,  used  by  the  ancients  to  interpret  unpub- 
lished history  of  events.  The  Jewish  doctors  used 
a  combination  of  words,  letters  and  numbers  in 
interpreting  the  Scriptures,  and  the  cabalistic  doctors 
pretended  to  foretell  future  events  by  the  study  of 
this  science. 


328 


The  Egyptian  and  Ethiopian  priesthood  used  this 
secret  science  and  mystery  in  I  heir  mys'tic  work. 
It  was  by  this  means  they  taught  the  greatness  of 
Jehovah ;  by  this  system  they  illustrated  the  great 
truths  of  the  resurrection  and  immortality  of  body 
and  soul.  The  Knights  of  Tabor,  in  their  Third  and 
Fourth  Degrees,  have  clearly  unfolded  the  mystical 
modes  of  the  Cabala,  in  explaining  sacred  things. 

Calanthe — A  very  interesting  history  is  attached 
to  this  word.  The  great  mysteries  of  Mithras  were 
instituted  by  Zer.idusht,  a  learned  sage  of  ancient 
Persia.  The  mysteries  of  Mithras  were  divided 
into  seven  degrees.  No  one  was  accepted  to  member- 
ship until  he  had  passed  through  the  most  severe 
tests,  to  prove  that  he  was  worthy  to  be  admitted 
to  that  mystic  and  binding  friendship  which  could 
not  be  severed.  The  aspirant  for  membership  was 
first  purified  by  water  in  seven  baths,  each  bath  of 
seven  hours'  duration.  He  was  made  to  pass  through 
what  he  supposed  was  flames  of  fire.  If  he  had 
couratje  and  determination  he  wentthrouo^h  unhurt. 
The  next  was  a  fast  of  seven  days  to  test  his  en- 
durance. After  these  preparations  he  was  per- 
mitted to  enter  a  cavern,  representing  the  world ;  on 
its  walls  were  inscribed  the  celestial  signs.  Mithras 
was  represented  as  seated  in  the  sun,  denoting  that 
his  followers  paid  adoration  to  the  sun's  light,  heat 
and  fire;  to  the  right  of  Mithras  were  Dalmon  and 
Phyletus,  two  men,  with  their  right  hands  clasped 
together,  around  them  was  a  bright  rain-bow. 
They  represented  true  friendship,  and  were  votaries 
of  the  mysteries  of  Mithras.  They  had  been  tested, 
and  proved  their  ability   to   keep   aa  obligation. 


329 


Dalmon  had  been  arrested  for  killing  a  man,  and 
was  tried  before  Dionysius,  the  Governor,  holding 
oflSce  under  the  authority  of  Astyages,  King  of 
Media.  (Persia  at  that  time,  575  years,  b.  c, 
was  a  province  governed  by  Media. )  Dalmon  was 
condemned  and  sentenced  to  be  thrown  into  a  den 
of  tigers  within  five  days.  Phyletus  felt  it  his  duty 
to  save  Dalmon  or  die  for  him.  He  appealed  to 
Dionysius,  and  stated  to  him  that  Dalmon  had  a 
wife  and  children  who  depended  on  their  husband 
and  father  for  sustenance,  and  that  if  Dalmon 
could  not  be  pardoned,  he  would  take  Dalmon's 
place  and  die  in  his  stead.  He  said:  *'I  have  no 
wife  nor  children  depending  on  me,  like  Dalmon.'* 

The  Governor  declared  that  he  would  not  issue  a 
pardon,  nor  would  he  accept  the  proposition  which 
Phyletus  made  to  him.  Phyletus,  finding  that 
Dionysius  would  not  hear  him,  decided  to  make  a 
personal  appeal  to  King  Astyages.  The  king  re- 
sided in  a  distant  city.  Phyletus,  with  two  other 
friends,  mounted  on  fast  horses,  made  the  journey, 
and  appeared  before  the  king  the  next  day  after 
they  had  started. 

Phyletus  gave  a  history  of  the  case,  the  friend- 
ship that  existed  between  him  and  Dalmon,  and  his 
desire,  if  Dalmon  could  not  be  pardoned,  to  be  per- 
mitted to  die  in  his  stead.  The  king  questioned 
Phyletus,  so  as  to  find  out  the  workings  of  the 
mystic  brotherhood,  and  the  mysteries  of  Mithras. 
The  answers  were  so  interesting  and  extraordinary 
that  the  king  was  surprised  to  hear  that  such  an 
order  existed  in  Persia,  a  province  that  had  been 
lately  added  to  his  kingdom.     Calanthe,  the  only 


330 


daughter  of  the  king,  stood  near  her  father  when 
Phyletus  made  his  appeal,  and  was  so  pleased  with 
what  she  had  heard,  that  she  requested  the  king  to 
visit  the  Province  of  Persia  and  investigate  the 
statements  that  had  been  made.  The  kinof  con- 
sented,  and  preparations  were  at  once  made  for  the 
journey.  The  king,  with  a  large  escort,  arrived  in 
the  morning  of  the  very  day  on  which  Dalmon  w^as 
to  suffer  the  penalty  at  sun -down. 

After  a  short  rest,  the  king  summoned  Dionysius, 
Dalmon  and  Phyletus  to  appear  before  him.  The 
governor  explained  to  the  king  all  that  transpired 
on  the  trial,  and  that  the  laws  of  Persia  demanded 
life  for  life;  and  he  further  stated,  that. on  the  trial 
it  was  proven  that  Hieatus  had  made  the  attack  on 
Dalmon;  but  the  law  was  positive,  and  Dalmon 
must  die,  unless  the  king  decreed  otherwise. 
Phyletus  again  appealed  to  the  king,  and  said  that 
he  did  not  wish  the  king  to  abrogate  the  law,  nor 
would  he  ask  a  pardon,  but  that  if  a  life  must  be 
given  for  a  life,  he  should  permit  him  to  die  in 
Dalmon's  stead.  On  hearing  this,  Dalmon  (though 
his  wife  and  children  were  present)  protested  that 
he  alone  was  guilty,  and  he  never  would  consent  to 
let  his  friend  Phyletus  die  for  him.  Phyletus  re- 
minded Dalmon  of  his  family,  and  that  the  Mystis 
would  approve  of  his  action,  and  the  bonds  of  friend- 
ship required  the  sacrifice;  but  to  all  his  entreaties 
Dalmon  refused  to  listen.  Calanthe  pled  with  her 
father,  the  king,  to  pardon  Dalmon.  She  contended 
that  he  was  the  most  noble  man  she  ever  heard 
speak,  .and  that  the  friendship  between  Phyletus 
and  DalmoD  was  wonderful  beyond  expression,  and 


331 


that  such  greatness  of  courage  and  fidelity  should 
merit  the  king's  approval. 

Astyages  conferred  apart  with  Dionysius.  AYhen 
he  returned,  he  stated  that  the  laws  of  the  Meads 
and  Persians  could  not  be  abrogated  or  annulled, 
and  Dalmon  must  be  cast  into  the  tigers'  den,  and 
that  he  would  not  permit  Phyletus  to  take  his 
place.  The  sentence  was  that  Dalmon  must  be 
cast  into  the  tigers'  den.  Calanthe  and  Phyletus 
attempted  to  speak,  but  the  king  would  not  listen  to 
them.  The  king,  with  his  escort,  accompanied  the 
guards  with  Dalmon  to  the  den.  Just  as  the  sun 
was  setting,  they  lifted  Dalmon  to  cast  him  into  the 
den,  amid  the  cries  of  his  wife  and  children.  Phy- 
letus made  one  more  effort  to  take  his  place,  but 
was  held  back  by  the  guards.  Dalmon  asked  to 
speak,  and  the  king  gave  him  permission,  he  said, 
'^Phyletus  I  leave  my  wife  and  children  in  your 
care;  now,  Oking,  I  die  contented."  The  king  gave 
the  signal,  and  the  guards  lifted  Dalmon  and  let 
him  down  into  the  den.  (The  manner  in  which 
Dalmon  was  saved  appeared  wonderful  to  those  who 
were  not  let  into  the  secret.  Under  the  orders  of 
the  king,  secretly  given  to  Dionysius,  he  instructed 
the  keepers  of  the  tigers  to  fasten  them  up  in  the 
second  room  of  the  den.  Dalmon  was  let  down 
into  the  empty  room.  The  keepers  were  instructed 
to  open  the  middle  door  as  soon  as  Dalmon  was 
drawn  out.  Those  who  looked  into  the  opening 
could  see  the  tigers  as  they  walked  around.  All 
this  was  kept  a  secret  from  the  people  by  the 
keepers.) 


332 


At  length  the  king  said,  Calanthe,  go  to  the 
opening  and  call  Dalmon.  The  guards  removed 
the  cover,  and  Calanthe  called  Dalmon ;  he  ans-wered, 
O,  Calanthe,  Agla  has  preserved  my  life.  The 
king,  on  hearing  his  voice,  ordered  the  guards  to 
let  down  a  rope  and  lift  Dalmon  out  of  the  den. 
The  law  and  the  sentence  has  been  complied  with, 
and  he  is  free.  When  Dalmon  was  drawn  out,  the 
people  gave  a  great  shout  of  joy.  They  said  it 
was  a  wonderful  deliverance.  Calanthe  was  repre- 
sented in  the  cavern,  seated  in  the  moon,  an  emblem 
of  her  care  over  the  members  of  the  mystic  order 
of  Mithras,  during  the  night  of  danger  and  distress. 

Candidate — One  who  ^eks  and  aspires  to  an 
office,  elective  or  appointive.  A  petitioner  to  any 
Order  or  Society  is  a  candidate  for  membership. 

Chief  Mentor — ^The  title  of  the  Presiding  Officer 
in  a  Temple  of  The  Knights  of  Tabor. 

Chief  Preceptress — The  title  of  the  Presiding 
Officer  in  a  Tabernacle  of  the  Daughter  Priestesses 
of  Tabor. 

Cush — The  name  of  Ham's  eldest  son.  He  was 
the  founder  of  the  Kingdom  of  Ethiopia.  The  de- 
scendants of  Cush,  or  Cushites  as  they  were  called, 
were  the  most  ancient  civilized  nation  on  earth. 
Saba  Meroe,  the  capital  of  Ethiopia,  was,  according 
to  ancient  writers,  one  of  the  most  beautiful  cities 
in  the  world.  It  was  the  residence  of  the  proud 
kings  and  queens  of  Ethiopia  for  over  two  thousand 
years.  In  that  city  was  situated  the  ancient  Taber- 
nacle. The  title  of  Priestess,  in  the  Daughters  of 
Tabor,  is  derived  from  that  Tabernacle. 


333 


The  musty  pages  of  ancient  history  give  but  an 
item  here  and  there  of  the  grandeur  of  this  magnifi- 
cent empire.  A  great  part  of  its  history  is  so 
mixed  with  that  of  Egypt,  that  unless  the  searcher 
for  the  truths  of  history  carefully  separates  the 
historical  facts  pertaining  to  these  two  noted 
countries,  there  will  be  a  tendency  to  award  to 
Egypt  what  belongs  to  Ethiopia.  The  opening  to 
civilization  of  Central  Africa  by  Cush  is  traced 
back  to  2,000  years  before  Christ.  The  writings  of 
Herodotus,  Diodorus,  Siculus  and  Josephus,  and 
the  testimony  given  in  the  Bible,  and  the  admirable 
work  of  Major  Martin  R.  Delaney,  on  the  * 'Origin 
of  Races  and  Colors,"  clearly  proves  that  the  Ethi- 
opians were  the  first  enlightened  and  civilized 
people  on  earth.  Major  Delaney  gave  this  subject 
years  of  careful  research  and  study,  and  to  the 
unprejudiced  mind  establishes  the  truth  of  Ethi- 
opia's ancient  civilization.  The  definition  of  the 
word  Cush,  or  Kush,  is  black,  or  dark  brown. 

Cushites — The  descendants  of  Cush. 

Cahri — The  mysteries  of  Cabri  originated  among 
the  Syrians.  It  was  the  name  of  the  Phenician 
God.  The  worship  of  Cabri  was  fir&t  established 
by  the  children  of  Sydyk,  and  they  were  taught 
how  to  build  ships  by  Cabri.  The  mysteries  were 
practiced  by  the  Samothracians,  Thebians  and  the 
Lemnos.  The  object  of  the  mysteries  was  to  make 
men  just  and  virtuous. 

Ghus — (See  Abassine.  ) 

Cyrene — A  noted  city  in  Africa.  It  was  one  of 
the  cities  cotemporary  with  ancient  Saba,  and  was 
celebrated  for  the  learning    and  refinement  of  its 


334 


citizens.  The  Ethiopic  mysteries  were  taught  by 
the  priesthood.  They  were  represented  in  the 
ancient  Tabernacle.  The  part  performed  by  the 
Priestesses  of  Cyrene  was  to  attend  the  Altar  and 
keep  a  perpetual  fire  burning  on  it.  They  did  this 
for  hundreds  of  years.  A  school  of  philosophy 
was  sustained.  Aristippus  and  many  others  of  note 
were  the  instructors.  Josephus  speaks  of  Cyrene 
as  one  among  the  powers  in  African  civilization. 

D. 

Dalmon — The  mysteries  of  Mithras  were  founded 
upon  the  influence  of  true  friendship.  The  mem- 
bers were  bound  together  by  the  mystic  rite  of 
initiation,  which  emblematized  the  union  of  soul  and 
body.  Death  could  only  part  them.  The  followers 
of  Mithras  were  always  prepared  to  defend  a  mem- 
ber or  sacrifice  their  lives  to  save  him,  and  to  die 
for  him  if  necessary.  Dalmon  and  Phyletus  proved 
by  their  courage  and  fidelity  to  each  other  that  the 
cords  of  Mithrian  true  friendship  could  not  be 
broken.  (See  Calanthe.)  It  was  from  this  part  of 
the  history  of  the  mysteries  of  Mithras  that  the 
legend  of  Damon  and  Pythias  was  written.  The 
name  Dalmon  signifies  true  and  unalterable  friend- 
ship. 

Deborah — The  fourth  chapter  of  Judges  (Bible) 
informs  us  that  Deborah  was  a  prophetess  and  a 
judge  in  Israel.  This  distinguished  woman  lived 
between  Ramah  and  Bethel,  on  Mount  Epliraim, 
and  was  a  judge  and  prophetess  of  the  Israelites 
1,296  years  before  Christ.  This  part  of  the  Scrip- 
tures  is  a  pleasing   study.     It  proves   that   God 


335 


entrusts  his  work  and  the  accomplishment  of  great 
events  to  the  brain  and  hands  of  women  as  well  as 
men,  and  establishes  one  of  the  teachings  of  the 
International  Order  of  Twelve,  which  is  that  a 
woman  is  man's  equal. 

E, 

Egypt — This  famous  country  is  situated  in  the 
northeastern  part  of  Africa,  between  Nubia  and 
the  Mediterranean  See.  Egypt  was  settled  by 
Mizraim,  the  second  son  of  Ham.  Owinff  to  the 
close  proximity  to  Ethiopia  and  the  close  relation- 
ship of  the  founders,  the  Egyptians  soon  adopted 
the  Ethiopian  civilization.  For  many  years  these 
two  nationalities  were  united  under  one  govern- 
ment. Ham,  the  father  of  Gush  and  Mizraim, 
lived,  after  settling  in  Africa,  about  three  hundred 
years.  He  resided  for  a  number  of  years  in  Egypt, 
and  was  a  co-ruler  with  Mizraim,  until  his  death. 
Modern  writers  make  the  mistake  of  awarding^  to 
Egypt  the  title  of  the  first  civilized  government  on 
earth.  This  is  the  fault  of  not  taking  the  proper 
means  to  explain  the  two  forms  of  government,  and 
in  giving  of  each  the  true  historical  facts.  When 
the  truth  is  told,  without  prejudice,  Ethiopia  stands 
at  the  head  of  civilization.  It  is  a  proud  title,  and 
the  descendants  of  this  noble  ancient  people  must 
not  permit  this  honor  to  be  taken  from  them ;  in 
fact,  it  cannot  be  lost — historical  facts  must  and 
will  stand.  The  hieroglyphical  records  on  the 
sculptured  stones,  found  in  various  parts  of  Ethi- 
opia, are  evidence  of  African  greatness.  The  sym- 
bolized columns  of  the  Temples  in  Nubia,  which  have 


336 


been  covered  by  the  dust  of  ages,  have  recently  been 
excavated,  and  the  student  of  history  can  read  on 
them  the  history  of  a  great  people. 

Ethiopia — (See  Cush,  and  Egypt.)  It  would 
take  too  much  space  to  give  a  history  of  this  country 
in  detail. 

Eloliim — This  is  one  of  the  names  of  God.  It 
is  a  sacred  and  mystic  name.  The  name  symbolizes 
the  Holy  Trinity,  a  mysterious  union  in  the  God- 
head. The  ancient  Jews  had  a  deep  reverence  for 
this  name  of  the  Deity,  and  never  pronounced  it, 
but  substituted  the  word  Adonia,  or  Father. 

East — In  the  Saba  Meroe,  the  Priestess  of  Mem- 
non  is  seated  in  the  East,  symbolizing  the  rising 
of  the  sun,  and  the  beginning  of  another  day. 

Elton — The  candidates  in  the  Ethiopic  mysteries 
had  to  pass  through  a  purification,  divided  into  three 
parts.  The  first,  air;  the  second,  fire;  the  third, 
water.  A  subterranean  chamber  was  so  arranged 
that  a  fierce  wind  sweept  through  it.  If  the  candi- 
date succeeded  in  passing  through  the  chamber,  he 
was  informed  that  he  had  been  favored  by  El  ion. 
The  chamber  of  fire  was  presided  over  by  Eloi. 
The  chamber  of  water  was  presided  over  by  Noil. 
In  p.issing  these  three  chambers,  the  candidate 
proved  his  courage  and  will-power.  Elion  means 
mortality;  Eloi,  immortality;  Noil,  true  happiness. 
These  words  have  a  prominent  place  in  The  Key 
Knights'  history. 

F. 

Four — In  searching  among  the  mysteries  of 
Mithras,  we    find  the   figure  four  (4)  one  of  the 


337 


mystic  numbers.  God  was  worshiped  under  the 
name  of  Agla.  When  thej  desired  their  members 
to  assemble  in  case  of  a  sudden  emergency,  the 
trumpet  was  sounded  distinctly  three  times  four. 
It  made  no  difference  what  a  member  was  doing  at 
the  time,  everything  was  dropped  to  obey  that  call. 

G. 

God — The  word  God  is  of  strictly  Anglo-Saxon 
origin,  and  means  Good  Being,  from  the  attribute 
of  Goodness,  Jehovah,  a  Supreme  Being,  All-power- 
ful, Divine.  The  only  one  for  mankind  to  worship. 
The  Creator,  Eternal  and  Sovereign  Ruler  of  the 
Universe.  In  our  investigations  of  the  ancient 
mysteries,  we  find  that  in  many  of  them  the  pure 
worship  of  God  is  veiled  in  symbols  and  metaphors, 
and  yet,  when  we  sift  the  language,  and  find  its 
allegorical  meaning,  it  is  the  highest  and  most  ex- 
alted worship  of  the  true  God. 

H. 

Hyerego — In  the  ancient  Tabernacle  of  Saba 
Meroe,  there  was  a  Priestess,  whose  duty  it  was 
to  offer  incense  on  the  burning  altar.  She  was  the 
Oracle,  was  gifted  with  knowledge,  could  solve 
problems,  and  foretell  future  events.  She  sym- 
bolically represented  the  power  of  faithful  prayer. 
* 'Whatsoever  ye  ask  in  faith,  believing  it  sh^ll  be 
given,"  is  the  words  of  our  Savior. 

Hesper — The  ancient  Tabernacle  was  so  situated, 
that  the  approach  to  it  was  very  difficult  for  those 
who  were  strangers.  The  Priestesses  of  Hesper  were 
detailed  for  the  special  duty  of  guiding  strangers 


338 


through  the  winding  and  intricate  jDassages  to  the 
entrance.  Their  name  implies  that  they  were  from 
the  western  part  of  Ethiopia.  The  symbol  worn 
by  them  consisted  of  three  stars,  as  a  sign  that  they 
belonged  to  the  Hesperine  Priesthood,  and  had 
direct  communication  with  the  Garden  of  Hespe- 
rides. 

Hesperides — An  Ethiopic  legend,  handed  down 
from  the  remotest  period,  speaks  of  the  Garden  of 
Hesperides.  It  was  said  to  have  been  situated  in 
Central  Africa,  and  was  a  most  beautiful  and 
brilliant  garden — a  Paradise  to  live  in.  The  ancient 
Ethiopians  believed  that  it  was  the  abode  of  those 
who  originally  taught  their  forefathers  and  founders 
the  great  lessons  of  social  civilization — morals, 
literature,  religion,  and  all  the  sciences.  The  em- 
blems and  precepts  taught  by  them  are  of  the 
hio^hest  order.  The  Phenix — Motto :  We  reorene- 
rate  ourselves.  The  Ram — Motto:  Peace,  patience, 
friendship.  The  Thunderbolt — Motto :  Light  from 
heaven.  The  Great  Serpent,  whose  body  sur- 
rounded the  entire  garden — The  precepts :  Fear  not 
God's  works,  they  are  good.  The  Pyramid — Motto : 
The  Lord  has  been  merciful  to  us. 

The  philosophy  of  the  Hesperides  is  replete  with 
beautiful  legendary  instructions.  It  shows  the 
ideal  consummation  of  social  and  religious  civiliza- 
tion. The  Garden  of  Hesperides  was  a  symbol  rep- 
resenting ancient  Ethiopia  in  the  lead  of  the  civil- 
ized world. 

I. 

Indian — In  some  parts  of  the  ritualistic  work  of 
the  International   Order  of   Twelve,  reference  is 


339 


made  to  the  Indian  mysteries.  Nearly  all  the  ancient 
mysteries  had  their  origin  in  Ethiopia  or  Egypt. 
After  a  thorough  search  for  a  derivation  of  the 
mysteries  of  India,  we  find  that  they  originated  in 
the  East.  The  Gymnosophists  were  celebrated  for 
their  learning.  They  inculcated  a  belief  in  the 
triad  of  Gods,  under  the  names  of  Brama,  Vishnu, 
and  Siva,  and  these  were  represented  as  the 
supreme,  eternal,  and  uncreated  God.  They 
taught  the  immortality  of  the  soul.  The  mysteries 
were  divided  into  four  defi^rees.  The  initiation  was 
very  severe,  and  required  courage  and  endurance. 
The  ceremonies  were  interspersed  with  prayer, 
fasting  and  ablutions.  The  candidate  was  required 
to  serve  in  a  preparatory  state  for  several  months, 
by  prayer,  fasting,  and  cleansing  and  purifying  by 
water.  The  First  Degree  represented  our  first 
parents  in  Paradise — in  happiness.  The  Second 
Degree  represented  them  expelled  from  the  garden, 
and  their  sufferings.  The  Third  Degree  repre- 
sented the  life  in  the  world,  with  its  cares  and  toils. 
The  candidate  was  impressed  with  what  he  saw  and 
heard,  and  that  a  pure  life  in  this  world  and  a  firm 
belief  in  Brama,  Vishnu,  and  Siva,  would  insure  an 
eternal  life  of  happiness.  The  Fourth  Degree  rep- 
resented the  soul  entering  Paradise.  He  was  en- 
trusted with  the  sacred  word,  *'Aum,"  which  sig- 
nifies :  created,  preserved  and  saved. 

The  object  of  the  Indian  mysteries  was  to  teach 
the  unity  of  God,  and  the  necessity  of  living  a  pure 
life. 


340 
J. 

Jahin — One  thousand  three  hundred  years  before 
the  advent  of  Christ,  the  Lord,  the  children  of 
Israel  were  held  in  bondage  by  Jabin,  King  of 
Canaan.  Deborah,  a  prophetess,  being  inspired 
by  the  Lord  God,  caused  Barak  to  gather  from  the 
tribes  of  Naphthali  and  Zebulon  ten  thousand  men 
on  Mount  Tabor,  to  do  battle  against  the  large  army 
of  Jabin.  Deborah  said  that  God  had  promised 
them  the  victory,  and  Israel  would  be  freed. 
History  tells  us  that  a  desperate  battle  was  fought — 
God  fighting  for  Israel — Jabin' s  hosts  were  con- 
quered and  Israel's  bondage  was  broken.  The  defi- 
nition of  the  word  Jabin  is :  he  will  cause  pain. 

Jewels — The  accepted  definition  of  the  word 
Jewel,  is  personal  ornaments  of  gold,  silver  and 
precious  stones.  In  the  International  Order  of 
Twelve  the  ofiicial  badges  worn  by  the  officers  are 
called  Jewels.  The  following  is  a  description  of 
the  various  official  Jewels  worn  in  the  different  de- 
partments. 

The  Temples  have  twelve  Jewels.  Ten-pointed 
stars,  made  of  silver  or  white  metal ;  ribbon,  light 
scarlet,  with  the  words  * 'International  Order  of 
Twelve"  printed  thereon,  fastened  by  a  bar  andpin  ; 
in  the  center  of  the  star  the  initial  letters  of  the 
different  officers  are  placed.  The  C.  M.'s  Jewel 
has  green  ribbon  and  yellow  metal  star. 

The  Tabernacle  has  eighteen  Jewels.  Five- 
pointed  star,  resting  on  a  ring  made  of  silver  or 
white  metal,  in  the  center  of  star  the  initials  of  the 
different  officers  are  placed ;  ribbon,  sky-blue,  with 


341 


< 'International  Order  of  Twelve"  printed  thereon, 
fastened  by  a  bar  and  pin.  The  C.  P.'s  ribbon  is 
green,  and  yellow  metal  star. 

The  Palatium  has  twelve  Jewels.  Seven-pointed 
star,  made  of  gold  or  yellow  metal,  the  star  en- 
closed in  a  ring.  The  initials  of  the  various  officers 
are  placed  in  the  center  of  the  star;  ribbon,  green 
and  scarlet,  and  lettered  '*I.  O.  of  12,"  fastened 
by  a  bar  and  pin. 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles  have  twenty- 
seven  Jewels.  Ten-pointed  star,  made  of  gold  or 
yellow  metal,  enclosed  in  a  ring,  ornamented  with  a 
wreath;  in  the  center  of  the  star  the  initial  letters 
of  the  various  officers  are  placed;  green  ribbon,  on 
which  ''Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle"  is  printed, 
fastened  by  a  bar  and  pin. 

The  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 
has  thirty-three  Jewels.  A  twelve-pointed  star, 
made  of  gold  or  yellow  metal,  with  six  long  and  six 
short  points,  enclosed  in  a  ring,  ornamented  with 
green,  red  and  white  stones.  In  the  center  of  the 
star  the  initial  letters  of  the  various  officers  are 
placed;  green  ribbon,  on  which  is  printed  "Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve,"  fastened  by  a  bar  and 
pin. 

K. 

King — The  word  king  occurs  several  times  in 
various  parts  of  the  ritualistic  work  of  the  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor.  In  the  primary,  ancient 
sense,  the  word  king  means  the  head  or  chief  of  a 
family  or  race;  the  common  term  means  a  monarch, 
sovereign  or  chief  ruler,  over  a  nation  or  cpuntries, 
and  they  usully  have  hereditary  succession. 


342 


Knight — The  institution  of  the  Knighthood  was 
first  conferred  by  kings  and  emperors  as  a  mark  of 
honor  upon  some  distinguished  soldier  or  states- 
man. The  ceremonies  of  the  Knighthood  were  very 
impressive.  Organized  Knighthood  commenced 
about  the  year  302  b.  c.  by  St.  Helena,  the  mother 
of  Constantine  the  Great.  The  Order  of  Knights  of 
the  Holy  Sepulchre  was  instituted  by  her.  These 
Knights  were  eminent  for  their  courage  and  fidelity 
to  the  Christian  religion.  There  are  at  this  day  a 
large  number  of  organized  Knights  among  the 
various  Secret  Orders. 

Kush — (or  Gush) — The  eldest  son  of  Ham. 

KusMtes — (or  Gushites) — The  descendants  of 
Kush  (or  Gush). 

I.. 

Law-Booh — A  book  containing  or  treating  of  the 
laws. 

Lyhenus — In  the  mystic  work  of  Ethiopia  Ly- 
benus  was  a  very  prominent  figure,  and  was  en- 
trusted with  especial  duties.  The  Priestess  of 
Lybia,  or  we  will  say  the  several  Priestesses  of  that 
country,  under  the  name  of  Lybenus,  were  always 
on  duty  as  guards  of  the  entrance  to  the  ancient 
Tabernacle,  at  the  mystic  door.  All  who  ap- 
proached must  give  the  Niolotic  word  and  sign. 
In  the  Taborian  formula  Lybenus  is  symbolized  in 
a  true  representative  manner. 

M. 

Media — This  remarkable  country  was  a  civilized 
government  nearly  one  thousand  years  before 
Christ.     They  traced  their  origin  to  the  ancient 


343 


2end  Tribes.  The  Sacred  Book  of  Zendavesta  un- 
folds a  system  of  ceremonial  religion  which  is  traced 
back  to  the  Ethiopic  mysteries.  The  history  of  the 
Medes  is  well  worthy  of  careful  study. 

Meroe — The  city  of  Meroe,  situated  in  Central 
Africa,  was  built  on  the  banks  of  the  river  Nile. 
It  was  the  most  ancient  city  in  the  world.  Its 
African  name  was  Saba.  The  sacerdotal  and 
palatial  city  of  Ethiopia,  the  residence  of  the  kings 
and  queens.  Within  its  walls  was  the  ancient 
Tabernacle,  which  was  instituted  to  preserve  the 
name  and  worship  of  the  true  God.  Two  thousand 
years  before  Christ  this  city  was  the  seat  of  learn- 
ing and  refinement.  It  is  said  to  have  been  the 
most  beautiful  city  that  was  ever  built.  Strangers 
and  foreigners,  who  visited  this  city,  call  it  the 
Celestial  City.  During  the  time  that  Solomon ,  King 
of  Israel,  was  in  the  height  of  his  glory,  this  city 
sent  one  of  its  most  learned  women,  Queen  Nicaule 
of  Ethiopia,  called  Queen  of  Sheba  in  the  Scriptures, 
to  test  his  wisdom.  After  a  contest  of  many  days,  the 
queen  declared  that  Solomon  was  the  wisest  man 
whom  she  had  ever  met,  and  Solomon  said  she  was 
the  most  learned  woman  in  the  world.  These  two 
distinguished  monarchs,  who  stood  at  the  head  of 
their  respective  governments,  were  the  wonder  and 
admiration  of  all  the  other  nations.  Meroe,  with 
its  marble  palaces  and  impregnable  walls,  which  the 
large  Egyptian  army,  under  the  command  of  that 
able  general,  Moses,  the  Hebrew,  after  months  of 
battering,  could  not  make  an  impression  upon,  this 
city,  which  from  its  strength  seemed  to  be  enabled 
to  stand  for  all  time  to  come,  has  passed   away, 


344 


buried  under  the  dust  of  ages.  No  vestige  now 
remains  of  this  once  ^Dowerful  city,  and  the  people 
of  Ethiopia  are  scattered.  The  wheel  of  time  which 
rolled  Ethiopia  to  the  bottom  of  the  hill,  tliat  same 
wheel — mark  wliat  I  say — will  some  day  roll  it  to 
the  top  of  the  hill  again.     God  is  just. 

N. 
Nicault — History  speaks  of  several  queens  of 
Ethiopia.  In  this  Lexicon  we  will  only  refer  to  two 
of  them.  Nicaule  was  crowned  Queen  of  Ethiopia 
and  Egypt  about  the  year  980  before  Christ. 
These  two  powerful  kingdoms  had  for  a  number  of 
years  been  united  under  one  government.  This 
queen  excelled  in  learning  and  diplomacy.  It  was 
this  queen  who  visited  King  Solomon  when  he  was 
in  the  zenith  of  his  glory,  992  years  before  Christ. 
Josephus  speaks  of  this  visit,  and  says  f-he  was 
admired  for  her  many  accomplishments  and  learn- 
ing. Chapter  10, 1st  Kings  (Bible)  tells  us  that  she 
visited  Solomon  to  test  his  wisdom  by  propound- 
ing very  difficult  questions.  This  chapter  refers  to 
her  as  Queen  of  Sheba.  The  word  Sheba  niLans 
conversion.  It  is  certain  that  this  queen  was  con- 
verted to  the  Jewish  faith  during  her  visit  to  Solo- 
mon. Some  modern  writers  have  endeavored  to 
prove  that  this  queen  was  not  the  reigning  monarch 
of  Ethiopia  and  Egypt,  by  asserting  that  she 
was  a  Sabean,  from  South  Arabia;  but  Josephus, 
with  full  access  to  the  records  of  Jewish  history, 
could  not  make  a  mistake,  and  he  was  an  unpreju- 
diced writer.  The  truth  will  prevail,  and  that  is 
that  she  was  an  Ethiopian,  and  the  most  learned 
woman  of  the  age  in  which  she  lived. 


345 


Odin — The  founder  of  the  Odonic  mysteries  was 
born  in  the  city  of  On,  in  Lower  Egypt,  about 
the  beginning  of  the  Christian  era.  He  traveled 
among  the  Asiatic  tribes,  and  assisted  by  Segge,  the 
Chief  of  the  Asers,  initiated  them  into  the  myster- 
ies of  Odin.  The  precepts  were  peculiar,  some 
of  which  we  here  give,  as  follows:  **Let  not  your 
right  hand  know  what  your  left  hand  doeth,"  and 
"a  secret  is  not  a  secret,  when  it  becomes  the  prop- 
erty of  those  who  have  no  right  to  it." 

Odo — The  sacred  Ethiopic  name  of  the  Wife  of 
Thunder.  When  the  thunder  rolled,  the  wife  shed 
tears,  and  the  river  Nile  overflowed  its  banks,  and 
Egypt  was  blessed  with  a  plentiful  harvest.  This 
mystic  legend  is  a  beautiful  one. 

Om — This  peculiar  word,  in  the  Ethiopic  lan- 
guage, signifies  the  central  power.  When  joined 
with  two  other  words,  it  means  all-powerful. 

Opliir — (See  Seraphis). 

Order — Rank,  class,  division  of  men  or  women; 
as  the  Order  of  Twelve,  etc. 

Osiris — (See  Rameses). 

P. 

Power — The  physical  ability  to  act,  strength, 
endurance,  force,  energy,  activity;  the  mental  or 
moral  faculty  of  thinking,  reasoning  and  judging; 
the  exercise  of  any  kind  of  control,  influence,  com- 
mand, sway,  governing,  dominion;  there  are  vari- 
ous other  powders,  however,  such  as  in  mechanics, 
in  optics,  in  law,  in  arithmetic,  in  Scripture,  etc. 


u^ 


Palatium — A  Latin  word,  meaning  a  palace. 
One  of  the  seven  hills  of  Rome,  on  which  Augus- 
tus Caesar  had  his  residence,  was  called  a  Pala- 
tium. The  Ninth,  Tenth  and  Eleventh  Degrees  in 
the  International  Order  of  Twelve  compose  the  third 
department  or  Royal  House  of  Media.  The  place 
of  meeting  is  called  the  Palatium. 

Palatine  Guards — The  Guards  of  the  Palace. 
This  is  the  name  of  the  drill  department  of  the  Pa- 
latium. 

Preceptress — A  teacher  or  instructor.  It  is  the 
proper  title  of  the  Presiding  Officer  in  the  Daugh- 
ter's Tabernacle,  a  department  in  the  International 
Order  of  Twelve. 

Q. 

Queen — The  wife  of  a  king,  a  woman  who  is 
the  sovereign  ruler  of  a  kingdom.  Queen  Mother 
is  the  title  of  the  executive  officer  in  a  Tent  of  Maids 
and  Pages,  the  fourth  department  in  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve. 

R. 

Revista — A  noted  Princess  of  the  Median  empire 
during  the  reign  of  Zendacer,  600  years  before 
Christ.  His  daughter,  Revista, was  his  principal  ad- 
visor, and  her  influence  was  very  great  throughout 
the  kingdom,  so  much  so,  that  the  king  consulted 
her  on  all  State  matters. 

Rameses — To  obtain  a  partial  history  of  ancient 
Ethiopia,  careful  search  must  be  made.  Upon  in- 
vestigation it  is  found  that  Ethiopia  and  Egypt,  for 
the  first  four  hundred  years  of  their  existence,  were 
so  closely  and  intimately  connected  that  they  seem- 


347 

ingly  had  but  one  government,  and  yet  the  careful 
searcher  can  trace  the  line  that  divides  the  two 
kingdoms.  The  founding  and  settling  of  Ethiopia 
and  Egypt  is  clearly  written.  Ham,  a  son  of  Noah, 
had  four  sons;  Cush,  Mizraim,  Phut  and  Canaan. 
Biblical  history  is  plain  in  its  details  of  wdiat  parts 
of  the  world  were  settled  by  the  families  of  these 
sons.  Noah  lived  three  hundred  and  fifty  years 
after  the  flood.  Since  then  the  number  of  people 
increased  considerably,  and  at  the  building  of  the 
Tower  of  Babel,  when  their  languages  were  con- 
founded, the  Lord  scattered  them  abroad  to  people 
all  the  earth.  The  families  of  the  different  sons  of 
Noah  must  have  been  very  large.  The  various 
boundaries  of  their  individual  countries  were  fixed. 
Canaan,  the  youngest  son,  settled  in  the  land  of 
Judea,  then  known  as  the  land  of  Canaan.  Nimrod 
remained  in  the  land  of  Shinar,  and  became  the 
founder  of  the  two  mighty  empires  of  antiquity, 
Assyria  and  Babylon.  Ham  and  his  three  sons, 
Cush,  Mizraim  and  Phut,  took  up  their  line  of 
march  for  Africa.  They  remained  for  a  short  time 
in  the  land  of  Media.  They  finally  crossed  the 
Isthmus  of  Suez  and  from  thence  crossed  over  into 
Africa.  Ham,  Mizraim  and  Phut  settled  on  the 
Delta  (Egypt),  and  Cush  with  his  families  pushed 
into  the  interior  of  Africa.  That  part  of  the  country 
from  the  borders  of  Egypt  to  the  interior  of  Af- 
rica was  called  Ethiopia.  Cush  laid  the  foundation 
of  Saba,  the  capital  city,  on  the  banks  of  the  river 
Nile.  This  beautiful  city  was  called  Meroe  by  the 
Greeks.  Under  the  wise  administration  of  Cush, 
Ethiopia  soon  became  a  flourishing  kingdom,  with  all 


348 


the  attributes  of  a  polished,  enlighted  people. 
Egypt,  from  the  close  relationship  of  the  people,  soon 
adopted  the  Ethiopian  manners  and  customs.  These 
two  countries  were  for  years  conjointly  under  the 
governorship  of  Ham,  Cush  and  Mizraim.  Ham, 
during  his  lifetime,  was  the  chief  ruler,  bearing  the 
title  of  Rameses  I;  after  his  death  Cush  was  the 
chief,  bearing  the  title  of  Rameses  II;  after  his 
death  Mizraim  governed,  under  the  name  of  Ram- 
eses III.  Ham  died  at  an  advanced  age,  being  much 
loved  by  the  people.  He  was  deified  under  the 
name  of  Jupiter  Amnion,  and  was  worshiped  as  a 
God.  He  is  represented  as  having  the  head  of  a 
ram,  with  a  man's  body. 

Cush,  when  he  died,  was  deified  under  the  name 
of  Sesostris.  He  w^as  represented  as  having  a  dog's 
face,  with  a  human  body. 

Mizraim,  when  he  passed  from  earth,  was  deified 
under  the  name  of  Osiris.  He  was  represented  as 
having  a  bull's  face,  with  a  man's  body. 

A  work,  **The  Antiquities  of  Africa,"  which  was 
published  in  London,  England,  in  1703,  informs 
us  that  ancient  Ethiopia  was  divided  into  forty-five 
kingdoms.  Diodorus,  Siculus,  and  other  ancient 
historians  tell  us  that  the  laws,  manners  and  cus- 
toms of  Egypt  were  nearly  the  same  as  those  of 
Ethiopia. 

There  is  no  doubt  but  that  Cush  and  Mizraim, 
after  the  death  of  Ham,  governed  conjointly  for 
the  benefit  of  both  countries.  The  pyramids  were 
undoubtedly  built  by  them.  The  principal  ones 
are  the  monuments  of  Rameses  I,  Rameses  IT,  and 
Rameses   III.     The  catacombs  and  the  numerous 


349 


temples  of  Ethiopia  and  Egypt  are  evidence  of  the 
kindred  stA'les  in  architecture.  Their  statuary  and 
heiroglyphic  characlers  were  the  same.  The  Ethi- 
opians invented  the  first  alphabet.  Job  Ludolphus, 
the  learned  Israelite  in  Ethiopic  literature,  gives  the 
form  of  16  letters  which  were  used  by  the  royal 
family  and  the  priesthood.  I  might  proceed  and 
speak  of  the  twenty-five  dynasties  under  the  Ram- 
eses,  and  the  splendor  of  Ethiopic  civilization  for 
ages,  but  must  desist  for  want  of  space. 

S. 

Sesotheni — The  Priestess  in  the  ancient  Taber- 
nacle of  Memnon — sometimes  called  the  Temple  of 
the  Sun.  When  the  sun  arose  and  cast  its  rays  on  the 
roof  of  this  beautiful  Temple  of  Memnon,  sweet 
music  continued  to  play  until  the  sun  was  at  its 
meridian.  Sesotheni  was  seated  at  the  east  side 
of  the  ancient  Tabernacle.  Her  duty  was  to  record 
the  beginning  of  another  day,  and  announce  the 
coming  of  the  Day-God. 

Sesostris — (See  Rameses) — Sesostris  was  the  first 
to  settle  in  Egypt  with  his  family. 

Seraphis — An  ancient  Priestess,  who  represented 
the  value  of  gold  and  silver.  Her  place  in  the 
ancient  Tabernacle  was  at  the  west  side.  It  was 
her  duty  to  teach  the  votaries  of  the  Saba  Meroe 
the  value  of  time,  and  that  a  minute,  hour  or  day 
lost  was  irretrievable. 

Sisera — The  name  of  the  general  who  com- 
manded the  Canaanite  Army,  which  was  defeated 
by  Barak  with  his  ten  thousand  in  the  memorable 


350 


battle  on  and  around  Mount  Tabor,  one  thousand 
three  hundred  years  before  Christ. 

Shamgar — The  name  of  one  of  Israel's  mightiest 
men.  Shamgar  was  a  son  of  Anath.  1336  years 
before  Christ  the  Israelites  and  Philistines  were 
almost  continuously  at  war.  In  one  of  the  battles 
Shamgar  slew  six  hundred  Philistines  with  an 
ox-goad. 

T. 

Tabernacle — The  definition  of  Tabernacle  is  a 
flimsily  built  temporary  habitation,  a  tent  or  port- 
able structure,  moveable  at  the  will  of  those  who 
owned  it.  A  sacred  Tabernacle  was  a  moveable 
tent-like  house,  for  the  worship  of  God.  The  most 
ancient  Tabernacle  known  was  erected  within  the 
walls  of  the  ancient  city  of  Saba,  in  Ethiopia.  It 
represented  the  temporary  existence  of  human 
beings  on  this  earth.  The  Tabernacle  erected  by 
Moses  in  the  Wilderness  of  Sin,  1491  years  before 
Christ,  for  the  worship  of  God,  while  the  children 
of  Israel  were  journeying  from  the  Red  Sea  to  the 
Promised  Land,  was  the  most  costly  one  ever  built. 
In  our  Order,  the  place  of  meeting  for  the  Daugh- 
ters of  Tabor  is  called  a  Tabernacle. 

Temple — An  edifice  erected  to  worshi{)  the  Deity. 
Temples,  for  the  worship  of  idols,  were  numerous 
in  ancient  times,  even  now  there  are  numerous 
Temples  erected  for  the  worship  of  idols.  The 
Jewish  Temple,  built  by  Solomon,  and  dedicated 
to  the  worship  of  the  true  God,  is  acknowledged  to 
have  been  the  most  artistic  structure  ever  built  by 
man.     Any  Christian  church,  or  any  place  used  for 


351 


divine  worship,  is  termed  God's  Temple.  The  place 
where  the  Knights  of  Tabor  meet  is  called  a  Temple. 

Tabor — A  lute,  or  a  kind  of  drum-guitar. 
Mount  Tabor,  a  conical  mountain  in  Galilee,  is 
about  eighteen  hundred  French  feet  high,  on  the 
top  of  which  is  a  beautiful  plateau,  about  one  mile 
in  circumference.  It  is  a  historical  mountain,  and 
a  land-mark  where  events  transpired  which  made  it 
memorable.  About  the  year  1396  b.  c.  Deborah,  a 
judge  and  prophetess  of  Israel,  summoned  Barak 
to  gather  ten  thousand  men  of  the  tribes  of  Zebulon 
and  Naphthali  on  the  top  of  Mount  Tabor  and  to 
give  battle  to  the  mighty  hosts  of  Sisera.  The 
scene  in  that  battle  was  grand — God  fought  for 
Israel  that  day.  The  stars  of  Heaven  (angels) 
fought  against  Jabin's  army.  The  lightning  and 
thunder  of  Jehovah's  power  was  hurled  against  the 
Canaanites,  and  Israel  was  victorious. 

The  second  scene  was  under  the  new  dispensa- 
tion— the  transfiguration  of  Jesus,  the  Son  of  God — 
this  glorious  sight  was  witnessed  by  three  Apostles : 
Peter,  James  and  John. 

Tetra — This  word  is  from  the  Greek,  and  means 
four.  Among  the  ancients  the  figure  four  (4)  had 
a  mystic  significance.  The  inexpressible  name  of 
the  Deity  was  expressed  in  four  letters,  the  most 
prominent  of  the  mysteries  which  originated  in 
Ethiopia  and  Egypt  and  which  were  transmitted  to 
the  surrounding  nations.  We  find  that  the  figure 
four  (4)  represented  the  Great  Ruler  of  Mankind. 
A.  G.  L.  A.  and  E.  L.  J.  E.  were  the  cabalistic  letters 
representing  the  ineffable  name  of  God.  The  figure 
four  (4)  represents  the  four  necessary  elements  to 


352 


perpetuate  the  existence  of  mankind,  namely  :  earth, 
fire,  air  and  water.  It  represents  the  four  principal 
departments  in  the  International  Order  of  Twelve, 
viz:  Temples,  Tabernacles,  Palatiums  and  Tents; 
also  the  four  Presiding  Officers :  Chief  Mentor, 
Chief  Preceptress,  Presiding  Prince,  and  Queen 
Mother. 

Three — Among  the  ancient  mysteries  the  figure 
three  (3)  occupied  a  prominent  place.  It  is  a  per- 
fect number.  It  designates  the  triune  God — the 
Father,  the  Son,  and  the  Holy  Gliost — the  Holy 
Trinity.  Among  the  pagan  nations,  the  figure 
three  was  prominent  as  a  mystic  number.  Cerberus, 
the  Dog-God,  had  three  heads.  The  scepter  of 
Neptune  was  a  trident.  A  triple  cord  was  used  in 
the  Ethiopic  mysteries.  Three  colors :  red,  black 
and  white,  were  worn  as  a  charm  to  protect  the 
wearer  in  time  of  danger.  The  three-fold  cord  was 
not  easely  broken.  Three  times-  three  are  strong 
numbers  in  the  ritualistic  work  of  the  Order  of 
Twelve.  The  three  principal  colors  of  the  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve  are  :  red,  black  and  green. 
Red  is  emblematic  of  the  blood  of  Jesus,  which 
saves  all  who  come  unto  Him  in  faith.  Bhick  is  an 
emblem  of  death,  and  reminds  us  of  the  fact  that 
all  mortals  must  pass  through  the  narrow  passage- 
way before  becoming  immortal.  Green  is  emblem- 
atic of  eternity,  and  admonishes  us  that  if  we 
would  enjoy  eternal  rest  and  happiness  we  must 
live  the  life  of  true  Christians  on  earth.  Knights 
and  Daughters  of  Tabor,  when  you  wear  the  rega- 
lia, remember  its* instructions. 


353 


Tent — A  movable  or  portable  lodge.  It  was  the 
first  covering  or  shelter  which  our  ancestors  used. 
The  fourth  department  in  the  International  Order 
of  Twelve  is  called  the  Children's  Tent.  The 
members  of  it  are  known  as  Maids  and  Pages.  But 
three  adults  are  permitted  to  be  members.  Tents 
were  organized  to  gather  in  the  children,  to  give 
them  moral  instruction,  to  teach  them  the  difference 
between  right  and  wrong,  to  guide  their  young 
minds  in  the  ways  that  will  ultimately  make  them 
good  men  and  women,  and  to  discipline  them  in 
the  obeying  of  the  laws  and  rules.  As  they  grow 
up,  the  impression  of  right  and  justice  will  be  im- 
pressed upon  them,  and  they  will  be  moral  and 
good  citizens  and  faithful  members  of  the  Order. 
The  Tent  is  governed  by  the  Constitution  and  By- 
Laws;  it  has  no  rituals  nor  degrees.  Provision  is 
made,  when  the  boys  become  18  years  of  age  and 
the  girls  16  years  of  age,  so  that  they  can  become 
members  of  either  a  Temple  or  a  Tabernacle.  If 
they  have  been  properly  instructed  in  the  Tent, 
they  will  understand  the  nature  of  a  sacred  obliga- 
tion. The  Queen  Mother  must  carefully  train  the 
girls  in  ladylike  manners  and  deportment,  and  the 
boys  in  good  manners  and  manliness.  The  Father 
of  Tents  must  teach  the  Taborian  Cadets  the  march 
and  drill.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  girls  shall  be 
drilled  in  public.  Teach  them  how  to  be  modest, 
virtuous,  and  retiring.  The  Tent  is  the  Order's 
school-house. 

Twelve — Three  times  four,  or  four  times  three, 
a  symbol  representing  twelve  units,  as  12  or  xii. 
^12 — Dickson's  New  Manual.) 


354 


Twelve  is  a  perfect  number.  A  study  of  the  twelve 
Apostles  in  the  Holy  Scriptures  is  pleasing  and  in- 
structive to  the  biblical  student.  In  many  of  the 
ancient  mysteries  the  figure  twelve  (12)  had  a 
prominent  part.  In  the  mystic  ancient  Tabernacle 
of  Saba  Meroe  there  were  twelve  divisions  of 
officers  and  members — the  most  notable  were  the 
Priestesses  of  Twelve.  In  the  Key  Knights  of 
Tabor  the  figure  twelve  (12)  represents  a  perfect 
Temple  of  the  Uniform  Rank.  There  must  be 
twelve  officers  present  to  constitute  a  Taborian 
Temple.  There  must  be  twelve  officers  to  all  pei^ 
feet  Palatiums,  of  the  Eoyal  House  of  Media.  The 
Past  Arcanum  must  have  twelve  officers.  The 
twelve  requisites  demanded  of  every  Knight  and 
Daughter  of  Tabor,  if  they  are  true  and  worthy, 
are:  1st,  Justice;  2d,  Temperance;  3d,  Prudence; 
4th,  Constancy;  5th,  Morality;  6th,  Industry ;  7th, 
Benevolence;  8th,  Love;  9th,  Truth;  10th,  Perse- 
verance; 11th  Courage;  12th,  Mercy.  Knights  and 
Daughters  are  requested  to  define  these  twelve 
requisites,  and  make  proper  application  in  their 
lectures. 

U. 

Unite — To  combine,  to  join  together,  to  form  a 
whole,  to  become  one,  cemented,  consolidated,  act- 
ing in  concert,  a  united  compact  body.  The  Inter- 
national Order  of  Twelve  of  Knights  and  Dauo^hters 
of  Tabor  is  a  unit,  bound  together  by  the  twelve 
secret  degrees. 

Unity — Means  oneness,  indivisibility,  uniformity, 
a  circle.     The    obligations    of  the    Knights   and 


355 


Daughters  of  Tabor  bind  together  the  members  in 
one  body.     The  entire  circle  is  a  unity. 

Union — The  act  of  uniting,  combining,  joining, 
consolidating  an  agreement  on  the  part  of  persons 
to  form  a  unit,  under  the  general  laws  and  rules. 
The  International  Order  of  Twelve  forms  a  union 
of  Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles,  by  its  General 
Laws. 

Uniform — The  dress  regalia  of  a  Knight  of 
Tabor.  It  is  designated  by  the  number  of  Degrees 
he  has  received,  if  he  has  received  the  full  four,  he 
is  classed  as  a  Uniform  Rank  Knight  of  Tabor. 

V. 

Vote — To  signify  will  or  preference  either  by 
ballot,  signs  or  viva  voce.  It  is  the  duty  of  every 
member  of  the  Order  to  vote,  just  as  conscience 
dictates,  and  for  the  protection  of  the  good  name 
of  the  Order.  When  a  vote  decides  a  question  or 
the  business  under  consideration,  the  minority  must 
rest  satisfied.  There  are  three  forms  of  voting  in 
the  International  Order  of  Twelve:  1st,  the  secret 
ballot,  in  the  degrees;  2d,  the  written  ballots, 
on  electing  officers ;  3d,  the  vote  by  signs.  The 
taking  of  a  vote  in  public  can  be  expressed  either 
standing  or  by  yeas  or  nays. 

Votaries — Those  who  are  devoted,  or  consecrated 
by  a  vow  or  promise.  The  Priestesses  of  Saba 
Meroe  were  votaries  of  the  ancient  Tabernacle,  and 
devoted  to  its  service  and  worship. 

W. 

West — The  ancient  Tabernacle  of  Saba  Meroe, 
faced  north  and  south.  When  the  Fourth  Degree  is 


356 


opened  for  work  or  business,  the  official  position 
of  the  four  prominent  officers  is  as  folh)ws :  Thar- 
bis,  the  High  Priestess,  is  seated  in  the  South ; 
Amisis,  the  Vice-Priestess,  is  seated  in  the  North ; 
Sesotheni,  the  Priestess  of  Memnon,  is  seated  in 
the  East;  Seraphis,  the  Priestess  of  Ophir,  is 
seated  in  the  West.  When  a  Temple  of  the  Knights 
of  Tabor  is  opened  in  any  of  the  degrees,  the  C. 
M.  is  seated  in  the  South;  the  V.-M.  in  the  Narth; 
the  C.  S.  in  the  East,  and  the  C.  T.  in  the  West. 


Xanthian — When  ancient  Ethiopia  was  in  its 
height  of  power  and  culture,  a  sect  of  Ethiopians 
formed  a  settlement  east  of  Central  Africa,  and 
built  a  city  called  Xanthus.  They  were  a  peaceful 
people,  and  excelled  in  sculpture.  The  Xanthians 
were  noted  for  their  extreme  temperate  habits. 
After  the  downfall  of  Ethiopia,  it  is  supposed  that 
a  remnant  emigrated  into  Asia,  and  settled  in  Italy, 
and  were  known  as  Xerophagists  or  dry  livers. 
They  worshiped  God  under  the  name  of  Jupiter 
Amnion.  During  their  residence  in  Xanthus  they 
were  represented  in  the  ancient  Tabernacle  of  Saba 
Meroe  by  the  Mcroes. 

Y. 

Yaruhas — The  Ethiopic  definitions  of  the  sym- 
bols, mottoes  and  precepts,  found  in  the  Garden 
of  Hesperides.  The  Yaruban  language  is  supposed 
to  be  the  ancient  Ethiopic,  and  is  spoken  to  this 
day  by  the  tribes  south  of  the  Desert  of  Sahara. 


357 


z. 


Zendavesta — Nearly  one  thousand  years  before 
Christ  the  Medes  were  a  civilized  people.  They 
drew  their  origin  from  the  ancient  Zend  races. 
These  people  possessed  a  mystic  religion,  which  they 
learned  from  the  Cushites.  The  sacred  book,  or 
Zendavesta,  unfolded  a  mysterious  system  of  cere- 
monial religion,  which  is  traced  back  to  the  myste- 
ries of  Ethiopia.  The  members  of  the  Royal 
House  of  Media  should  refer  to  the  history  of 
Media  for  further  instructions. 


Flax. 


Girdle. 


Woul. 


.// 


TABERNACLE  FURNITURE. 
(For  Other  Tabernacle  Furniture,  see  page  167.) 


358 


TEMPLE  FURNITURE. 
(For  Other  Temple  Furniture,  see  page  168.) 


359 


TEMPLE  FURNITURE. 
(For  Other  Temple  Furniture,  see  pages  168  and  359.) 


PALATIUM  BADGE. 


361 


GENeRKL-    INDEX. 


:o: 

Page. 

Introdftction 5,  6 

Biographical  Sketch  of  the  Founder 7-13 

Extract  from  I.  C.  G.  M.'s  Message 14-16 

Secrecy  of  the  Knights  of  Liberty 16,  17 

Mary  Elizabeth  Dickson 10-24 

The  Manual  Law 25,  26 

International  Constitution 27-54 

Perpetuation 33 

Duties  of  International  Grand  Officers 34-39 

International  Deputies 39-41 

Duties  of  International  Deputy  Grand  Mentor 39 

Duties  of  International  Deputy  Grand  Preceptress ....     41 

International  Rules  of  Business 47,  48 

Form  of  International  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle.     49 

Powers  and  Prerogatives  of  the  I.  C.  G.  M 50,  51 

Impeachment 52,  53 

Amendments 53,54 

Continuation  of  General  Laws 56-67 

Grand  Temples  and  Tabernacles 58,  62 

Annual  Sermons 62 

Dedicating  Halls 63 

Business  of  International  Deputies 63,  64 

International  Districts 64 

Suspensions  and  Expulsions 64,  65 

Honorary  Members  66 

Unity  of  the  International  Order 66,  67 

The  Organization's  Birthday 68 

Installing  Ceremony  of  International  Grand  Officers 69-81 

Form  of  a  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 83 

Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Officers 85,  86 

Duties  of  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Officers 87-95 

Trustees  of  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 96,  97 

Bonds 97 

Widows  and  Orphans 98,99 

Power,  Strength  and  Perpetuity 100 

Amendments  to  General  Laws 101 

The  Penalty 101,102 

362 


363 

Page. 
Installing  Ceremony  of  Grand  Temple  a' d  Tabernacle 

Officers 104-1 18 

Officers  of  a  Temple 121 

Installing  Ceremony  of  Temple  Officers 124-138 

Burial  Ceremony  of  the  Temple 139-152 

Installing  Ceremony  of  Tabernacle  Officers 156-166 

Funeral  Ceremony  of  the  Tabernacle 169-179 

The  Palatium 181-184 

Officers  of  the  Palatium 184 

Installing  Ceremony  of  the  Palatium  Officers 186-197 

Burial  Ceremony  of  Palatine  Guards 198-209 

Tents  of  Maids  and  Pages 212-218 

Instructions 213,  214 

Eegalia  of  Maids 215 

Tent  Banner 216 

Regalia  of  Queen  Mother 216 

Installing  Tent  Officers 216,  217 

Tent  Treasurer 218 

Form  of  a  Tent 219 

Officers  of  a  Tent 222 

General  Tent  Regulations 222,  223 

Funeral  Ceremony  of  the  Tent •. 224-232 

Laying  Corner-Stone 233-242 

Dedicating  Ceremony 245-256 

Uniform  Rank  Knights'  and  Palatine  Guards'  Drill. .  -257-270 

Taborian  Cadets'  Drill 271-274 

General  Rules  of  Order 275-281 

Grand  Honors 282,  283 

Rules  of  Business 284,  285 

Form  of  Reports  for  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 286,  287 

Reports  of  International  Districts 288 

Synopsis  of  Official  Forms 289-296 

Form  of  Petition— Temple 290 

Form  of  Petition— Tabernacle 290 

Form  of  Petition— Palatium 290 

Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Transfer 291 

Form  of  Temple  Transfer 291 

Form  of  Palatium  Transfer 292 

Form  of  Tabernacle  Transfer 292 

TentTransfer 293 

Traveling  Certificate— Temple 293 

Traveling  Certificate — Tabernacle 294 

Form  of  Quarterly  Report 295,  296 

Tent's  Quarterly  Report 296 


364 

Paos. 
Quarterly  Pass. 297 

Regular  Session 297 

The  Motto  of  the  Order , 298 

The  Work  and  Business  of  Members 298 

Rights  of  Chief  Mentor .' 299 

Rights  of  High  Priestess  (C.  Ps.) 299 

Rights  of  Members 299 

Rights  of  Queen  Mothers 300 

Rights  of  Presiding  Princes 300 

A  Recommendation 301 

The  Degrees 301 

International  Districts 301 

Duties  of  District  Mentor 302 

Duties  of  District  Preceptress 302 

International  District  Grand  Dues 303 

International  District  Session 303 

Regalia  of  a  Uniform  Rank  Knight 303,  304 

Saba  Meroe  Regalia 304-30G 

Mourning  Badge 306 

Form  of  Tabernacfe  House 307 

Form  of  Temple  House 307 

Temple  Furniture 303 

Tabernacle  Furniture 30S 

Form  of  Altar 30S 

Govern  ing  Departments 30  > 

Sickness 308 

District  Grand  Mentor  appointed  under  the  authority  of 

the  Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle 309 

Supplies  for  New  Organizations 310 

Incorporation 310 

Real  Estate 311 

Palatium  Regalia— Palatine  Guards 312-314 

Taborian  Lexicon 316-357 

Banners  of  the  Order 325 

Badges  of  the  Order 326 

Officers' Jewels  of  the  Ord  .r 340,  341 

Tents  and  their  Use  and  Bus: iness 353 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 

Page. 
Rev.  Moses  Dickson,  Founder  of  the  Order  of  Twelve 1 

Mrs.  Mary  Elizabeth  Dickson — Wife  of  Rev.  Moses  Dick- 
son       18 

International  Grand  Officers'  Jewels 55 

Badge  of  a  Knight  of  Tabor 82 

Grand  Temple  and  Tabernacle  Officers'  Jewels 84 

Knights'  Fancy  Badge 103 

Knights  of  Tabor  Pins  and  Emblems 119 

Temple  House 120 

Temple  Officers'  Jewels 122 

Taborian  Altar 123 

Tabernacle  House 153 

Tabernacle  Officers'  Jewels 154 

Daughters'  Pins  and  Emblems 155 

Tabernacle  Furniture — (continued  on  page  358) 167 

Temple  Furniture — (continued  on  pages  359,  360) 168 

Uniform  Rank  Helmet — Palatine  Guards'  Chapeau 180 

Uniform  Rank  Buttons 180 

Palatium  Officers'  Jewels 185 

Taborian  Cadet  Javelins 210 

Caps  of  Uniform  Rank   Knights,   Palatine  Guards  and 

Taborian  Cadets 211 

Tent  Badge 220 

Tent  House 221 

Mural  Crown 243 

Saba  Meroe  Coronets  and  Belt  Clasp 243 

Badge  of  Daughter  Priestesses 244 

Inspection  Diagram 258 

Diagram  Ko.  2 259 

Diagram  No.  3 260 

Regalia  Badges 315 

Tabernacle  Furniture^-(continued) — see  page  167 358 

Temple  Furniture — (continued) — see  page  168 359,  360 

Palatium  Badge 361 

Palatine  Guard,  Without  Baldrick 366 

365 


PALATINE  GUARD,  WITHOUT  BALDRICK. 


86$ 


RETURN  TO:      CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
198  Main  Stacks 

LOAN  PERIOD     1 
Home  Use 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS. 

Renewals  and  Recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  the  due 
date.  Books  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405. 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW. 

SENT  ON  ILL 

AUG     7  2007 

U.C.  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD6                        UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA.  BERKELEY 
50  M  3-07                                                   Berkeley,  California  94720-6000 

€%K' 


